JP2021078884A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of preferably increasing attention degree to games.SOLUTION: Based on a winning to an operation port, a main control device of a Pachinko machine executes a winning/non-winning lottery and the like for a big win or a special win. A shift is made from a normal game state to a special game state when a big win result or a special win result occurs in the lottery. The normal game state comprises: a second normal game state that deals with a high probability mode having a relatively high probability of an occurrence of the big win result and deals with a low frequency support mode having a relatively low frequency of a winning support by an electric accessory attached to the operation port; a third normal game state that deals with a low probability mode having a relatively low probability of an occurrence of the big win result and deals with a high frequency support mode having a relatively high frequency of the winning support by the electric accessory; and a fourth normal game state that deals with the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode. In the third normal game state, a shift is made to the fourth normal game state due to having the big win result before reaching a specified number of times.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 36

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a picture display device that displays a variable picture on the display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, when a prize is won in the operating port provided in the gaming area, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, such as a hit state, and a pattern is drawn. The variable display is started. When the lottery is won, a specific pattern combination or the like is finally stopped and displayed on the display screen, and the gaming state shifts to the special gaming state (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2002-78904

In recent years, various measures have been taken to increase the degree of attention to games. However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the gaming machine in order to improve the degree of attention to the gaming.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the degree of attention to gaming.

The first invention is
The game board where the game area is formed and
Special information acquisition means for acquiring special information when a ball enters the starting ball entry portion provided in the game area, and
An acquisition information storage means capable of storing special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and an acquisition information storage means.
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the predetermined determination information, and
The game rotation operation is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the game rotation operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination. With this as one game time, a game time control means that controls a predetermined notification means so that a game time operation of each game time is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined gaming state. Special game state transition means to shift to a special game state,
A variable mechanism that can switch between a receiving state in which a game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the receiving state.
A switching control means for controlling the variable mechanism is provided.
As the switching control mode of the variable mechanism by the switching control means, a first switching mode and a second switching mode in which the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode are provided.
As the determination mode in which the determination is performed by the determination means, the low probability mode in which the probability of the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively low and the probability of the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information are relative. Has a high probability mode and
As the predetermined gaming state, a first predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode and the high probability mode and a second predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode and the low probability mode are provided. ,
When the number of consecutive times in which the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information reaches a predetermined number in the first predetermined gaming state, A first transition means for transitioning to the second predetermined gaming state after the end of the special gaming state, and
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information in the second predetermined gaming state shifted from the first predetermined gaming state by the first transition means, the special gaming state It is characterized in that it is provided with a second transition means for shifting to another predetermined gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first predetermined gaming state.

The second invention is
The game board where the game area is formed and
A game ball launching means capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on the operation of the player,
A gaming machine provided with a payout means for paying out a game ball based on the ball entering the ball entry portion provided in the game area.
Special information acquisition means for acquiring special information when a ball enters the starting ball entry section as the ball entry section, and
An acquisition information storage means capable of storing special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and an acquisition information storage means.
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the predetermined determination information, and
The game rotation operation is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the game rotation operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination. With this as one game time, a game time control means that controls a predetermined notification means so that a game time operation of each game time is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined gaming state. Special game state transition means to shift to a special game state,
A variable ball entry section as the ball entry section, which can be switched between a receiving state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepting state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the receiving state.
A control means for the variable ball entry section that switches the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the special gaming state is entered
A variable mechanism that can switch between a receiving state in which a game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the receiving state.
A control means for a variable mechanism for controlling the variable mechanism is provided.
As the special gaming state, a first special gaming state and a second special gaming state in which the variable input portion is in the receiving state for a shorter period than the first special gaming state are provided.
The first judgment information and the second judgment information are provided as the predetermined judgment information.
The special game state transition means
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the first determination result corresponding to the first determination information, the means for shifting to the first special gaming state and the means.
It has a means for shifting to the second special gaming state when the determination result by the determination means becomes the second determination result corresponding to the second determination information.
As the switching control mode of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, a first switching mode and a second switching mode in which the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode are provided. Ori
As a determination mode in which the determination is performed by the determination means, a low probability mode in which the probability of the first determination result corresponding to the first determination information is relatively low and the first determination result corresponding to the first determination information are performed. There is a high probability mode with a relatively high probability of becoming
As the predetermined gaming state, the first gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode and the low probability mode, and the second determination result corresponding to the first switching mode and the high probability mode and being more than the first gaming state. A second gaming state set to increase the frequency of the occurrence and a third gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode and the low probability mode are provided.
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first determination information in the second gaming state, the first transition to shift to the third gaming state after the end of the first special gaming state. Means and
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first determination information in the third gaming state shifted from the second gaming state by the first transition means, the first special gaming state It is characterized in that it is provided with a second transition means for transitioning to another predetermined gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the two gaming states.

According to the present invention, the degree of attention to the game can be suitably improved.

It is a perspective view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the main configuration of a pachinko machine in an unfolded manner. It is a perspective view which shows the main configuration of a pachinko machine in an unfolded manner. (A) is a front view showing the configuration of a game board, and (b) is a front view of a main display unit. It is a front view of the upper variable winning device. It is a front view of the ball entry unit. It is a front perspective view of (a) right side actuating ball entry part, and (b) is schematic diagram which shows the passage structure which concerns on right side actuating ball entry part. It is a schematic diagram which shows the relationship between the passage length and the time required for passage. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the contents of various counters used for a winning / failing lottery. It is a schematic diagram which shows the hit / fail table for the 1st operation port. It is a schematic diagram which shows the hit / fail table for the 2nd operation port. It is a schematic diagram which shows (a) the distribution table for the 1st operation port, and (b) is the schematic diagram which shows the distribution table for the 2nd operation port. It is a schematic diagram which shows the relationship between a hit type and various modes. It is a schematic diagram which shows the relationship between a high frequency winning mode and a low frequency winning mode. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process which is executed in MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the game time control process. It is a flowchart which shows the control process for the 1st operation port. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing for the 1st operation port. It is a flowchart which shows the control process for the 2nd operation port. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing for the 2nd operation port. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transition process. It is a flowchart which shows the opening and closing process of a big winning opening. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st opening / closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd opening / closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode. It is a flowchart which shows the process for electric service support. It is the schematic which compared the variable display time and the fixed display time for each support mode. It is a flowchart which shows the electric service opening / closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display time setting process for the 1st operation port. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display time setting process for the 2nd operation port. It is the schematic which shows the difference of the variable display time and the fixed display time for each game state. It is the schematic which shows the difference of the variable display time and the fixed display time for each game state. It is the schematic which shows the difference of the variable display time and the fixed display time for each game state. It is a block diagram which shows the relationship of each game state. It is the schematic which compared each game state. (A) is a schematic view showing the flow of the game ball on the right route, and (b) is a schematic view showing the relationship between the launch destination and the increase / decrease of the game ball for each game state. It is a timing chart which shows the increase / decrease of the possession ball with the progress of a game. It is the schematic which compared the behavior at the time of a limiter operation and the behavior at the time of a limiter non-operation when a 2R probability variation jackpot result is obtained in the second embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the relationship of each game state. It is the schematic which shows the distribution table for the operating port in 3rd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the relationship of each game state. It is a block diagram which shows the relationship of each game state in 4th Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, referred to as “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 as viewed from the front side, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing the main configurations of the pachinko machine 10 in an unfolded manner. In FIG. 2, for convenience, the configuration in the gaming area PE of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a game machine main portion 12 attached to the outer frame 11.

The outer frame 11 is formed by connecting plate members on all four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. By attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island equipment, the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall. The outer frame 11 is not an indispensable configuration in the pachinko machine 10, and the outer frame 11 may be provided in the island equipment of the amusement park.

The game machine main portion 12 is supported by an outer frame 11 in a state where it can be opened and closed. Specifically, the upper support metal fitting 17 is fixed to the connecting portion between the upper frame portion and the left frame portion in the outer frame 11, and further below to the connecting portion between the lower frame portion and the left frame portion in the outer frame 11. A side support metal fitting 18 is provided. A support mechanism is composed of the upper support metal fittings 17 and the lower support metal fittings 18, and the support mechanism causes the game machine main portion 12 to rotate on the left side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11. , The right side is the rotation tip side, and the pachinko machine 10 can be rotated forward (see FIGS. 2 and 3).

As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine main portion 12 includes an inner frame 13 as a base body, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack arranged behind the inner frame 13. It is equipped with a unit 15. The inner frame 13 of the main portion 12 of the gaming machine is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can rotate forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view.

The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view. Further, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and can be rotated rearward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side when viewed from the front. (See FIG. 3).

(Front door frame 14)
Next, the front door frame 14 will be described. As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is mainly composed of a synthetic resin frame body 20 having an outer shape substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11, and covers almost the entire front surface of the inner frame 13. There is. A substantially elliptical window portion 21 is formed in the central portion of the frame body 20 so that almost the entire area of the game area PE, which will be described later, can be visually recognized from the front, and the window portion 21 is the same by the glass unit 22. It is closed from the back side of the front door frame 14.

The glass unit 22 includes a plurality of transparent glass panels 23 and a glass holder for holding the glass panels 23. The glass holder is formed with a partition portion for partitioning the holding region of the glass panel 23 back and forth, and both glass panels 23 face each other in the front and rear with the partition portion interposed therebetween. That is, by securing a predetermined gap between the two glass panels 23, the game area PE is doubly covered from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 by the glass panels 23 while avoiding interference between the glass panels 23. It is in a state.

It is not always necessary to unitize both glass panels 23 by using a glass holder, and each glass panel 23 may be individually attached to the frame body 20. Further, the number of glass panels is arbitrary, and may be one or three or more. However, from the viewpoint of improving safety and crime prevention, it is preferable to employ a plurality of glass panels and to face each of these glass panels in the front-rear direction with a predetermined gap in between. Incidentally, it is also possible to use a transparent synthetic resin panel member instead of the glass panel.

As shown in FIG. 1, light emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the glass unit 22 (specifically, the window portion 21). For example, an annular illumination portion 26 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED is provided along the peripheral edge of the window portion 21. The annular illumination unit 26 is lit or blinked according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach. Further, an error display lamp unit 27 that lights up at the time of a predetermined error is provided at the center of the annular illumination unit 26 and at the top of the pachinko machine 10, and a prize that lights up during the payout of the prize ball is provided on the left and right sides thereof. A ball lamp portion 28 is provided. Further, a speaker unit 29 for outputting a sound effect or the like according to the game state is provided at a position close to the left and right prize ball lamp units 28.

Below the window portion 21 in the front door frame 14 (frame body 20), an upper bulging portion 31 bulging toward the front side and a lower bulging portion 32 are vertically arranged side by side. An upper plate 33 that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 31, and a lower plate 34 that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 32. The upper plate 33 has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launch mechanism side described later while arranging them in a row. Further, the lower plate 34 has a function of storing excess game balls in the upper plate 33.

A game ball launching handle 41 is provided on the right side of the lower bulging portion 32 so as to project toward the front side. By operating the game ball launch handle 41, the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism described later.

As shown in FIG. 2, a passage forming unit 45 is attached to the back surface of the front door frame 14. The passage forming unit 45 is formed of synthetic resin and has a front door side upper plate passage leading to the upper plate 33 and a front door side lower plate passage leading to the lower plate 34. In the passage forming unit 45, a receiving portion that protrudes rearward and is opened upward is formed in the upper corner portion thereof, and the entrance portion of the upper plate passage on the front door side is formed by partitioning the receiving portion to the left and right by a partition wall. A section is formed between the portion and the entrance portion of the lower plate passage on the front door side. The game ball that has entered the front door side upper plate passage is guided to the upper plate 33, and the game ball that has entered the front door side lower plate passage is guided to the lower plate 34.

On the rotation base end side on the back surface of the front door frame 14, protrusion shafts are provided at the upper end portion and the lower end portion thereof. These protrusion shafts form an assembly mechanism for the inner frame 13. Further, as shown in FIG. 2, a plurality of hook metal fittings 49 extending rearward are arranged side by side in the vertical direction on the rotation tip side on the back surface of the front door frame 14. These hook fittings 49 form a locking mechanism for the inner frame 13.

(Inner frame 13)
Next, the inner frame 13 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 2 and 3. The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 50 having a substantially rectangular outer shape like the outer frame 11. The height dimension of the resin base 50 is set to be slightly smaller than the height dimension of the outer frame 11. Further, the resin base 50 is arranged close to the upper frame portion of the outer frame 11, and a slight gap is formed between the lower frame portion of the outer frame 11 and the resin base 50. A curtain plate is attached to the outer frame 11 so as to close this gap. The curtain plate is arranged below the resin base 50 (specifically, the lower end thereof), and the resin base 50 is placed on the curtain plate when the inner frame 13 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11. ..

Support metal fittings 51 and 52 are attached to the upper end and the lower end of the rotation base end side of the front surface of the resin base 50. Shaft holes are formed in the support metal fittings 51 and 52, and the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 13 by inserting the protruding shaft of the front door frame 14 into the shaft holes. ing.

Insertion holes for inserting the hook metal fittings 49 provided on the back surface of the front door frame 14 are provided on the rotation tip side of the front surface of the resin base 50. As shown in FIG. 3, the pachinko machine 10 has a configuration in which a locking device 55 for locking the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is hidden behind the inner frame 13. Therefore, when the hook metal fitting 49 is locked to the locking device 55 (specifically, the hook receiving member for the front door) through the insertion hole, the front door frame 14 is locked to the inner frame 13 in an unopenable manner. Further, the locking device 55 has an inner frame hook member 57 extending rearward of the inner frame 13. The inner frame hook member 57 is hooked on the hook receiving member 19 of the outer frame 11 to lock the gaming machine main portion 12 in a closed state with respect to the outer frame 11.

A cylinder lock 58 for unlocking the locking device 55 is installed in the lower right corner of the resin base 50. The cylinder lock 58 is integrated with the locking device 55, and when the key inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 58 is turned to the right, the lock of the front door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13 is released and the cylinder lock 58 is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 58. The locking device 55 is configured so that the inner frame 13 is unlocked with respect to the outer frame 11 when the key is turned counterclockwise.

A substantially elliptical window hole 54 is formed in the central portion of the resin base 50, and the window hole 54 is closed from the rear by a game board 60 mounted on the resin base 50. The game board 60 has a wooden plywood and a sheet material covering the front side plate surface of the plywood, and the front surface thereof is exposed to the front side of the resin base 50 through the window hole 54. A game area PE on which the game ball flows down is formed on the exposed portion, that is, on the front surface of the game board 60. The game board 60 is not limited to wood, and may be made of synthetic resin.

Hereinafter, the game board 60 (particularly various configurations arranged in the game area PE) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view of the game board 60.

(Game board 60)
The game board 60 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the thickness direction (front-back direction) of the game board 60. A general winning opening 61, an operating ball entry portion 62, 63, a variable winning device 64, 65, a through gate 66, a variable display unit 67, and the like are arranged in each opening. When a ball enters a ball entry section such as a general winning opening 61, an actuating ball entry section 62, 63, or a variable winning device 64, 65, it is detected by a detection sensor, and a predetermined number of prizes are awarded based on the detection result. Benefits such as paying out balls are given to the player.

Specifically, when a ball enters the general winning opening 61, 10 game balls are paid out, and when a ball enters the operating entry unit 62, 2 game balls are paid out. Is executed, one game ball is paid out when the ball enters the operating ball entry unit 63, and 10 balls are paid out when the ball is entered into the upper variable winning device 64. When the payout of the game balls is executed and the balls are entered into the lower variable winning device 65, the payout of five game balls is executed.

An out port 68 is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 60, and game balls that have not entered the various entry sections are discharged from the game area PE through the out port 68. Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening portion, and the game ball has passed through the opening portion as well as the mode in which the game ball is discharged from the game area PE after passing through the opening portion. A mode in which the game area PE is not discharged later is also included. In the following description, in order to clearly distinguish from the entry of the game ball into the out opening 68, the entry into the general winning opening 61, the operating entry section 62, 63, the variable winning devices 64, 65, and the through gate 66. Is also expressed as a prize.

Further, in the game board 60, a large number of nails 69 are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the flow path of the game ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged. Depending on the various configurations of the nail 69, the windmill, and the like, the flow path of the game ball is differentiated, and the above-mentioned general winning opening 61 and the like are adjusted so as to generate a prize with an appropriate probability. The general winning opening 61 is arranged only on the left route, which will be described later, and the game ball launched to the left route can be awarded to the general winning opening 61, while the game ball launched to the left route can be entered on the right route, which will be described later. It is not possible to win a prize in the general winning opening 61 for the launched game ball.

The variable display unit 67 is arranged in the center of the game board 60, and the actuating ball entry portions 62, 63 and the like are arranged around the variable display unit 67. In the following description, the actuated ball entry part 62 is referred to as the "first actuated ball entry section 62", the actuated ball entry section 63 is referred to as the "second actuated ball entry section 63", and the actuating port of the first actuated ball entry section 62 is referred to as the "first actuating ball entry section 62". The operating port of the first operating port 62a and the second operating ball entry portion 63 are appropriately distinguished as the “second operating port 63a”.

The first actuating ball entry portion 62 is roughly divided into a lower actuating ball entry section 62L arranged below the variable display unit 67 and a right actuating ball entry section 62R arranged to the right of the variable display unit 67. Will be done. Of these lower actuating ball entry section 62L and right actuating ball entry section 62R, the right actuating ball entry section 62R has an opening / closing assisting device (ball entry assisting means) or an electric accessory as an opening / closing member (opening / closing means). 71 is attached.

The electric accessory 71 includes a shutter and a solenoid-type drive unit that drives the shutter, and the position of the shutter is changed by the drive unit, so that the right-side actuating ball entry portion 62R (first actuating port 62a) is provided. It is possible to switch between an open state (accepting state) in which the ball can be entered into the right operating port 62aR) and a closed state (non-accepting state) in which the ball cannot be entered. The electric accessory 71 attached to the right-side actuating ball entry portion 62R may be switched between a state in which the ball can be easily entered into the right-actuating opening 62aR and a state in which it is more difficult to enter the ball.

The through gate 66 is arranged at a position on the game area PE (detailed on the right route described later) on the upstream side of the right-handed ball entry portion 62R, specifically on the side (right side) of the variable display unit 67. There is. The through gate 66 allows game balls to pass in the vertical direction, and the game balls that have won the through gate 66 flow down to the downstream side of the game area PE without being discharged from the game area PE. There is. When a lottery triggered by the passage of the through gate 66 of the game ball is won, the electric accessory 71 is switched from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time.

The upper variable winning device 64 is arranged at a position between the through gate 66 and the right-handed ball entry portion 62R on the right route. The upper variable winning device 64 is formed with an upper prize opening that allows a plurality of game balls to enter at the same time, and is provided with an opening / closing mechanism as an opening / closing means for opening / closing the upper prize opening. The opening / closing mechanism includes a shutter as an opening / closing member for a large winning opening. The shutter can be switched between an open state (auxiliary state or accepting state) that allows or facilitates the entry of a game ball, and a closed state (non-assisted or non-accepting state) that makes it impossible or difficult to enter the game ball. It has become. In addition, the shutter is connected to a variable winning drive unit (more specifically, a solenoid), and the shutter is maintained in the closed state in the normal state, and in the above internal lottery, the opening / closing execution mode (special game state or opening / closing execution state) is entered. It is possible to switch to the open state when the transition result of.

The lower variable winning device 65 is arranged at a position on the right route on the downstream side of the right-handed ball entry portion 62R. The lower variable winning device 65 is formed with a lower large winning opening capable of simultaneously entering a plurality of game balls, and is provided with an opening / closing mechanism as an opening / closing means for opening / closing the lower large winning opening. The opening / closing mechanism includes a shutter as an opening / closing member for a large winning opening. The shutter can be switched between an open state (accepted state) in which the game ball can be entered and a closed state (non-accepted state) in which the same ball cannot be entered. In addition, the shutter is connected to a variable winning drive unit (more specifically, a solenoid), and the shutter is maintained in the closed state in the normal state, and in the above internal lottery, the opening / closing execution mode (special game state or opening / closing execution state) is entered. It is possible to switch to the open state when the transition result of.

Here, the open / close execution mode is a mode that shifts to a big hit or a special hit. As an opening mode of the variable winning device 65 in the opening / closing execution mode, for example, a predetermined period (30 sec or 0.8 sec in the present embodiment) elapses or a predetermined number (6 in the present embodiment) of winning is 1 As the rounds, the shutter is set to be released up to a predetermined number of rounds (1, 2, 3 rounds in the present embodiment) as the upper limit.

Details will be described later, but in the present embodiment, the special gaming state that shifts when a big hit result or a special hit result is obtained corresponds to a variable winning device to be opened and a first winning mode having a different opening / closing mode. It is roughly divided into those that support the second prize mode. If a big hit result is obtained, the game shifts to a special gaming state corresponding to the first winning mode. In the special gaming state corresponding to the first winning mode (first special gaming state), the upper variable winning device 64 is set as an opening target, and a predetermined opening time (30 sec in detail) elapses or a predetermined number (6 in detail). The opening is repeated with the occurrence of the ball entering as one round and the upper limit of multiple rounds. On the other hand, if a special hit result is obtained, the game shifts to a special game letter corresponding to the second winning mode. In the special gaming state corresponding to the second winning mode (second special gaming state), the lower variable winning device 65 is set as an opening target, and a predetermined opening time (0.8 sec in detail) elapses or a predetermined number (specifically, 0.8 sec) elapses. The second special gaming state ends when any of the 6) ball innings is established. In this way, the first special game state is set so that the winning frequency is relatively high, and the second special game state is set so that the winning frequency is relatively low, and the number of prize balls that can be obtained is set. There is a difference.

Next, the variable display unit 67 will be described. The variable display unit 67 has a symbol display device 75 that variably displays (variably displays) the symbols triggered by winning a prize in the actuating ball entry units 62 and 63.

The symbol display device 75 is configured as a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display, and the display content on the display screen 75a is controlled by a display control device described later. On the central portion of the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75, for example, symbols are displayed side by side on the left, middle, and right, and these symbols are scrolled in the vertical direction to be displayed in a variable manner. Then, in the case of a big hit or a special hit, a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on the preset effective line, and the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode. The symbol display device 75 does not necessarily have to be a liquid crystal display device, and may be a dot matrix or a 7-segment type display device.

Further, in the variable display unit 67, a center frame 76 is arranged so as to surround the symbol display device 75. The center frame 76 is fixed to the game board 60 from the front side thereof, and in such a fixed state, the center frame 76 and the glass unit 22 stand up from the front side of the game board 60. The gap between the two and the ball is configured to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, it is prevented that the game ball flowing down the game area PE collides with the symbol display device 75, and the flow path of the game ball flowing down the game area PE is on the right side of the variable display unit 67 (specifically, the center frame 76). It is roughly divided into the above right route that detours from the left side and the left route that detours from the left side.

The right-hand actuated ball entry unit 62R, the second actuated ball entry section 63, the variable winning devices 64, 65, and the through gate 66 described above are arranged on the right route, and the game balls flowing down the left route are on the right side. Winning to the actuating ball entry unit 62R, the second actuating ball entry unit 63, the variable winning devices 64, 65, and the through gate 66 is avoided. On the other hand, the first actuating ball entry portion 62 is arranged on the left route, and the game ball flowing down the right route goes to the first actuating ball entry portion 62 (lower actuating port 62aL constituting the first actuating port 62a). Winning is avoided. By selecting the launch destination of the game ball (the flow path of the game ball) from the right route / the left route according to the game situation, the player can advance the game in an advantageous manner for himself / herself. Although the details will be described later, in the gaming machine shown in the present embodiment, the player is suggested to the player a route for launching the gaming ball according to the gaming state on the display screen 75a of the speaker unit 29 and the symbol display device 75. ..

A main display unit 81 is arranged on a protective member for the guide rail 100 arranged outside the game area PE. The front surface of the main display unit 81 faces the glass unit 22 (specifically, the glass panel 23 on the rear side) that makes the game area PE visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. A main display unit D for displaying a predetermined pattern or the like is provided. The main display unit 81 is electrically connected to a main control device described later, and the display content of the main display unit D is controlled by the main control device.

The main display unit D is a display unit D1 for the first operating port that displays the lottery result based on the winning of the first operating ball entry unit 62 (first operating port 62a), and the second operating ball entry unit 63 (the second operating ball entry unit 63). The second operating port display unit D2 for displaying the result of the lottery performed based on the winning of the two operating ports 63a) is provided.

In the display unit D1 for the first operating port, a variation display of the pattern is performed triggered by winning a prize in the first operating ball entry unit 62 (first operating port 62a), and as a result of stopping the variation display, the first operation is entered. The result of the internal lottery conducted based on the winning of the ball part 62 is specified. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the first operating ball entry unit 62 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, the variable display is stopped on the display unit D1 for the first operating port. After the predetermined pattern is displayed as the stop result, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode.

In the display unit D2 for the second operating port, the variation display of the pattern is performed by triggering the winning of the second operating ball entry unit 63, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the second operating ball entry unit 63 (second operating port). The result of the internal lottery conducted based on the winning of 63a) is specified. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the second operating ball entry unit 63 is a winning result corresponding to a big hit or a special hit, the variable display is stopped on the display unit D2 for the second operating port and stopped. As a result, after a predetermined pattern is displayed, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode according to the result.

Here, based on the winning of any of the operating ball entry units 62 and 63, the variation display is started on the corresponding operation port display units D1 and D2, a predetermined stop result is displayed, and the above variation display is stopped. Until it is played, it corresponds to one game. However, one game round is not limited to the above contents, and for example, a single display area is provided, and even if any of the actuated ball entry portions 62 and 63 is awarded, the single display area is provided. In a configuration in which variable display is performed in one display area, the variable display is started in the single display area, and the game is played until the variable display is stopped while displaying a predetermined stop result. Once.

The main display unit D of the main display unit 81 is provided with a hold number display unit S1 for the first operating port and a hold number display unit S2 for the second operating port. The hold number display unit S1 for the first operation port corresponds to the first operation port 62a, and the number of times the game ball wins the first operation port 62a is held up to four times, and the hold number display unit for the first operation port is held. The number of holds is displayed by lighting S1. The holding number display unit S2 for the second operating port corresponds to the second operating port 63a, and the number of times the game ball wins the second operating port 63a is held up to four times, and the holding number display for the second operating port is displayed. The number of holds is displayed by lighting the unit S2.

In addition to the various display units, the main display unit D of the main display unit 81 is provided with a through gate display unit DS that displays lottery results based on winning a prize in the through gate 66. In the through gate display unit DS, the variation display of the pattern is performed triggered by the winning of the through gate 66, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 66 is obtained. Be specified. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the through gate 66 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the electric service open state, the predetermined stop result is displayed on the through gate display unit DS and the variable display is displayed. After being stopped, the state shifts to the electric service open state. In the electric service open state, the electric accessory 71 attached to the right-side actuating ball entry portion 62R is opened in a predetermined mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of times the game ball has passed through the through gate 66 is held up to 4 times, but the number of times held is displayed on the main display unit D of the main display unit 81. A through gate holding number display unit SS is provided.

Explaining the configuration of the inner frame 13 again with reference to FIG. 2, the game ball is directed toward the game area PE based on the operation of the game ball launching handle 41 below the mounting area of the game board 60 in the resin base 50. A game ball launching mechanism 110 for firing the plastic is provided. The game ball launch mechanism 110 includes a solenoid 111 that launches a game ball arranged at a predetermined launch standby position, a launch rail 112 that defines a launch direction of the game ball launched by the solenoid 111, and a game at the launch standby position. A ball feeding device 113 for supplying balls and a base plate 114 on which these various configurations 111 to 113 are mounted are provided as a main configuration, and the base plate 114 is fixed to the resin base 50 to be attached to the resin base 50. On the other hand, it is integrated.

The launch rail 112 is fixed to the base plate 114 in a state of being inclined obliquely so as to be inclined upward toward the game board 60 side. At a position closer to the downstream end (that is, the lower end) of the launch rail 112, a ball stopper that holds the game ball supplied from the ball feeding device 113 to the launch standby position described above is arranged. The solenoid 111 is arranged at a position further downstream from the ball stopper.

The solenoid 111 is electrically connected to a power supply / emission control device described later. The output shaft of the solenoid 111 reciprocates in the expansion and contraction direction based on the output of the electric signal from the power supply / launch control device, so that the game ball placed in the launch standby position is on the game board 60 side, in detail, the game. It is launched toward the guide rail 100 mounted on the board 60.

In the guide rail 100, the game area PE is divided into sections so that the outer shape of the game area PE is substantially circular. Further, the guide rail 100 is composed of an inner rail 101 and an outer rail 102 arranged so as to face each other with a gap slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the guide passage 103 is divided by both rails 101 and 102. It is formed. The guidance passage 103 has an entrance portion opened to the tip end side (obliquely downward) of the launch rail 112 and an exit portion located above the game area PE. The game ball launched based on the operation of the solenoid 111 is guided to the game area PE by moving in the order of the launch rail 112 → the guidance rail 100 (entrance portion → exit portion). By adjusting the operation amount of the game ball launch handle 41, the area on the left side of the variable display unit 67 in the game area PE (left route) and the area on the right side of the variable display unit 67 in the game area PE (right route). It is possible to hit the game ball to.

In the game board 60, a reversion prevention member 106 for preventing the reversal of the game ball that has reached the game area PE into the guidance passage 103 is attached to the front side of the exit portion, specifically, near the tip of the inner rail 101. This prevents the game ball that has reached the game area PE first from hindering the subsequent launch of the game ball.

The guide rail 100 (see FIG. 4) and the launch rail 112 are arranged so that the entrance portion of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the launch rail 112 diagonally face each other with the lower end edge of the game board 60 interposed therebetween. That is, both of the rails 100 and 112 are arranged so that the entrance portion of the guidance rail 100 and the tip portion of the launch rail 112 are displaced to the left and right near the lower end edge of the game board 60. As a result, both rails 100 and 112 are brought closer to the lower end edge of the game board 60, and a gap of a predetermined interval is formed between the inlet portion of the guide rail 100 and the launch rail 112.

A foul ball passage 46 is arranged below the gap formed in this way. The foul ball passage 46 is integrally molded with the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14. If the game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 110 does not reach the game area PE and returns in the guidance passage 103 as a foul ball, the foul ball enters the foul ball passage 46 through the gap. It becomes. The foul ball passage 46 leads to the lower plate passage on the front door side, and the game ball that has entered the foul ball passage 46 is discharged to the lower plate 34 shown in FIG. As a result, the interference between the foul ball and the game ball to be launched next is suppressed.

In the resin base 50, a through hole is formed on the left side of the launch rail 112 (specifically, the side supporting the front door frame 14) through the resin base 50 in the front-rear direction, and a passage forming member is formed in this through hole. 121 is arranged. The passage forming member 121 is screwed to the resin base 50 and has an upper plate passage on the main body side and a lower plate passage on the main body side. The upstream side of the main body side upper plate passage and the main body side lower plate passage leads to a game ball distribution section described later. Further, the receiving portion of the passage forming unit 45 attached to the front door frame 14 is inserted below the passage forming member 121, and the front door side upper plate passage is arranged below the main body side upper plate passage. The front door side upper plate passage is arranged below the main body side lower plate passage.

In the resin base 50, below the passage forming member 121, an opening / closing member 124 for opening and closing the main body side upper plate passage and the main body side lower plate passage is attached. The opening / closing member 124 is rotatably supported in the front-rear direction by a support shaft provided at the lower end thereof, and an urging member that urges the front position to close the upper plate passage on the main body side and the lower plate passage on the main body side. It is provided. Therefore, when the front door frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 13, the opening / closing member 124 rises as shown in the drawing and closes the main body side upper plate passage and the main body side lower plate passage. As a result, when the front door frame 14 is opened while the game balls are stored in the upper plate passage on the main body side or the lower plate passage on the main body side, the inconvenience that the stored balls are spilled can be prevented. On the other hand, when the front door frame 14 is closed, the opening / closing member 124 is pushed open against the urging force by the receiving portion provided in the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14. In this state, the main body side upper plate passage and the front door side upper plate passage communicate with each other, and the main body side lower plate passage and the front door side lower plate passage communicate with each other.

Next, the back configuration of the inner frame 13 (resin base 50 and game board 60) will be described with reference to FIG.

Bearing metal fittings 132 are arranged vertically on the rotation base end side on the back surface of the resin base 50. Bearing portions are formed on the bearing fitting 132 so as to be separated from each other in the vertical direction, and the back pack unit 15 is rotatably attached to the inner frame 13 by these bearing portions.

A plurality of locking metal fittings 135 are provided on the back surface of the resin base 50, and the game board 60 is attached to the resin base 50 by these locking metal fittings 135 as described above. Here, the configuration of the back surface of the game board 60 will be described.

A display control device is attached to the variable display unit 67 arranged at the center of the game board 60 so as to cover the variable display unit 67 from behind (not shown). A notification / effect control device unit 142 is mounted behind the display control device so as to overlap the display control device. The notification / effect control device unit 142 is configured to include a notification / effect control device 143 and a mounting base 144, and the notification / effect control device 143 is mounted on the mounting base 144.

The notification / effect control device 143 includes a notification / effect control board that controls voice and lamp display and control of the display control device according to instructions from the main control device described later, and the notification / effect control board is made of a transparent resin material. It is configured to be housed in a substrate box 145 made of the above.

On the back surface of the game board 60, as shown in FIG. 3, a set plate 150 is provided below the variable display unit 67. The collecting plate 150 is provided with a game ball collection mechanism for collecting game balls that have won prizes in various winning openings, a detection mechanism for detecting the entry of game balls into various winning openings, and the like.

Explaining the game ball collection mechanism, the collecting plate 150 is provided with collection passages individually corresponding to various ball entry portions such as the general winning opening 61. These collection passages descend from the ball entry portion along the back surface of the game board 60, and define a fall path for the game ball. The collection passages meet near the lower end of the game board 60, and all the game balls that have passed through the entry part such as the general winning opening 61 gather at the lower part of the game board 60 through the collection passage. It becomes. The outlet portion of each collection passage is open downward, and a discharge passage described later is provided on the front side thereof (specifically, below the game board 60). The game balls gathered below the game board 60 by the collection passage are led out to the discharge passage. The out port 68 is also connected to the discharge passage, and the game ball that has not won any prize is also led out to the discharge passage through the out port 68.

Explaining the detection mechanism, the collecting plate 150 is provided with detection sensors individually corresponding to various entry portions such as the general winning opening 61. These various detection sensors are arranged in the middle of each collection passage connected to the ball entry portion such as the general winning opening 61, and the game ball is in a state where the drop path of the game ball is defined in the collection passage. Detect passage. More specifically, each detection sensor detects the entry of the ball into the entry opening such as the general winning opening 61 by passing the game ball through the detection area provided in the middle of each collection passage. Specifically, a magnetic sensor that grasps a change in the magnetic field that occurs when the game ball passes through the detection region is adopted.

These various detection sensors are electrically connected to the main control device unit 160 (specifically, the main control device) provided on the back side of the game board 60, and the detection signals in these detection sensors are transmitted to the main control device. Is output. Hereinafter, the main controller unit 160 and its associated configuration will be described.

The main control device unit 160 is mounted on the game board 60 so as to cover the collecting plate 150 from the rear side, and is mounted on the game board 60 by a mounting base 161 made of synthetic resin and a main control device 162 mounted on the mounting base 161. It is configured. The main control device 162 includes a main control board having a function of controlling the main control of the game (main control circuit) and a function of monitoring the power supply (power failure monitoring circuit), and the main control board is made of a transparent resin material. It is configured to be housed in a substrate box 163 made of the above.

The substrate box 163 includes a box base (front case body) having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape and a box cover (back case body) that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are unopenably connected by a sealing portion as a sealing means, whereby the substrate box 163 is sealed. A plurality of sealing portions are provided on the long side portion of the substrate box 163, and at least one of them is used to perform the sealing process.

Any configuration can be applied to the sealing part as long as the box base and the box cover cannot be opened, but by inserting a locking claw into the elongated hole that constitutes the sealing part, the box base and the box cover can be separated. It is designed to be combined so that it cannot be opened. The sealing process by the sealing part prevents unauthorized opening after the sealing, and makes it possible to detect such a situation early and easily even if the unauthorized opening is performed, and once opened. It is possible to perform the sealing process again later. That is, the sealing process is performed by inserting the locking claw into at least one elongated hole among the plurality of sealing portions. Then, when the board box 163 is opened, such as when a defect occurs in the housed main control board or when the main control board is inspected, the connecting portion between the sealing portion into which the locking claw is inserted and another sealing portion is connected. Disconnect. As a result, the box base of the board box 163 and the box cover are separated, and the main control board inside can be taken out. After that, when the sealing process is performed again, the locking claw is inserted into the elongated hole of the other sealing portion. If the history of opening the board box 163 is left in the board box 163, it can be easily found by looking at the board box 163 that the illegal opening has been performed.

A plurality of bonding pieces are provided on one short side portion of the substrate box 163 so as to project laterally. These coupling pieces have a one-to-one correspondence with a plurality of bonded pieces formed on the mounting base 161, and the bonding pieces and the bonded pieces perform a sealing process between the substrate box 163 and the mounting base 161. Will be

(Back pack unit 15)
Next, the back pack unit 15 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 3.

As shown in FIG. 2, the inner frame 13 is covered from the rear by the back pack unit 15. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 201, and a payout mechanism unit 202, a discharge passage board, and a control device collecting unit 204 are attached to the back pack 201.

The back pack 201 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and as shown in FIG. 3, the base portion 211 to which the payout mechanism portion 202 and the like are attached and the protective cover portion 212 protruding rearward of the pachinko machine 10 to form a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. And have. The protective cover portion 212 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface are closed and only the lower surface is open, and has a size sufficient to surround at least the variable display unit 67.

The base portion 211 is provided with an external terminal plate 213 on the upper right portion thereof. Various output terminals are provided on the external terminal plate 213, and various signals are output to the management control device on the game hall side through these output terminals. Further, the base portion 211 is provided with a pair of upper and lower hooking pins at the right end when viewed from the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and the hooking pins are inserted into a bearing metal fitting 132 (specifically, a bearing portion) provided on the inner frame 13. By allowing the back pack unit 15, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 13. Further, the rotating tip portion of the base portion 211 is provided with a fastener for fastening to the hole to be fastened provided in the inner frame 13, and by fitting the fastener into the hole to be fastened. The back pack unit 15 is fixed to the inner frame 13.

The payout mechanism portion 202 is arranged on the base portion 211 so as to bypass the protective cover portion 212. The payout mechanism unit 202 is provided with a tank 221 arranged at the uppermost part of the back pack 201 and opened upward, and game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 221. To. A tank rail that gently inclines toward the downstream side is connected below the tank 221 and a case rail that extends in the vertical direction is connected to the downstream side of the tank rail. A payout device 222 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail. The game balls paid out from the payout device 222 are supplied to the game ball distribution section provided in the base portion 211 of the back pack 201 through the payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 222.

The game ball distribution unit has a function of distributing the game balls paid out from the payout device 222 to any of the upper plate 33, the lower plate 34, or the discharge passage described later, and the inner opening is on the main body side described above. It is formed so as to lead to the upper plate 33 via the upper plate passage and the upper plate passage on the front door side, and the outer opening leads to the lower plate 34 via the lower plate passage on the main body side and the lower plate passage on the front door side. ..

As shown in FIG. 3, a discharge passage board and a control device collective unit 204 are attached to the lower end portion of the base portion 211 so as to sandwich the lower end portion back and forth. The discharge passage board 203 is formed with a discharge passage that is open to the rear on a surface facing the control device assembly unit 204, and the open portion of the discharge passage is closed by the control device assembly unit 204. The discharge passage is formed so as to discharge the game ball to the island equipment of the game hall, etc., and the game ball led out from the above-mentioned collection passage or the like to the discharge passage passes through the discharge passage to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. It is discharged.

The control device collective unit 204 has a horizontally long mounting base, and the payout control device 181 and the power supply / firing control device 191 are mounted on the mounting base. The payout control device 181 and the power supply / launch control device 191 are arranged so as to be stacked in the front-rear direction so that the payout control device 181 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

In the payout control device 181, a payout control board for controlling the payout device 222 is housed in the board box, and a state return switch provided on the payout control board projects out of the board box. For example, when the state return switch is pressed when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout device 222, the ball jam can be cleared.

In the power supply / launch control device 191, a power supply / launch control board is housed in a board box, and a predetermined power source required by various control devices and the like is generated and output by the board, and a game ball is launched by a player. The launch of the game ball is controlled according to the operation of the handle 41. Further, the power supply / emission control device 191 is provided with a RAM erasing switch. This pachinko machine 10 has a storage and retention function for various data, so that even if a power failure should occur, the state at the time of the power failure can be maintained, and when recovering from the power failure, the state at the time of the power failure can be restored. It has become. Therefore, if the power is shut off in the normal procedure, for example, when the game hall is closed, the state before the shutoff is stored in memory, but if the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch, the RAM data is initialized. It has become.

In the present embodiment, the configuration relating to the right-handed ball-entry portion 62R, the second actuated ball-entry portion 63, and the variable winning devices 64 and 65 arranged on the right route is characteristic. Hereinafter, the various entry portions will be supplementarily described with reference to the schematic views of FIGS. 5 to 8. 5 is a front view of the upper variable winning device 64, FIG. 6 is a front view of the ball entry unit, FIG. 7 (a) is a perspective view of the right-side actuating ball entry portion 62R as viewed from the front side, and FIG. 7 (b) is a right side view. FIG. 8 is a schematic view showing a passage structure in the actuated ball entry portion 62R, and FIG. 8 is a schematic view showing a relationship between the passage length and the required passage time.

(Upper variable winning device 64)
The upper variable winning device 64 includes a housing 310 in which a ball passage 312 through which a game ball passes is formed, and the housing 310 bulges from the front surface of the game board 60 to the front of the game machine. It is attached to the game board 60. The housing 310 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and a game ball or the like flowing down the ball passage 312 can be visually recognized through the outer shell portion of the housing 310.

In the portion of the housing 310 that bulges toward the front surface of the game board 60, the upper prize opening 311 that constitutes the entrance portion of the ball passage 312 is formed. The upper prize opening 311 faces the middle stream part (the part extending up and down) on the right route from the side (right side) of the gaming machine, and the upper prize opening 311 is the game ball on the right route. The shutter 315 is arranged so as to cover from the flow-down region side (right side).

The shutter 315 is pivotally supported so as to be rotatable parallel to the front surface of the game board 60, and is closed to prevent the inflow of the game ball into the upper prize winning opening 311 by rotating around the shaft support portion. It is configured to be displaced to a position and an open position that allows the inflow of game balls into the upper prize opening 311.

The drive unit (specifically, the solenoid) for the shutter 315 is connected to the main control device 162, and operates based on the drive signal from the main control device 162. The shutter 315 is configured to stand by in a closed position when no drive signal is output from the main control device 162 (non-excited state).

In the state where the shutter 315 is arranged in the open position (open state), about half of the flow area (flow path) in the middle stream portion of the right route is cut off by the shutter 315, and most of the game balls flowing down the right route. It is configured to flow into the upper variable winning device 64 (ball passage 312) through the upper large winning opening 311.

The ball passage 312 branches into a first branch passage 313 and a second branch passage 314 at an intermediate position thereof. A flow path switching member 316 capable of switching the flow destination of the game ball to the first branch passage 313 and the second branch passage 314 is arranged in this branch portion. The drive unit (specifically, the solenoid) for the flow path switching member 316 is connected to the main control device 162, and operates based on the drive signal from the main control device 162. The flow path switching member 316 is configured to stand by at a protruding position protruding into the ball passage 312 in a state where a drive signal is not output from the main control device 162 (non-excited state).

In the state where the flow path switching member 316 is arranged at the protruding position, the entrance portion of the second branch passage 314 is blocked by the flow path switching member 316. In this state, the inflow of the game balls that have reached the branch portion into the second branch passage 314 is avoided, and the game balls flow into the first branch passage 313.

When the drive unit drive signal for the flow path switching member 316 is output from the main control device 162, the flow path switching member 316 moves to a retracted position where the protrusion to the ball passage 312 is avoided, and the second branch passage 314 The entrance is opened. As a result, the inflow destination of the game ball is changed. In this state, the inflow of the game balls that have reached the branch portion into the first branch passage 313 is avoided, and the game balls flow into the second branch passage 314.

Here, the movement of the flow path switching member 316 is predetermined according to the type of jackpot result. Specifically, when a normal jackpot result, which will be described later, is obtained, the flow path switching member 316 moves to the retracted position as the shutter 315 moves from the closed position to the open position, and the flow path switching member 316 moves. Immediately after that, it is specified to return to the protruding position. Specifically, the time required for the flow path switching member 316 to return to the protruding position is shorter than the time required for the game ball flowing into the upper prize winning opening 311 to reach the branch portion. Therefore, in the case of a normal jackpot result, the inflow to the second branch passage 314 is substantially avoided.

On the other hand, when the probability variation jackpot result described later is obtained, the flow path switching member 316 moves to the retracted position as the shutter 315 moves from the closed position to the open position, but the shutter 315 is closed thereafter. It is specified to wait in the protruding position until it returns to the position. Therefore, in the case of a probability variation jackpot result, most of the game balls that have flowed into the upper prize winning opening 311 will flow into the second branch passage 314.

An upstream side detection sensor 317 is arranged in a portion of the ball passage 312 that is upstream of the branch portion, and a portion that is downstream of the branch portion, specifically, the first branch passage 313 and the second. Downstream detection sensors 318 and 319 are arranged in the branch passage 314. The upstream side detection sensor 317 and the downstream side detection sensors 318 and 319 are connected to the main control device 162, and the main control device 162 uses the upper variable winning device 64 based on the detection information (detection signal) from the upstream side detection sensor 317. The presence or absence of a prize is specified, and if a prize is generated, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Further, the remaining state of the game ball is monitored based on the detection information (detection signal) from the upstream side detection sensor 317 and the downstream side detection sensors 318 and 319.

In the main control device 162 shown in the present embodiment, the ball enters the second branch passage 314 during the open / close execution mode based on the detection information (detection signal) from the downstream detection sensor 318 attached to the first branch passage 313. When it is specified that the occurrence has occurred, the lottery mode is switched from the low probability mode to the high probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. The details will be described later, but in the high-probability mode, the probability of a jackpot result is higher than in the low-probability mode, and the player can advance the game advantageously. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the second branch passage 314 will be referred to as an "advantageous entry portion 314".

Of the game balls launched to the right route, most of the game balls that have passed through the upper variable winning device 64 head toward the ball entry unit 70 arranged on the downstream side of the upper variable winning device 64 on the right route. Become. The ball entry unit 70 includes a right-side actuating ball entry section 62R, a second actuating ball entry section 63, and a lower variable winning device 65 that constitute the first actuating ball entry section 62 described above. Hereinafter, the ball entry unit 70 will be described with reference to FIG.

(Entering ball unit 70)
The ball entry unit 70 has a housing 320 in which a ball passage 321 forming a part of the right route (specifically, a downstream area) is formed, and the housing 320 bulges forward from the front surface of the game board 60. It is fixed to the game board 60 in the state. The ball passage 321 extends from the outside (right side) of the game area PE to the center side (left side). The entrance portion 321a of the ball entry unit 70 (ball passage 321) is formed in the upper right portion of the bulging portion of the housing 320 so as to face upward, and the exit portion of the ball entry unit 70 (ball passage 321) is formed in the lower left portion. 321b is formed so as to face left.

The outlet portion 321b is located directly below the lower actuating entry portion 62L constituting the first actuating entry portion 62, and the game ball flowing out from the outlet portion 321b is guided below the lower actuating entry portion 62L. To. As a result, entry of the game ball that has passed through the ball passage 321 into the lower actuating entry portion 62L is avoided.

The housing 320 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and is configured so that the inside of the housing 320 (for example, a gaming ball flowing down the ball passage 321) can be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine. Incidentally, in order to emphasize the sense of unity of the right-side actuating ball entry portion 62R, the second actuating ball entry section 63, and the lower variable winning device 65, the housing 320 is made opaque so that the internal structure is difficult or impossible to see. You may.

The right route branches into the following two flow paths above the ball entry unit 70. That is, it is branched into an inner route through which the game ball flows down toward the entrance portion 321a of the ball passage 321 and an outer route through which the game ball flows down along the upper surface of the ball entry unit 70 (housing 320).

A second actuating ball entry portion 63 is arranged on the upper portion of the housing 320 so that the second actuating port 63a faces the center side (left side) of the game area PE. Although the details will be described later, a part of the game ball flowing down the outer route flows into the second operating port 63a. It should be noted that the game ball that has passed through this outer route is also guided to the downstream side (lower side) of the lower actuating entry portion 62L constituting the first actuating entry portion 62, and is under the game ball that has passed through the outer route. The entry into the side-actuated entry section 62L is avoided.

The ball passage 321 described above has a passage width, a passage height, and the like defined so that a plurality of game balls cannot pass through the same place at the same time, and is formed in a crank shape so that a step is generated in the middle position in the passage direction. There is. Specifically, the ball passage 321 is composed of a horizontally long upstream passage portion 322 that constitutes an upstream portion of the ball passage 321 and is inclined downward toward the center side of the gaming machine, and a downstream portion of the ball passage 321. The horizontally long downstream passage portion 324, which is inclined downward to the center side, is provided so as to have a height difference so that the former is on the upper side and the latter is on the lower side. The 322 and the downstream passage portion 324 are connected by an intermediate passage portion 323 (corresponding to a "communication passage portion") extending in the vertical direction.

The right-side actuating ball entry portion 62R is attached to the upstream side passage portion 322. Specifically, the right operating port 62aR of the right operating ball entry portion 62R is opened upward, and the upstream side passage portion 322 is formed so as to cross above the right operating port 62aR. Regarding the electric accessory 71 attached to the right-side actuating ball entry portion 62R, a shutter 331 that can slide back and forth (in the thickness direction of the game board 60) and an electric accessory drive unit 332 (solenoid) for the shutter 331 Must have. The electric accessory drive unit 332 is connected to the main control device 162 and operates based on the drive signal from the main control device 162. In the non-driving state (non-excited state) in which the drive signal is not output from the main control device 162, the shutter 331 is arranged at a closed position covering the right operating port 62aR from above, and the drive signal is output to drive the electric accessory. When the unit 332 is in the driving state (excited state), it moves (retracts) to an open position that does not cover the right operating port 62aR.

Here, in the state where the shutter 331 is arranged in the closed position, the shutter 331 forms the bottom portion of the upstream passage portion 322, that is, the rolling surface of the game ball. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 7A, the housing 320 has an upstream side bottom portion 322a forming a bottom portion on the upstream side of the right operating port 62aR in the passage direction of the upstream side passage portion 322, and a right operating port 62aR. A downstream bottom portion 322b that forms a bottom portion on the downstream side is provided, and a rolling surface of the game ball is formed by the upstream side bottom portion 322a, the downstream side bottom portion 322b, and the shutter 331. In the following description, the region where the flow path is formed (complemented) by the shutter 331 in the upstream passage portion 322, that is, the region where the shutter 331 is sandwiched between the upstream passage portion 322 and confronts the right operating port 62aR is defined as "the first". 1 Specific region SE1 ”(see FIG. 6).

The game ball that has reached the first specific region SE1 under the condition that the shutter 331 is arranged in the open position and the upstream passage portion 322 (specifically, the rolling surface) is cut off is in the passage direction of the upstream passage portion 322. It becomes difficult to move to the right operating port 62aR, and the air flows into the right operating port 62aR.

In the present embodiment, the first specific region SE1 is devised to decelerate the game ball passing through the first specific region SE1 to increase the chance of winning a prize in the right operating port 62aR. Hereinafter, the device will be described with reference to FIG. 7 (b). In addition, in FIG. 7B, the path (flow path) through which the game ball passes is illustrated by using the alternate long and short dash line.

The front wall portion 335 and the rear wall portion 336 that partition the passage of the upstream side passage portion 322 in the housing 320 are provided with ridge portions 335a and 336a that project toward the first specific region SE1 side. .. The ridges 335a and 336a extend vertically so as to be orthogonal to the passage direction of the upstream passage portion 322. In the following description, the ridge portion 335a arranged on the front wall portion 335 is referred to as "front ridge portion 335a", and the ridge portion 336a arranged on the rear wall portion 336 is referred to as "rear ridge portion 336a". ".

The gap dimension D1 between the rear wall portion 336 and the front ridge portion 335a is set to be larger than the diameter dimension D of the game ball, and the gap dimension D2 between the front wall portion 335 and the rear ridge portion 336a is also set. It is set to be larger than the diameter dimension D of the game ball. A plurality (two in the present embodiment) of the front ridge portion 335a are arranged in the passage direction (guidance direction) of the upstream side passage portion 322 with a gap larger than the diameter dimension D of the game ball. A plurality of side ridges 336a (two in the present embodiment) are arranged with a gap larger than the diameter dimension D of the game ball in the passage direction (guidance direction) of the upstream passage portion 322. By alternately arranging the front ridges 335a and the rear ridges 336a, the flow path of the game ball is devised so as to meander back and forth with respect to the passage direction of the upstream passage 322.

Here, when the amount of protrusion of the front ridge portion 335a, the amount of protrusion of the rear side ridge portion 336a, and the diameter dimension D of the game ball are added, the width of the passage is larger than the width of the upstream passage portion 322. It is configured (D3 <D). As a result, the game ball is prevented from running through the first specific region SE1 so as to avoid a collision with the protrusions 335a and 336a.

The game ball passing through the upstream passage portion 322 collides with the ridge portions 335a and 336a. Due to such a collision, the moving speed of the game ball in the first specific region SE1 decreases (decelerates). That is, the first specific region SE1 of the upstream passage portion 322 functions as a deceleration section for forcibly decelerating the game ball. By decelerating the game ball passing through the upstream passage portion 322 in this way, the game ball passes through the first specific region SE1 as compared with the case where the ridge portions 335a and 336a are not provided. The time required for this is extended.

The ridges 335a and 336a are arranged so as to be biased toward the intermediate passage portion 323 in the first specific region SE1. As a result, the game ball is decelerated at a position directly upstream of the intermediate passage portion 323.

The game balls that have not flowed into the right operating port 62aR continue to move along the ball passage 321 as they are, and most of them reach the downstream passage portion 324. Here, with reference to FIG. 6 again, the downstream side passage portion 324 and the lower variable winning device 65 associated therewith will be described.

The lower grand prize opening 341 of the lower variable winning device 65 is open upward, and the downstream passage portion 324 is formed so as to cross above the lower grand winning opening 341. The lower variable winning device 65 includes a shutter 345 that can slide back and forth (in the thickness direction of the game board 60) and a drive unit (solenoid) for the shutter 345. The drive unit for the shutter 345 is connected to the main control device 162 and operates based on the drive signal from the main control device 162. In the non-driving state (non-excited state) in which the drive signal is not output from the main control device 162, the shutter 345 is arranged in a closed position covering the lower prize opening 341 from above, and the drive signal is output to the drive unit. Is in the driving state (excited state) and moves (backward) to an open position that does not cover the lower prize winning opening 341.

Here, in the state where the shutter 345 is arranged in the closed position, the shutter 345 forms the bottom portion of the downstream passage portion 324, that is, the rolling surface of the game ball. Specifically, the housing 320 is provided with a downstream bottom portion forming a bottom portion on the downstream side of the lower prize opening 341 in the passage direction of the downstream side passage portion 324, and the game ball is provided by these downstream side bottom portions and the shutter 345. The rolling surface of is formed. In the following description, the region where the flow path is formed (complemented) by the shutter 345 in the downstream passage portion 324, that is, the region where the shutter 345 is sandwiched by the downstream passage portion 324 and confronts the lower prize opening 341 is referred to as ". It is called "second specific region SE2".

The game ball that has reached the second specific region SE2 under the condition that the shutter 345 is arranged in the open position and the downstream passage portion 324 (specifically, the rolling surface) is cut off is in the passage direction of the downstream passage portion 324. It will be difficult to move to, and it will flow into the lower prize opening 341.

The second specific area SE2 is also provided with a deceleration section consisting of ridges 375a and 376a (see FIG. 8), but the specific configuration related to the deceleration section is the same as that of the first specific area SE1. Therefore, the explanation is used.

The above-mentioned intermediate passage portion 323 extends upward from the upstream end portion of the shutter 345. The left passage wall surface forming the intermediate passage portion 323 is located on the extension of the upstream passage portion 322, and the game ball passing through the upstream passage portion 322 is oriented by colliding with the left passage wall surface. Is changed, and the intermediate passage portion 323 is dropped toward the shutter 345.

An opening through which a game ball can pass is formed in the right passage wall surface forming the intermediate passage portion 323, and a part of the game ball passing through the intermediate passage portion 323 flows into the opening. A discharge passage is formed between the right-side actuating ball entry unit 62R and the lower variable winning device 65 to discharge the game ball flowing into the opening from the ball entry unit 70. A part of the game ball flowing down the ball passage 321 is discharged from the ball entry unit 70 through the opening → discharge passage before reaching the lower variable winning device 65 (shutter 345). Since the game ball passing through the discharge passage is guided to the back side of the game board 60 as it is, the movement to the out port 68 is avoided.

Next, with reference to FIG. 8, the relationship between the passage length of each part of the ball passage 321 and the passage time required for the game ball will be supplementarily described. FIG. 8 is a schematic view of the internal structure of the ball entry unit 70 as viewed from the front. In the following description, the time required to pass through the first specific area SE1 is referred to as "required time T1", and the time required to pass through the second specific area SE2 is referred to as "required time T2".

The degree of deceleration in the first specific region SE1 is defined as follows. That is, the time required for the game ball to pass through the first specific region SE1 T1 is defined to be longer than the firing cycle (0.6 sec) of the game ball. Although the details will be described later, about 1/2 of the game balls launched to the right route under the condition that the upper variable winning device 64 is maintained in the closed state are distributed to the inner route, and they are distributed. Almost all of the game balls reach the first specific area SE1. In consideration of such circumstances, the time required for the game ball to pass through the first specific region SE1 T1 is slightly longer than twice the firing cycle (1.2 sec) (more specifically, 1.3 sec). It is stipulated to be. This is a device for generating about one ball when the right-side actuating ball entry unit 62R is opened during the high-frequency support mode.

The degree of deceleration in the second specific region SE2 is defined as follows. That is, the time required for the game ball to pass through the second specific region SE2 T2 is defined to be longer than the firing cycle (0.6 sec) of the game ball. As described above, about 1/2 of the game balls launched to the right route under the condition that both the upper variable winning device 64 and the right-side actuating entry unit 62R are maintained in the closed state are the inner route. It is distributed, and almost all of the distributed game balls reach the second specific area SE2. In consideration of such circumstances, the time required for the game ball to pass through the second specific region SE2 is slightly longer than twice the firing cycle (1.2 sec) (1.3 sec in detail). It is stipulated to be. This is a device for generating about one ball when the lower variable winning device 65 is opened during the low frequency support mode.

(Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10)
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

The MPU 602 is mounted on the main control board 601 provided in the main control device 162. The MPU 602 is a ROM 603 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 602, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 603 is executed. It is an element in which a certain RAM 604, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are built-in. It should be noted that a configuration may be configured in which a part of the functions of the MPU 602, for example, the function of the ROM 603 and the function of the RAM 604, are provided as another element.

The MPU 602 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A power failure monitoring board 605, a payout control device 181 and various detection sensors provided in the main control device 162 are connected to the input side of the MPU 602. A power supply / emission control device 191 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 605, and power is supplied to the MPU 602 via the power failure monitoring board 605. Further, as a part of various detection sensors, a detection sensor 391a for the general winning opening 61, a detection sensor 391b for the first actuating ball entry portion 62, a detection sensor 391c for the second actuating ball entry section 63, and an upper variable winning device. Detection sensors 317 to 318 for 64, detection sensors 391d for the lower variable winning device 65, and detection sensors 391e for the through gate 66 are connected, and detection information from these various detection sensors 317 to 318, 391a to 391e. Based on the (detection signal), the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 executes a winning determination (ball entry determination) or the like for each ball entry unit. Further, in the MPU 602, a lottery for generating a big hit is executed based on the winning of the first actuating ball entry portion 62 (first actuating port 62a) and the second actuating ball entry portion 63 (second actuating port 63a).

A power failure monitoring board 605, a payout control device 181 and a notification / effect control device 143 (specifically, a notification / effect control board 651) are connected to the output side of the MPU 602. A prize ball command is output to the payout control device 181 based on, for example, a prize-winning determination result for the prize-winning ball-winning unit. In this case, the command information storage area 625 of the ROM 603 is referred to when the prize ball command is output. Then, when the winning of the general winning opening 61 is specified, the prize ball command corresponding to the payout of the three game balls is output, and when the winning of the upper prize opening 311 is specified, 104 games are played. A prize ball command corresponding to the payout of balls is output, and when a prize is specified for the lower prize winning opening 341, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of five game balls is output to the first operating port 62a. When the prize is specified, the prize ball command corresponding to the payout of two game balls is output, and when the prize is specified to the second operating port 63a, the prize corresponding to the payout of one game ball is output. The ball command is output.

Various commands such as a fluctuation start command, a type command, a fluctuation end command, an opening command, and an ending command are output to the notification / effect control device 143. In this case, the command information storage area 625 of the ROM 603 is referred to when outputting these various commands. Details of these various commands will be described later. Each of the above commands is configured as information on a predetermined number of bytes, and includes various information as information on the predetermined number of bytes.

Further, on the output side of the MPU 602, an electric accessory drive unit 332 that drives the electric accessory 71 attached to the right-side actuating ball entry unit 62R, a variable winning drive unit 451 that drives the shutter 315 of the upper variable winning device 64, and an upper side. A flow path switching drive unit 452 that drives the flow path switching member 316 of the variable winning device 64, a variable winning drive unit 461 that drives the shutter 345 of the lower variable winning device 65, a main display unit 81, and the like are connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 601. Through the driver circuits, the MPU 602 executes drive control of various drive units and the like.

That is, in the MPU 602, the variable winning drive unit 451 of the upper variable winning device 64 and the variable winning drive unit of the lower variable winning device 65 are opened and closed so that the upper prize opening 311 and the lower prize opening 341 are opened and closed in the open / close execution mode. The drive control of 461 is executed. Further, for example, at each game round, the display control of the first operating port display unit D1 and the second operating port display unit D2 in the main display unit D of the main display unit 81 is executed in the MPU 602.

Further, an external terminal plate 213 is connected to the output side of the MPU 602. The external terminal plate 213 is provided with a jackpot signal output terminal or the like as an output terminal for outputting a signal at the time of state transition. For example, when the game result is a big hit result, the MPU 602 can output a big hit signal to the management control device on the game hall side through the big hit signal output terminal. Specifically, in the normal state, the LOW level signal is output from the jackpot signal output terminal, and when the jackpot result is obtained, the HI level signal is output. The output mode of this signal may be reversed.

The power failure monitoring board 605 relays between the main control board 601 and the power supply / emission control device 191 and monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply / emission control device 191. The payout control device 181 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 222 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 162.

The power supply / launch control device 191 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a playground or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, the operating power required for each of the main control board 601 and the payout control device 181 is generated, and the generated operating power is supplied through a predetermined power path. To do.

Further, the power supply / launch control device 191 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 110, and the game ball launch mechanism 110 (specifically, the solenoid 111) is driven when a predetermined launch condition is satisfied. More specifically, the power supply / launch control device 191 is connected to an operation level detection sensor and a touch sensor provided on the game ball launch handle 41. The operation level detection sensor is a sensor that detects the operation amount (rotation amount) of the game ball launch handle 41, and the launch intensity (rate of fire) of the game ball by the game ball launch mechanism 110 based on the information from the operation level detection sensor. ) Will be decided. The touch sensor is configured to output information when the player touches the game ball launch handle 41, and the power supply / launch control device 191 allows the player to touch the game ball launch handle 41 based on this information. It is configured so that it can be grasped whether or not it is. When it is determined that the player is touching the game ball launch handle 41 based on the information from the touch sensor, and the operation level detection sensor determines that the game ball launch handle 41 is being operated, the game ball is launched. Will be allowed.

The information from the touch sensor is transmitted to the main control device 162, the notification / effect control device 143, and the display control device 710 via the power supply / emission control device 191.

The notification / effect control device 143 includes a notification / effect control board 651 on which the MPU 652 is mounted, and the MPU 652 includes a ROM 653 that stores various control programs and fixed value data, and a control program that is stored in the ROM 653. RAM 654, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like, is built in.

The notification / effect control device 143 drives and controls the lamp units 26 to 28 and the speaker unit 29 provided on the front door frame 14 based on various commands input from the main control device 162, and also controls the display control device 710. It is a thing. Specifically, in the notification / effect control device 143, the variation display mode of the symbol in the symbol display device 75 and the stop display mode of the symbol to be finally stopped are displayed based on various commands input from the main control device 162 (for example, of the symbol). The type of combination) is determined, the presence / absence of reach occurrence, the content of the reach effect, and the like are determined, and the determined content is added to the above command and transferred to the display control device 710.

The display control device 710 has a display control board on which the MPU is mounted, and the MPU has a ROM that stores various control programs and fixed value data, and various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM. A RAM that is a memory for temporarily storing the data, a video display processor (VDP), a character ROM that stores the image data, a video RAM that temporarily stores the image data read from the character ROM, and the like are built-in. There is. The MPU executes display control of the variable display unit 67 (specifically, the symbol display device 75) based on the command input from the notification / effect control device 143.

Here, the display contents of the symbol display device 75 will be described. Three symbol rows, left, middle, and right, are set in the central portion (variation display completion area) of the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75. On the display screen 75a, the symbols in each of these symbol rows are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction (for example, from top to bottom) with periodicity.

Further, on the display screen 75a, one symbol is stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and a total of three symbols are stopped and displayed. If the fluctuation display stops in the order of right symbol row → left symbol row → middle symbol row, and the fluctuation display of all symbol rows ends with a predetermined symbol combination formed on the effective line, the jackpot result or special hit result will be displayed. A video or the like showing the transition to the corresponding special gaming state is displayed.

In view of the fact that the variable display of each symbol row is stopped as described above, the left symbol row is the first symbol row (or the first symbol row), and the right symbol row is the second symbol row (or the second symbol row). The row) and the middle symbol row can be referred to as a third symbol row (or a third symbol row).

Incidentally, the mode of variable display of symbols in the symbol display device 75 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol rows, the number of symbols in each symbol row, and the like. Can be changed as appropriate. For example, a plurality of symbol rows may be set to be arranged vertically, and the direction of the variation display of the symbols in the symbol row may be set to the horizontal direction.

Regarding the change / stop display of the symbol in the central portion of the display screen 75a, it corresponds to the mode corresponding to the game times related to the first operating port 62a and the game times related to the second operating port 63a according to the type of the normal gaming state. It is configured to switch depending on the mode. Specifically, in the first normal game state, the third normal game state, and the fourth normal game state, which will be described later, the change / stop display of the symbol in the central portion of the display screen 75a is the game time related to the first operation port 62a. In the second normal game state, the change / stop display of the symbol in the central portion of the display screen is associated with the game times related to the second operating port 63a.

A hold display area is set at the bottom of the display screen 75a. The hold display area is a hold for the first operation port in which the same number of unit hold display areas as the maximum number of holds when the game ball wins the first operation port 62a are arranged in the left-right direction. The number display area and the number of units held for the second operating port, which is the same number as the maximum number of holdings when the game ball wins in the second operating port 63a, are arranged in the left-right direction. It is composed of a display area.

Specifically, when the game ball wins the first operating port 62a, the maximum number of holdings is four, and in correspondence with this, the holding number display area for the first operating opening displays the first unit holding. An area, a second unit hold display area, a third unit hold display area, and a fourth unit hold display area are set. Further, when the game ball wins the second operating port 63a, the maximum number of holdings is 4, and in correspondence with this, the holding number display area for the second operating port includes the first unit holding display area and the first. A 2-unit hold display area, a 3rd unit hold display area, and a 4th unit hold display area are set.

For example, when the number of hold balls is one when the game ball wins the first operating port 62a, a predetermined hold image (hold icon) is displayed only in the first unit hold display area, and the game ball is displayed. When the number of holdings is 4 when the first operating port 62a is won, a predetermined holding image (holding icon) is displayed in all of the 1st unit holding display area to the 4th unit holding display area. It has become. It should be noted that the display / non-display of these reserved images is switched depending on the type of game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state described later). Specifically, in each normal game state, the game times mainly executed by providing a large difference in the variable display time are the game times related to the winning of the first operating port 62a and the winning of the second operating port 63a. The configuration is such that the image for holding is switched according to the game times, and the image for holding is switched so that the one corresponding to the main operating port in the progress of the game is "displayed" and the other image is "hidden". Incidentally, this does not apply to the hold number display units S1 and S2 in the main display unit D, and the display of the hold number is not omitted in any of the normal game states.

(About various counters)
Next, with reference to the schematic view of FIG. 10, the configuration related to the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

The MPU 602 uses various counter information during the game to perform a lottery to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode), set the display of the main display unit 81 (main display unit D), set the symbol display of the symbol display device 75, and the like. Specifically, the hit random number counter C1 used for the lottery for the occurrence of big hits and special hits, the hit type counter C2 used for determining the type when a big hit result is obtained, and the symbol display. Generation of reach display when the device 75 disengages and fluctuates The reach random number counter C3 used for lottery, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, and the operation port D1 of the main display unit 81. The variation type counter CS that determines the variation display time of the symbol in D2 and the variation display time of the symbol in the symbol display device 75 is used. Further, an open random number counter C4 used for a lottery as to whether or not to open the electric accessory 71 attached to the right-side actuating ball entry unit 62R is used.

Each of the counters C1 to C4, CINI, and CS is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and the counter returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 631 set in a predetermined area of the RAM 604.

The RAM 604 includes a holding area Ra for the first operating port, a holding area Rb for the second operating port, a first execution area AE1 for the holding area Ra for the first operating port, and a holding area Rb for the second operating port. A second execution area AE2 and a hold ball storage area 632 including a total hold number storage area are provided. Then, in the reserved ball storage area 632, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are set according to the winning history of the game ball to the first operating port 62a or the second operating port 63a. It is stored in chronological order.

More specifically, the hit random number counter C1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, "0" to "99", reach the maximum value (that is, 99), and then return to 0. In particular, when the hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the hit random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the hit random number counter C1 (value = "0" to "99"). The winning random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 62a or the second operating port 63a. More specifically, it is stored in the holding area Ra for the first operating port of the RAM 604 when the game ball wins in the first operating port 62a, and the second operating port of the RAM 604 when the game ball wins in the second operating port 63a. It is stored in the reserved area Rb.

The value of the random number that wins the big hit and the value of the random number that wins the special win are stored as a win / loss table (win / fail information group) in the win / fail table storage area 621 as the win / loss information group storage means in the ROM 603. Here, the contents of the pass / fail table will be described with reference to the schematic views of FIGS. 11 and 12. As the hit / fail table, a hit / fail table group for the first operating port 62a (see FIG. 11) and a hit / miss table for the second operating port 63a (see FIG. 12) are provided, and the ball enters the first operating port 62a. In the lottery based on the above, the winning / failing table for the first operating port 62a is referred to, and in the lottery based on entering the ball into the second operating port 63a, the winning / failing table for the second operating port 63a is referred to.

(Win / fail table for the first operating port)
First, a case where the lottery mode is the low probability mode will be described with reference to FIG. 11A. When the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to in the above lottery, the number of random number values (that is, winning information) that wins the jackpot is two, and the value of the random number that wins the special winning (that is, that is). The number of winning information) is 0, and other than the values of those random numbers, it corresponds to the outlier result. As a result, the jackpot probability is 2/100 and the special hit probability is 0/100.

Next, a case where the lottery mode is the high probability mode will be described with reference to FIG. 11B. When the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to in the above lottery, the number of random number values (that is, winning information) that wins the jackpot is 10, and the value of the random number that wins the special winning (that is, that is). The number of winning information) is 0, and other than the values of those random numbers, it corresponds to the outlier result. As a result, the jackpot probability is 10/100 and the special hit probability is 0/100.

(Win / fail table for the second operating port)
First, a case where the lottery mode is the low probability mode will be described with reference to FIG. 12A. When the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to in the above lottery, the number of random number values (that is, winning information) that wins the jackpot is two, and the value of the random number that wins the special winning (that is, that is). The number of winning information) is 50, and all the values other than those random numbers correspond to the outlier results. As a result, the jackpot probability is 2/100, the special hit probability is 50/100, and the miss probability is 98/100.

Next, a case where the lottery mode is the high probability mode will be described with reference to FIG. 12B. When the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to in the above lottery, the number of random number values (that is, winning information) that wins the jackpot is 10, and the value of the random number that wins the special winning (that is, that is). The number of winning information) is 50, and all the values other than those random numbers correspond to the outlier results. As a result, the jackpot probability is 10/100, the special hit probability is 50/100, and the miss probability is 40/100.

Returning to the description of FIG. 10, the hit type counter C2 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of "0" to "99", reaches the maximum value (that is, "99"), and then returns to 0. There is. The hit type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 62a or the second operating port 63a. More specifically, it is stored in the holding area Ra for the first operating port of the RAM 604 when the game ball wins in the first operating port 62a, and the second operating port of the RAM 604 when the game ball wins in the second operating port 63a. It is stored in the reserved area Rb.

The distribution destination of the game result with respect to the hit type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in the distribution table storage area 622 as the distribution information group storage means in the ROM 603. In the present embodiment, the type of the jackpot result is determined with reference to the hit type counter C2 and the distribution table. As the jackpot result, 3R probability variation jackpot result A, 3R probability variation jackpot result B, 2R probability variation jackpot result A, 2R probability variation jackpot result B, 2R normal jackpot result A, 2R normal jackpot result B are provided.

The distribution table for each operating port is stored for each type of normal gaming state. Here, the types of normal gaming states will be described. Regarding the normal game state, the first normal game state in which the lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode by the electric accessory 71 is a low frequency support mode, the lottery mode is a high probability mode, and the support mode by the electric accessory 71 is low. The second normal game state in which the frequency support mode is set, the lottery mode is in the low probability mode and the support mode by the electric accessory 71 is in the high frequency support mode, and the lottery mode is in the high probability mode and the electric accessory 71. The support mode is composed of a fourth normal game state in which the high-frequency support mode is set, and the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state are switched via a special game state corresponding to a jackpot result. ..

(Distribution table for the first operating port)
As shown in FIG. 13A, the distribution table for the first operating port includes a distribution table for the first normal game state, a distribution table for the second normal game state, and a distribution table for the third normal game state. It is roughly divided into a distribution table for the fourth normal game state and a distribution table for the fourth normal gaming state. Regarding the distribution table for the first normal game state, a total of 98 values of "0" to "97" among the values of the hit type counters C2 of "0" to "99" correspond to the 3R probability variation jackpot result A. A total of two "98" to "99" correspond to the 3R probability variation jackpot result B. Regarding the distribution table for the second normal game state, a total of 100 of the values of the hit type counter C2 of "0" to "99", that is, "0" to "99", that is, all of them are in the 3R probability variation jackpot result A. It corresponds. Regarding the distribution table for the third normal game state, a total of 100 of the values of the hit type counter C2 of "0" to "99", that is, "0" to "99", that is, all of them are in the 3R probability variation jackpot result B. It corresponds. Regarding the distribution table for the 4th normal game state, a total of 100 of the values of the hit type counters C2 of "0" to "99", that is, "0" to "99", that is, all of them are in the 3R probability variation jackpot result B. It corresponds. As described above, in the present embodiment, the probability of change is 100% when a big hit result is obtained by a winning / failing lottery based on the entry of the ball into the first operating port 62a.

As shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 14, the 3R probability variation jackpot result A is a jackpot result of shifting to the second normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode after the end of the special gaming state (open / close execution mode). On the other hand, the 3R probability variation jackpot result B is a jackpot result that shifts to the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode after the end of the special gaming state (open / close execution mode). As for the 3R probability variation jackpot result A and the 3R probability variation jackpot result B, the winning mode, which is the control mode in the special gaming state, corresponds to the high frequency winning mode. The high-frequency winning mode is a winning mode in which the opening target is the upper variable winning device 64 and the opening time is 30 sec (see FIG. 15), and the round game is repeated three times. In the special game state corresponding to these high-frequency winning modes, approximately 420 prize balls are given to the player by continuing to shoot the game balls toward the right route.

(Distribution table for the second operating port)
As shown in FIG. 13B, the distribution table for the second operating port includes a distribution table for the first normal game state, a distribution table for the second normal game state, and a distribution table for the third normal game state. It is roughly divided into a distribution table for the fourth normal game state and a distribution table for the fourth normal gaming state. Regarding the distribution table for the first normal game state, a total of 98 values of "0" to "97" among the values of the hit type counters C2 of "0" to "99" correspond to the 2R probability variation jackpot result A. A total of two "98" to "99" correspond to the 2R normal jackpot result A. Regarding the distribution table for the second normal game state, a total of 98 values of "0" to "97" among the values of the hit type counters C2 of "0" to "99" correspond to the 2R probability variation jackpot result A. A total of two "98" to "99" correspond to the 2R normal jackpot result B. Regarding the distribution table for the third normal game state, a total of 98 values of "0" to "97" among the values of the hit type counters C2 of "0" to "99" correspond to the 2R probability variation jackpot result A. A total of two "98" to "99" correspond to the 2R normal jackpot result A. Regarding the distribution table for the 4th normal game state, a total of 98 values of "0" to "97" among the values of the hit type counters C2 of "0" to "99" correspond to the 2R probability variation jackpot result B. A total of two "98" to "99" correspond to the 2R normal jackpot result B.

As shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 14, the 2R probability variation jackpot result A is a jackpot result of shifting to the second normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode after the end of the special gaming state (open / close execution mode). On the other hand, the 2R probability variation jackpot result B is a jackpot result that shifts to the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode after the end of the special gaming state (open / close execution mode). The 2R normal jackpot result A is a jackpot result of shifting to the first normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode after the end of the special game state (open / close execution mode). On the other hand, the 2R normal jackpot result B is a jackpot result that shifts to the third normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode after the end of the special game state (open / close execution mode). With respect to the third normal game state shifted in this way, the number of game times executed in the third normal game state is continued until the specified number (100 times in the present embodiment) is reached, and the specified number is reached. As an opportunity, it is configured to shift to the first normal gaming state described above.

For these 2R probability variation jackpot results A, 2R probability variation jackpot results B, 2R normal jackpot results A, and 2R normal jackpot results B, the winning mode, which is the control mode in the special gaming state, corresponds to the high frequency winning mode. The high-frequency winning mode is a winning mode in which the opening target is the upper variable winning device 64 and the opening time is 30 sec (see FIG. 15), and the round game is repeated twice. In the special game state corresponding to these high-frequency winning modes, approximately 280 prize balls are given to the player by continuing to shoot the game balls toward the right route.

Here, when a prize is generated in the second operating port 63a, a special hit result is obtained in about half of the game times. When a special hit result is obtained, the winning mode shifts to a special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) corresponding to the low frequency winning mode. The low-frequency winning mode is a winning mode in which the opening target is the lower variable winning device 65 and the opening time is 0.8 sec (see FIG. 15), and about one game is played by executing one round game. The ball wins the lower prize opening 341. In the special game state corresponding to the low frequency winning mode, about 5 prize balls are given to the player by continuing to shoot the game balls toward the right route. As for the special hit result, the function of changing the type of the normal game state is not given. That is, basically, after the special gaming state corresponding to the special hit result is completed, it returns to the normal gaming state before shifting to the special gaming state, and does not substantially affect the switching of the normal gaming state. It has become. In the following description, the special gaming state that shifts with the jackpot result as a trigger is referred to as the "first special gaming state", and the special gaming state that shifts with the special hit result as the trigger is appropriately distinguished as the "second special gaming state".

Returning to the description of FIG. 10, the reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 238, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 238). The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 62a or the second operating port 63a. More specifically, it is stored in the holding area Ra for the first operating port of the RAM 604 when the game ball wins in the first operating port 62a, and the second operating port of the RAM 604 when the game ball wins in the second operating port 63a. It is stored in the reserved area Rb. Then, it is decided whether or not to generate the reach display (reach state) based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 603.

Here, the reach display includes a symbol display device 75 capable of variable display (or variable display) of a symbol (picture), and the game result fluctuates in the game times when the game result corresponds to the open / close execution mode. In a gaming machine in which the stop display result after display can be a special display result, after the variable display (or variable display) of the symbol (picture) on the symbol display device 75 is started, before the stop display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a display state for making the player think that it is a variable display state in which the special display result is likely to occur.

In other words, by stopping and displaying some of the symbols among the plurality of symbol sequences displayed on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75, a combination of symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the open / close execution mode is established. It is a display state in which a combination of possible reach symbols is displayed, and in that state, the symbols are variablely displayed in the remaining symbol rows.

More specifically, as a pre-stage for ending the variable display of the symbol, a combination of symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the open / close execution mode is established on the preset effective line in the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying a combination of possible reach symbols, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, a variable display of symbols is performed by the final stop symbol sequence.

Explaining the display contents on the display screen 75a in more detail, in the state where the variation display of the symbol is first completed in the right symbol column and then the variation display of the symbol is completed in the left symbol column, one of the effective lines is hit and the symbol is displayed. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the main symbols with numbers that make up the combination, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, a variable display of the symbols is performed in the middle symbol row to reach. It becomes a display. Then, when a big hit occurs, the main symbols forming the reach line and the main symbols with the numbers constituting the combination of the hit symbols are stopped and displayed on the reach line, and the fluctuation display of the symbols in the middle symbol row is displayed. Is terminated.

Further, in the reach display, in the state where the combination of the reach symbols is displayed as described above, the remaining symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to reach the reach. Includes those that perform an effect, and those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen 75a after reducing or hiding the combination of reach symbols. In addition, when the reach display is performed or before the reach display, it is determined whether or not to perform the notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character by using the reach random number counter C3 or other counters. You may.

The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS is the variation display time of the symbol on the first operating port display unit D1 and the second operating port display unit D2 of the main display unit 81 (main display unit D), and the variation of the symbol on the symbol display device 75. It is used to determine the display time in the MPU 602. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time the normal processing described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal processing. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is set when the variation pattern is determined at the start of the variation display on the first operating port display unit D1 and the second operating port display unit D2 (at the start of the symbol variation by the symbol display device 75). To be acquired.

The open random number counter C4 for the electric accessory 71 is configured to, for example, add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 249, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0. The open random number counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric service storage area 633 of the RAM 604 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 66. Then, at a predetermined timing, the electric accessory 71 is referred to by the value of the stored open random number counter C4 and the support lottery table (win / fail information group) stored in the pass / fail table storage area 621 of the ROM 603. An open lottery (support lottery) is held to determine whether or not to control the open state. The probability of winning support in high-frequency support mode (detailed 249/250) is higher than the probability of winning support in low-frequency support mode (detailed 25/250), and high-frequency support Mode is given preferential treatment.

(About various processes executed by MPU 602 of the main controller 162)
Next, the timer interrupt processing and the normal processing executed in order to advance the game in each game time by the MPU 602 in the main control device 162 will be described. In the MPU 602, in addition to the timer interrupt processing and the normal processing, the main processing activated when the power is turned on and the NMI interrupt processing activated by inputting a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal) are executed. , The description of these processes will be omitted.

(Timer interrupt processing)
First, the timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is periodically started by the MPU 602 (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec).

In step S101, reading processing of various detection sensors (for example, the detection sensors 317 to 319, 391a to 391e) is executed. That is, the state of various detection sensors connected to the main control device 162 is read, the state of the detection sensor (detection information from the detection sensor) is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved. For example, when it is determined that a prize has been generated in the first operating port 62a, the winning detection flag for the first operating port is stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604, and a prize is generated in the second operating port 63a. If it is determined that the flag has been won, the winning detection flag for the second operating port is stored in the various flag storage areas 635, and if it is determined that the upper variable winning device 64 has been won, the various flag storage areas 635 are moved up. The winning detection flag for the large winning opening is stored, and when it is determined that a prize has occurred in the advantageous winning section 314, the winning detection flag for the advantageous winning section is stored in the various flag storage areas 635, and the lower side. When it is determined that a prize has been generated in the variable winning device 65, the winning detection flag for the lower prize opening is stored in the various flag storage areas 635.

After that, in step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 604.

In the following step S103, the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the open random number counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the open random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum value, they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 604.

After that, in step S104, the winning process for the through port accompanying the winning of the through gate 66 is executed, and in the following step S105, the winning process for the operating port accompanying the winning of the operating ports 62a and 63a is executed. Terminates timer interrupt processing.

(Prize processing for through)
In the winning process for through in step S104, first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the through gate 66. When the game ball wins the through gate 66 and the character holding memory number SN is less than the upper limit (specifically, 4), the character holding memory number SN is incremented by 1 and updated in step S103 above. The value of the open random number counter C4 is stored in the first free storage area of the electric service storage area 633 of the RAM 604. After that, the main winning process is completed.

If it is determined that the game ball has not won the through gate 66, or if it is determined that the game ball has won the through gate 66 but the character holding memory number SN has reached the upper limit, the value of the open random number counter C4 is set. The main winning process is completed without storing.

In the through winning process, the display control process of the through gate hold number display unit SS of the main display unit 81 is executed. Specifically, the light emission control process is executed for the hold number display unit SS for the through gate composed of four light emitters (LEDs) so that the same number of light emitters as the accessory hold storage number SN are lit.

(Prize processing for the operating port)
In the winning process for the operating port, first, whether or not the game ball has won the first operating ball entry portion 62 (first operating port 62a) (starting winning) is determined in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604 as the first operating port. Judgment is made based on whether or not the winning detection flag for is stored. When it is determined that the winning detection flag is stored, that is, when the game ball receives a detection signal indicating that a winning has occurred in the first operating ball entry unit 62 (first operating port 62a), the payout is made. A prize ball command for paying out two game balls is set in the control device 181. Then, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal indicating that the game ball has won a prize to the first operating ball entry unit 62 (first operating port 62a) to the hall computer HC on the game hall side. As a result, the hall computer HC grasps that a prize has been generated for the first actuating ball entry portion 62 (first actuating port 62a).

After that, the value (starting hold storage number) stored in the hold number storage area of the hold area Ra for the first operation port is updated (1 addition). Subsequently, information acquisition processing for storing each value of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is performed, and the main winning process is completed.

On the other hand, when the winning detection flag for the first operating port is not stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604 and the winning detection flag for the second operating port is stored, the payout control device Set a prize ball command for paying out one game ball to 181. The set prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 181 in the external output process of the normal process described later.

Subsequently, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal indicating that the game ball has won a prize to the second operating ball entry unit 63 (second operating port 63a) to the hall computer HC on the game hall side. As a result, the hall computer HC grasps that a prize has been generated for the second operating ball entry unit 63 (second operating port 63a).

After that, the value (starting hold storage number) stored in the hold number storage area of the hold area Rb for the second operation port is updated (1 addition). Subsequently, information acquisition processing for storing each value of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is performed, and the main winning process is completed.

If the game ball does not win in any of the first actuating ball entry section 62 and the second actuating ball entry section 63, the main winning process is terminated as it is.

(Normal processing)
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is started when the power is turned on is executed, and in the normal process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, the processes of steps S201 to S207 are executed as periodic processes having a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter update processes of steps S209 and S210 are executed in the remaining time.

In the normal processing, in step S201, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt processing or the previous normal processing is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 181. In addition, if a command for production such as a command corresponding to the production for game rounds such as a fluctuation start command, a type command, and a fluctuation end command, or a command corresponding to the production for open / close execution mode is set, it is notified. -Transmit to the effect control device 143. Further, the output is set for the external terminal plate 213 according to the information set in the external output buffer of the RAM 604.

Next, in step S202, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 604.

In the following step S203, a game time control process for advancing the game of each game time is executed. In this game time control process, a hit / fail judgment such as a hit and a distribution judgment of a jackpot type are performed, a symbol variation display is set by the symbol display device 75, and a display for an operation port in the main display unit 81 (main display unit D). Display control of units D1, D2, etc. is performed.

After that, in step S204, a game state transition process for shifting the game state is executed. The details will be described later, but by this game state transition process, the game state shifts to the open / close execution mode, the high probability mode, and the like.

In the following step S205, an electric service support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 71 attached to the right-side actuating ball entry unit 62R is executed. In this electric service support process, it is determined whether or not to open the electric accessory 71 using the information stored in the electric service storage area of the RAM 604, and the electric accessory 71 is opened / closed and through. It controls the display of the gate display unit DS.

In the following step S206, the game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, a predetermined launch condition is provided on the condition that the launch permission signal output from the power supply / launch control device 191 is input based on the launch operation being performed on the game ball launch handle 41. The solenoid 111 of the game ball launching mechanism 110 is excited once during the firing period (0.6 sec in the present embodiment). As a result, the game ball is launched toward the game area PE. That is, when an irregular striking such as a so-called stop striking is not performed, the firing of the game ball is repeated at a predetermined cycle on condition that the firing operation is performed.

In the following step S207, it is determined whether or not the power failure flag is set in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. The power failure flag is a flag that is set when the occurrence of a power failure is confirmed on the power failure monitoring board 605 and a power failure signal is input from the power failure monitoring board 605 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 602, and is erased in the next main process.

If the power failure flag is not set, it means that the last processing of the plurality of processes to be repeatedly executed has been completed. Therefore, whether or not the execution timing of the next normal processing has been reached in step S208, that is, the previous normal processing It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the process. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is reached. That is, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated in step S209, and the variation type counter CS is updated in step S210.

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S201 to S206 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the hit random number counter C1) can be updated at random, and similarly. The variable type counter CS can also be updated at random.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S207 that the power failure flag is set, it means that the power supply has been cut off, so the power failure processing after step S211 is executed. Specifically, after prohibiting the occurrence of timer interrupt processing in step S211, calculating and saving the RAM determination value in step S212, and prohibiting access to RAM 604 in step S213, the power supply is completely shut off. And continue the infinite loop until the process cannot be executed.

(Game times control process)
Here, with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 18 to 22, the game rotation control process of step S203 will be supplementarily described. As shown in FIG. 18, in the game rotation control process shown in the present embodiment, first, in step S301, it is determined whether or not the game is in the special game state (open / close execution mode). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode flag (open / close execution state information) is stored (stored) in the open / close execution mode flag storage area (open / close execution state information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. To do. The open / close execution mode flag is stored when the game state is shifted to the open / close execution mode in the game state transition process described later, and is deleted when the open / close execution mode is terminated in the game state transition process.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S301, the main game times control process is terminated as it is. If a negative determination is made in step S301, the game rotation control process for the game rotation related to the winning of the first operating ball entry portion 62 (first operating port 62a) in step S302 (game corresponding to the first operating port). The game time control process (second operation time control process) for the game time related to the winning of the second operation ball entry unit 63 (second operation port 63a) in step S303 while executing the time control process (control process for the first operation port). After executing the game time control process corresponding to the operation port and the control process for the second operation port), the game time control process is terminated. The basic flow of these two control processes is the same. Hereinafter, the control process for the first operating port will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20, and then the second operation port control process will be mainly referred to with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22. The control process for the operation port will be described.

(Control processing for the first operating port)
As shown in FIG. 19, in the control process for the first operating port, first, in step S401, it is determined whether or not the game rotation related to the first operating port 62a is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the display unit D1 for the first operating port of the main display unit 81 is in the variable display to the final display, that is, whether or not the game for one game is being executed. In this determination, the game rotation flag (game rotation information) for the first operating port is stored (stored) in the game rotation flag storage area (variation display information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. This is done by determining whether or not it has been done. The game rotation flag for the first operating port is stored when the variable display is started on the display unit D1 for the first operating port, and is deleted when the pattern is stopped and the final display is completed.

If the game is not in progress, a negative determination is made in step S401, and the process proceeds to step S402. In step S402, it is determined whether or not the game rotation related to the second operating port 63a is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the display unit D2 for the second operating port of the main display unit 81 is in the variable display to the final display, that is, whether or not the game for one game is being executed. In this determination, the game rotation flag (variation display information) for the second operating port is stored (stored) in the game rotation flag storage area (variation display information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. This is done by determining whether or not it has been done. The game rotation flag for the second operating port is stored when the variable display is started on the display unit D2 for the second operating port, and the pattern or the like corresponding to the lottery result (game result) is stopped and displayed for confirmation. Will be erased when is finished.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S402, the process proceeds to step S403. In step S403, it is determined whether or not the game times related to the second operating port 63a correspond to the jackpot result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S403, the control process for the first operating port is terminated as it is. If a negative determination is made in step S403 or step S402, the process proceeds to step S404. In step S404, the total number of holdings storage area of the holding ball storage area 632 is referred to, and the number of holdings stored for the first operating port, which is the number of holding information stored on hold, is CRN (specifically, the holding related to the first operating port 62a). It is determined whether or not the number of information) is "0". When the reserved storage number CRN for the first operating port is "0", the game times control process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the reserved storage number CRN for the first operating port is not "0", the process proceeds to step S405. In step S405, data setting processing is performed.

In the data setting process for the first operating port, first, the reserved storage number CRN for the first operating port is decremented by one. After that, the data stored in the first area of the holding area Ra for the first operating port is moved to the first execution area AE1 (see FIG. 10), and the data stored in the storage area of the holding area Ra for the first working port is moved. Executes the process of shifting.

This data shift process is a process of shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas in order to the lower area side, and the data in the first area is cleared and the second area → the first area, The data in each area is shifted in the order of the third area → the second area, the fourth area → the third area, and so on. Then, one LED that is lit on the hold number display unit S1 for the first operating port is turned off. In this extinguishing process, contrary to the lighting process executed when the hold information is added, the LEDs of the hold number display unit S1 for the first operating port are turned off in order from the lower side.

After performing the data setting process described in detail above, in step S406, for the first operating port for starting the variable display of the pattern on the display unit D1 for the first operating port and the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 75. After executing the fluctuation start processing (variation start processing for the first operating port) of, the present game times control processing is terminated. Here, with reference to FIG. 20, the fluctuation start processing for the first operating port in step S406 will be described.

(Variation start processing for the first operating port)
In the first operation port fluctuation start process, first, the pass / fail determination process is executed in step S501. In the hit / fail determination process, the hit / fail judgment information, that is, the numerical information acquired from the hit random number counter C1 among the information stored in the first execution area AE1, is the jackpot described above with reference to the hit / miss table for the first operating port. Judge whether or not it matches the numerical information. If the determination result in step S501 is a jackpot result, an affirmative determination is made in step S502 and the process proceeds to step S503.

In step S503, the type determination process is executed. In the type determination process, among the information stored in the first execution area AE1, the information for type determination, that is, the numerical information acquired from the hit type counter C2 is grasped. Further, with reference to the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 622 of the ROM 603, the above-identified information for type determination corresponds to the information group corresponding to the 3R probability variation jackpot result A and the 3R probability variation jackpot result B. Identify which of the information groups is included.

In step S504, the stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed. Specifically, the stop result for the jackpot result in which the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit D (display unit D1 for the first operating port) of the main display unit 81 in the game round is stored in advance in the ROM 603. It is specified from the table, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 604. A plurality of patterns to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit D are set in the stop result table for the jackpot result, and in step S504, information indicating the symbols corresponding to the jackpot result is stored in the RAM 604. Further, in step S504, information for specifying in the MPU 602 whether the current game result is either the 3R probability variation jackpot result A or the 3R probability variation jackpot result B is stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. Specifically, when the 3R probability variation jackpot result A is, the 3R probability variation A flag is stored, and when the 3R probability variation jackpot result B is, the 3R probability variation B flag is stored.

However, in the present embodiment, an upper limit (specifically, 10 times) is set for the number of consecutive probabilistic jackpot results (so-called limiter). In the MPU 602, it is determined whether or not the number of consecutive times has reached the upper limit based on the result of the current probability variation jackpot by referring to the value of the continuous number counter provided in the various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604. The value of the continuous number-of-times counter is added by "1" each time a probability variation jackpot result is obtained, and is cleared to "0" when a normal jackpot result is obtained.

When the number of consecutive probabilistic jackpot results reaches the above upper limit, after the end of the first special gaming state that has shifted with the 3R probabilistic jackpot result A or the 3R probabilistic jackpot result B as an opportunity, the normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode Will move to. Specifically, the variable winning device 64 in the special game state (open / close execution mode) is prevented from entering the advantageous ball entry unit 314. In the MPU 602, the upper limit reaching flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 653 of the RAM 604 in order to grasp that the continuous number of times has reached the upper limit, and the value of the continuous number counter for grasping the upper limit is cleared to "0". This upper limit arrival flag is cleared when the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode, which will be described later, is executed.

After executing the setting process of step S504, the process proceeds to step S505. In step S505, it is determined whether or not the game round related to the second operating port 63a is being executed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S505, the process proceeds to step S506. In step S506, the forced termination flag for the second operating port 63a is stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. When the game times (pattern variation display) related to the second operating port 63a are executed, the game times (picture variation display) related to the second operating port 63a are forced in the middle based on this forced end flag. Will be terminated. More specifically, when the game times related to the first operating port 62a correspond to the jackpot result, and the game times related to the second operating port 63a are executed beyond the timing when the confirmation display is performed in the game times. If this is possible, the game times related to the second operating port 63a will be shortened, and the game times related to the second operating port 63a will end at the same time as the game times related to the first operating port 62a. In such a case, the pattern that is stopped and displayed in the game round related to the second operating port 63a corresponds to the disengagement result.

Returning to the description of step S502, if the determination result in step S501 is an incorrect result, a negative determination is made in the step S502, and the process proceeds to step S507. In step S507, the stop result setting process for the off result is executed.

Specifically, the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit D (display unit D1 for the first operating port) of the main display unit 81 in the game times related to the start of the fluctuation this time is stored in advance in the ROM 603. It is specified from the stop result table for the deviation result, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 604.

After executing the processes of steps S506 and S507, or when a negative determination is made in step S505, the process proceeds to step S508. In step S508, the variable display time (display duration) setting process is executed. Details of this setting process will be described later.

After executing the variation display time setting process in step S508, the variation start command and the type command are set in step S509. The fluctuation start command includes information on the fluctuation display time. Here, as described above, the variable display time acquired by referring to the non-reach variable display time table is different from the variable display time acquired by referring to the reach generated variable display time table, and therefore varies. Even if the start command does not include information on the presence or absence of reach occurrence, the notification / effect control device 143, which is a control device on the sub side, can specify the presence or absence of reach occurrence from the information on the fluctuation display time. .. In this respect, it can be said that the fluctuation start command includes information indicating whether or not reach has occurred. The fluctuation start command may include information that directly indicates whether or not reach has occurred.

After executing the setting process of step S509, the process proceeds to step S510, the variation display of the first operating port display unit D1 in the main display unit 81 is started, and then the variation start processing for the first operating port is completed. In the process of step S510, the game rotation flag for the first operating port is stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. As a result, in the subsequent processing, it is possible to identify that the game times (for example, variable display) related to the first operating port 62a are being executed.

Returning to the description of FIG. 19 again, if an affirmative determination is made in step S401, that is, if it is determined that the game is in progress related to the first operating port 62a, the process proceeds to step S407. In step S407, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to stop and display the pattern corresponding to the special hit result in the game round related to the second operating port 63a. If a negative determination is made in step S407, the process proceeds to step S408. In step S408, it is determined whether or not the game round is related to the second operating port 63a and is the start timing of the game round corresponding to the jackpot result. If a negative determination is made in step S407 and step S408, the process proceeds to step S409.

In step S409, it is determined whether or not the timing has elapsed the fluctuation display time set in step S508. If a negative determination is made in step S409, the variation display process is executed in step S410, and then the control process for the first operating port is terminated. In the variable display process of step S410, the pattern is variablely displayed by performing a process of turning on / off various LEDs constituting the first operating port display unit D1.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S409, the process proceeds to step S412. In step S412, the variable end process is executed. In the variation end processing, the display control of the main display unit 81 is performed so that the pattern is stopped and displayed on the display unit D1 for the first operating port so as to be in a predetermined mode. That is, for example, the final display of the pattern corresponding to the lottery result (game result) is executed. The game rotation flag for the first operating port stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604 is deleted when the confirmation display is completed.

After setting the variable end command in the following step S413, the game round control process ends. The variation end command set in step S413 is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 143 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 17). The notification / effect control device 143 executes a process for terminating the effect in the game round based on the reception of the variable end command. Further, the variation end command is transmitted to the display control device 710 via the notification / effect control device 143, and the display control device 710 responds to the game result of the game by receiving the variation end command. The combination of the symbols is confirmed and displayed (final stop display) on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75. It should be noted that the notification / effect control device 143 and the display control device 710 may independently end the effect for the game round without transmitting the variation end command.

After that, the game count counter update process is executed in step S414, and it is determined in the subsequent step S415 whether or not the game count counter is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S415, the control process for the first operating port is terminated as it is. The game count counter defines the upper limit of the number of games in which the high-frequency support mode is executed, and the number corresponding to the type of the jackpot is set at the end of the jackpot.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S415, the process proceeds to step S416, the high-frequency support mode flag stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604 is erased, and the high-frequency support mode end command is set in step S417. To do. This high-frequency support mode end command will be output to the notification / effect control device 143 and the hall computer HC in the external output processing of the normal processing. Based on the reception of the high-frequency support mode end command, the notification / effect control device 143 displays a display corresponding to the high-frequency support mode end.

If an affirmative determination is made in either step S407 or step S408, the stop pattern rewriting process is executed in step S410, each process of steps S421 to S417 is executed, and then the first operation is performed. End the oral control process.

Next, the control process for the second operating port will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20.

(Control processing for the second operating port)
As shown in FIG. 21, in the control process for the second operating port, first, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the game rotation related to the second operating port 63a is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the display unit D2 for the second operating port of the main display unit 81 is in the variable display to the final display, that is, whether or not the game for one game is being executed. In this determination, the game rotation flag (variation display information) for the second operating port is stored (stored) in the game rotation flag storage area (variation display information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. This is done by determining whether or not it has been done. The game rotation flag for the second operating port is stored when the variable display is started on the display unit D2 for the second operating port, and is deleted when the pattern is stopped and the final display is completed.

If the game is not in progress, a negative determination is made in step S601 and the process proceeds to step S602. In step S602, it is determined whether or not the game rotation related to the first operating port 62a is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the display unit D1 for the first operating port of the main display unit 81 is in the variable display to the final display, that is, whether or not the game for one game is being executed.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S602, the process proceeds to step S603. In step S603, it is determined whether or not the game times related to the first operating port 62a correspond to the jackpot result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S603, the control process for the second operating port is terminated as it is. If a negative determination is made in step S603, or if a negative determination is made in step S602, the process proceeds to step S604. In step S604, the total number of reserved balls stored in the reserved ball storage area 632 is referred to, and the number of reserved stored information for the second operating port, which is the number of reserved information stored in the reserved ball storage area 632 (specifically, the reserved information related to the right operating port 62aR). It is determined whether or not (the number of) is "0". When the reserved storage number CRN for the second operating port is "0", the game times control process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the reserved storage number CRN for the second operating port is not "0", the process proceeds to step S605. In step S605, data setting processing is performed.

In the data setting process of the second operating port 63a, first, the reserved storage number CRN for the second operating port is decremented by one. After that, the data stored in the first area of the second operating port holding area Rb is moved to the second execution area AE2 (see FIG. 10), and the data stored in the storage area of the second operating port holding area Rb. Executes the process of shifting.

This data shift process is a process of shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas in order to the lower area side, and the data in the first area is cleared and the second area → the first area, The data in each area is shifted in the order of the third area → the second area, the fourth area → the third area, and so on. Then, one LED that is lit is turned off at the hold number display unit for the second operating port. In this extinguishing process, contrary to the lighting process executed when the hold information is added, the LEDs of the hold lamp portion for the second operating port are turned off in order from the lower side.

After performing the data setting process described in detail above, the second operation for starting the variable display of the symbol on the main display unit 81 (main display unit D) and the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 75 in step S606. After executing the variation start process for the mouth (variation start process for the second operating port), the game turn control process is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 22, the fluctuation start processing for the second operating port in step S606 will be described.

(Variation start processing for the second operating port)
In the variation start process for the second operating port, first, the pass / fail determination process is executed in step S701. In the hit / fail determination process, the hit / fail determination information, that is, the numerical information related to the hit random number counter C1, among the various information stored in the second execution area AE2, is the above-mentioned jackpot with reference to the hit / miss table for the second operating port. Judge whether or not it matches the numerical information. If the determination result in step S701 is a jackpot result, an affirmative determination is made in step S702 and the process proceeds to step S703.

In step S703, the type determination process is executed. In the type determination process, among the various information stored in the second execution area AE2, the information for type determination, that is, the numerical information acquired from the hit type counter C2 and the distribution stored in the distribution table storage area 622 of the ROM 603. With reference to the table, the information for type determination grasped above is the information group corresponding to the 2R probability variation jackpot result A, the information group corresponding to the 2R probability variation jackpot result B, the information group corresponding to the 2R normal jackpot result A, and the 2R. It is specified which of the information groups corresponding to the normal jackpot result B is included.

However, in the present embodiment, an upper limit (specifically, 10 times) is set for the number of consecutive probabilistic jackpot results (so-called limiter). In the MPU 602, it is determined whether or not the number of consecutive times has reached the upper limit based on the result of the current probability variation jackpot by referring to the value of the continuous number counter provided in the various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604. The value of the continuous number-of-times counter is added by "1" each time a probability variation jackpot result is obtained, and is cleared to "0" when a normal jackpot result is obtained.

When the number of consecutive probabilistic jackpot results reaches the above upper limit, after the end of the first special gaming state that has shifted with the 2R probabilistic jackpot result A or the 2R probabilistic jackpot result B as an opportunity, the normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode Will move to. Specifically, the variable winning device 64 in the special game state (open / close execution mode) is prevented from entering the advantageous ball entry unit 314. In the MPU 602, the upper limit reaching flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 653 of the RAM 604 in order to grasp that the continuous number of times has reached the upper limit, and the value of the continuous number counter for grasping the upper limit is cleared to "0". This upper limit arrival flag is cleared when the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode, which will be described later, is executed.

In step S704, the stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed. Specifically, the stop result for the jackpot result in which the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit D (display unit D2 for the second operating port) of the main display unit 81 in the game round is stored in advance in the ROM 603. It is specified from the table, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 604. A plurality of patterns to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit D are set in the stop result table for the jackpot result, and in step S704, information indicating the symbols corresponding to the jackpot result is stored in the RAM 604. Further, in step S704, information for specifying in the MPU 602 whether the current game result is either the 2R probability variation jackpot result A, the 2R probability variation jackpot result B, the 2R normal jackpot result A, or the 2R normal jackpot result B. Is stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. Specifically, when the 2R probability variation jackpot result A is stored, the 2R probability variation A flag is stored, when the 2R probability variation jackpot result B is stored, the 2R probability variation B flag is stored, and when the 2R normal jackpot result A is obtained. Stores the 2R normal A flag, and stores the 2R normal B flag when the 2R normal jackpot result B is obtained.

After executing the setting process of step S704, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, it is determined whether or not the game round related to the first operating port 62a is being executed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S705, the process proceeds to step S706. In step S706, the forced termination flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. When the game times (pattern variation display) related to the first operating port 62a are executed, the game times (picture variation display) related to the first operating port 62a are forced in the middle based on this forced end flag. Will be terminated. More specifically, when the game times related to the second operating port 63a correspond to the jackpot result, and beyond the timing when the confirmation display is performed in the game times, the game times related to the first operating port 62a (disengagement). If the result can be executed, the game times related to the first operating port 62a will be shortened, and the game times related to the first operating port 62a will be terminated at the same time as the game times related to the second operating port 63a are completed. Become. In such a case, the pattern that is stopped and displayed in the game round related to the first operating port 62a corresponds to the disengagement result.

Returning to the description of step S702, if the determination result in step S701 is a special hit result, a negative determination is made in step S702 and an affirmative determination is made in step S707, and the process proceeds to step S708.

In step S708, the stop result setting process for the special hit result is executed. Specifically, the stop for the special hit result in which the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit D (display unit D2 for the second operating port) of the main display unit 81 in the game round is stored in the ROM 603 in advance. It is specified from the result table, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 604. A plurality of patterns to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit D are set in the stop result table for the special hit result, and in step S703, information indicating the pattern corresponding to the special hit result is stored in the RAM 604. If the game result this time is a special hit result, the special hit flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. After that, the process proceeds to step S705.

If the determination result in step S701 is an incorrect result, a negative determination is made in step S702 and step S707, and the process proceeds to step S709. In step S709, the stop result setting process for the off result is executed. Specifically, the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit D (display unit D2 for the second operating port) of the main display unit 81 in the game round related to the start of the fluctuation this time is stored in advance in the ROM 603. It is specified from the stop result table for the deviation result, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 604.

After executing the process of step S706 or step S709, or when a negative determination is made in step S705, the process proceeds to step S710. In step S710, the variable display time (display duration) setting process is executed. Details of the variable display time setting process will be described later.

After executing the variation display time setting process in step S710, the variation start command and the type command are set in step S711. The fluctuation start command includes information on the fluctuation display time. Here, as described above, the variable display time acquired by referring to the non-reach variable display time table is different from the variable display time acquired by referring to the reach generated variable display time table, and therefore varies. Even if the start command does not include information on the presence or absence of reach occurrence, the notification / effect control device 143, which is a control device on the sub side, can specify the presence or absence of reach occurrence from the information on the fluctuation display time. .. In this respect, it can be said that the fluctuation start command includes information indicating whether or not reach has occurred. The fluctuation start command may include information that directly indicates whether or not reach has occurred.

After executing the setting process of step S711, the process proceeds to step S712, the variation display of the second operating port display unit D2 in the main display unit 81 is started, and then the variation start processing for the second operating port is completed. In the process of step S712, the game rotation flag for the second operating port is stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. As a result, in the subsequent processing, it is possible to identify that the game times (for example, variable display) related to the second operating port 63a are being executed.

Returning to the description of FIG. 21 again, if an affirmative determination is made in step S601, that is, if it is determined that the game is in progress related to the second operating port 63a, the process proceeds to step S608. In step S608, it is determined whether or not the game round is related to the first operating port 62a and is the start timing of the game round corresponding to the jackpot result. If a negative determination is made in step S608, the process proceeds to step S609.

In step S609, it is determined whether or not the timing has elapsed the variable display time. If a negative determination is made in step S609, the variation display process is executed in step S610, and then the control process for the second operating port is terminated. In the variable display process of step S610, the pattern is variablely displayed by performing a process of turning on / off various LEDs constituting the display unit D2 for the second operating port.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S609, the process proceeds to step S612. In step S612, the variable end process is executed. In the variation end processing, the display control of the main display unit 81 is performed so that the pattern is stopped and displayed on the display unit D2 for the second operating port so as to be in a predetermined mode.

In the following step S613, a variable end command is set. The variation end command set in step S613 is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 143 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 17). The notification / effect control device 143 executes a process for terminating the effect in the game round based on the reception of the variable end command. Further, the variation end command is transmitted to the display control device 710 via the notification / effect control device 143, and the display control device 710 responds to the game result of the game by receiving the variation end command. The combination of the symbols is confirmed and displayed (final stop display) on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75. It should be noted that the notification / effect control device 143 and the display control device 710 may independently end the effect for the game round without transmitting the variation end command.

After setting the fluctuation end command in step S613, the game count counter is updated in step S614, and it is determined in the following step S615 whether or not the game count counter is "0". .. If a negative determination is made in step S615, the control process for the second operating port is terminated as it is. The game count counter defines the upper limit of the number of games in which the high-frequency support mode is executed, and the number corresponding to the type of the jackpot is set at the end of the jackpot.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S615, the process proceeds to step S616, the high-frequency support mode flag stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604 is deleted, and the high-frequency support mode end command is set in step S617. To do. This high-frequency support mode end command will be output to the notification / effect control device 143 and the hall computer HC in the external output processing of the normal processing. Based on the reception of the high-frequency support mode end command, the notification / effect control device 143 displays a display corresponding to the high-frequency support mode end.

Returning to the description of step S608, if an affirmative determination is made in step S608, the process proceeds to step S611. That is, when the game round related to the first operating port 62a is the start timing of the game round corresponding to the jackpot result, the process proceeds to step S611. In step S611, the stop result is rewritten.

In the process of rewriting the stop result, first, it is determined whether or not the game times this time correspond to the special hit result. When the special hit result is not supported, the rewriting of the stop pattern (the pattern corresponding to the deviation result) determined in the fluctuation start processing for the second operating port is avoided. On the other hand, when the game result of this time corresponds to the special hit result, the stop pattern (the pattern corresponding to the special hit result) determined in the fluctuation start processing for the second operating port is deviated as the result. Rewrite to the corresponding pattern. After executing the process of step S611, after executing each process of steps S612 to S617, the control process for the second operating port ends.

(Game state transition process)
Next, the game state transition process in step S204 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 23 to 27. As described above, in the present embodiment, the normal game state in which the game progresses based on the entry into the operating ports 62a and 63a and the special game state in which the variable winning devices 64 and 65 are opened (open / close execution mode). ) And are provided. Regarding the normal game state, the lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode by the electric accessory 71 is the low frequency support mode. The first normal game state, the lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode by the electric accessory 71 is low frequency. The second normal game state, which is the support mode, the lottery mode is the low probability mode, and the support mode by the electric accessory 71 is the high frequency support mode. The third normal game state, the lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support by the electric accessory 71. The mode is composed of a fourth normal game state in which the mode is a high-frequency support mode, and the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state are switched via a special game state corresponding to a jackpot result.

In the game state transition process, first, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress. If it is not in the open / close execution mode, the process proceeds to step S802, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the game round (specifically, the confirmation display) is completed. If it is not the timing when the game round is finished, the main game state transition process is finished as it is.

If the game round has ended, more specifically, if the preset stop display time (fixed display time) has elapsed since the variable display ended, the process proceeds to step S803, and this time. It is determined whether or not the game result of the game times (the result of the above-mentioned winning / failing lottery) corresponds to the transition to the special game state (open / close execution mode). Specifically, any of the above-mentioned 3R probability variation A flag, 3R probability variation B flag, 2R probability variation A flag, 2R probability variation B flag, 2R normal A flag, 2R normal B flag, and special hit flag is stored in the RAM 604. Judge whether or not. If none of the above flags are stored, the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

When any of the above flags is stored, the start processing of the open / close execution mode is executed in step S804. In the start process, first, an opening waiting time (starting waiting time) for making the variable winning devices 64 and 65 stand by without starting the opening of the variable winning devices 64 and 65 for the opening of the open / close execution mode is set. To do. Specifically, the waiting time information for the opening stored in advance in the ROM 603 is set in the waiting time counter area provided in the various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604.

The waiting time (opening time) for the opening in the present embodiment differs depending on the type of hit. Specifically, the waiting time for the opening in the case of a big hit result is 5 sec, while the waiting time for the opening in the case of a special hit result is shorter than that, specifically 8 msec. It has become.

In the following step S805, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode of this time corresponds to the jackpot result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S805, the process proceeds to step S806, and a value corresponding to the current jackpot result is set in the round number counter RC provided in various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604. Specifically, if the current jackpot result is a 2R jackpot result, the round number counter RC is set to "2", and if the current jackpot result is a 3R jackpot result, the round number counter RC is set to "3". "Is set. The round number counter RC is subtracted each time the round progresses, and when the value of the round number counter RC becomes "0", the special game state of this time ends.

In the following step S807, when the high-frequency support mode flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604, the high-frequency support mode flag is deleted. As a result, the support mode is maintained in the low frequency support mode during the special game state corresponding to the jackpot result.

Returning to the description of step S805, if a negative determination is made in step S805, that is, if the game is in a special gaming state triggered by the special hit result, the process proceeds to step S808. In step S808, the second winning mode flag (flag for low frequency winning mode) is set in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. After that, in step S809, "1" is set in the round number counter. In the subsequent processing, it is determined that the special game state this time corresponds to the special hit result based on the fact that the second winning mode flag is set.

After executing the process of step S807 or step S809, the process proceeds to step S810. In step S810, the opening command setting process is performed. This set opening command is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 143 and the display control device 710 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 17). The notification / effect control device 143 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. The content of this effect includes a display mode in the symbol display device 75, and the determined display mode is output from the notification / effect control device 143 to the display control device 710 as a display content command. In the display control device 710, based on the opening command received from the main control device 162 and the display content command received from the notification / effect control device 143, the display corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode of this time, for example, the display content corresponding to the jackpot The display control of the symbol display device 75 is executed so that the moving image of the character or the like and the background image can be switched.

After executing the opening command setting process in step S810, the external signal setting process is executed in step S811 to end the game state transition process. In the external signal setting process of step S811, it is determined whether or not any of the above-mentioned various jackpot flags and special hit flags is stored in the RAM 604, and if any of the flags is stored, the game hall side. A signal indicating that a big hit or a special hit has occurred is output to the management control device (hall computer HC) of the above. By receiving this external signal, it is grasped that the management control device has shifted to the special gaming state (open / close execution mode).

Returning to the description of step S801, if the open / close execution mode is in progress, an affirmative determination is made in step S801, and the process proceeds to step S812. In step S812, it is determined whether or not the waiting time for the opening has elapsed. If the waiting time for the opening has not elapsed, the game state transition process is terminated as it is. If the waiting time for the opening has elapsed, the large winning opening opening / closing process is executed in step S813.

Here, the large winning opening opening / closing process will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 24 to 26.

(Opening and closing of the winning opening)
As shown in FIG. 24, in the large winning opening opening / closing process, first, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the second winning mode flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. If a negative determination is made in step S901, the process proceeds to step S902 to execute the first opening / closing process. The first opening / closing process is a process executed when the special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) corresponding to the jackpot result, that is, the first special gaming state.

(1st opening / closing process)
As shown in FIG. 25, in the first opening / closing process, first, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the upper variable winning device 64 (upper large winning opening 311) is open. Specifically, the determination is made based on the driving state of the variable winning drive unit 451 of the upper variable winning device 64. If the upper prize opening 311 is not open, it is determined in step S1002 whether or not the value of the round number counter RC is “0”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1002, the first opening / closing process is terminated as it is.

If a negative determination is made in step S1002, the process proceeds to step S1003. In step S1003, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter TC1 provided in the various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604 is “0”. The timer counter TC1 is a counter that is referred to when grasping the opening time, interval time (inter-round interval time), etc. of the upper prize winning opening 311, and is used every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16) is executed. The value is subtracted by "1". If a negative determination is made in step S1003, the first opening / closing process is terminated.

If the value of the round number counter RC is not "0" and the value of the timer counter TC1 is "0", the process proceeds to step S1004, and the opening process of the upper variable winning device 64 (upper large winning opening 311) is executed. To do. Specifically, the variable winning drive unit 451 is set to the driving state in order to open the upper prize opening 311.

After that, the processes of steps S100 to S1006 are executed as the closing condition setting process (opening setting process) corresponding to the upper variable winning device 64 (upper large winning opening 311). Specifically, in step S1005, "15000" (corresponding to 30 sec) is set in the timer counter TC1, and in subsequent step S1006, "6" is set in the winning counter PC.

In the following step S1007, it is determined whether or not it is the first round (first round) in the special gaming state this time. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1007, the process proceeds to step S1008. In step S1008, it is determined whether or not the current special game state corresponds to the probability variation jackpot result. Specifically, when any of the 2R probability change flag A, the 2R probability change flag B, the 3R probability change flag A, and the 3R probability change flag B is stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604 and the upper limit arrival flag is not stored. An affirmative determination is made in step S1008. On the other hand, although any of the 2R probability variation flag A, the 2R probability variation flag B, the 3R probability variation flag A, and the 3R probability variation flag B is stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604, the upper limit is set in the various flag storage areas 635. When the arrival flag is stored, or when any of the 2R normal flag A and the 2R normal flag B is stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604, a negative determination is made in step S1008.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1008, the probability change flow path switching process is executed in step S1009. In the probability change flow path switching process, a drive signal is output to the flow path switching drive unit 452 to move the flow path switching member 316 from the protruding position to the retracted position, and the duration for continuing the output of the drive signal is set. .. This duration is the same as the maximum opening time of the upper prize opening 311. Therefore, when the game balls are continuously fired to the right route, a prize is generated in the advantageous ball entry portion 314 in most of the cases, and the transition to the high probability mode is confirmed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1008, the normal flow path switching process is executed in step S1010. In the normal flow path switching process, as in the probability change flow path switching process, a drive signal is output to the flow path switching drive unit 452 to move the flow path switching member 316 from the protruding position to the retracted position, and the drive signal is moved. Set the duration to continue the output of. This duration is shorter than the maximum opening time of the upper prize opening 311. More specifically, a time shorter than the time required for the game ball flowing into the upper prize winning opening 311 to reach the advantageous entry portion 314 (specifically, the detection area of the detection sensor 319) is set. Therefore, even when the game balls are continuously fired to the right route, the winning of the advantageous ball entry portion 314 is basically avoided.

After executing the flow path switching process in steps S1009 and S1010, or when a negative determination is made in step S1007, the process proceeds to step S1011. In step S1011, the opening command indicating that the upper variable winning device 64 (upper large winning opening 311) has been opened is set, and the first opening / closing process is completed. This set release command is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 143 in step S201 in the normal process (see FIG. 17). The notification / effect control device 143 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the release based on the received release command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed.

Returning to the description of step S1001, if it is determined in step S1001 that the upper variable winning device 64 (upper large winning opening 311) is open, the process proceeds to step S1012. In step S1012, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to return the flow path switching member 316 to the protruding position. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the duration set in steps S1009 and S1010 has elapsed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1012, the output of the drive signal to the flow path switching drive unit 452 is stopped in step S1013, and the flow path switching member 316 is returned to the protruding position.

If a negative determination is made in step S1012, or after the return process of step S1013 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1014. In step S1014, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter TC1 is “0”. If the value of the timer counter TC1 is not "0", the process proceeds to step S1015, and whether or not the game ball has won the upper prize winning opening 311 is determined from the upstream detection sensor 317 arranged in the upper variable winning device 64. Judgment is made based on the detection information (detection signal) of.

If a prize has been won, the output process of the prize command is executed in step S1016. The winning command is output to the notification / effect control device 143, and the notification / effect control device 143 changes the display on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 based on the winning command.

After executing the command output process in step S1016, the process proceeds to step S1017. In step S1017, the value of the winning counter PC is decremented by 1, and in the following step S1018, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is "0". finish.

When an affirmative judgment is made in step S1018, that is, when the value of the winning counter PC is "0", or when a positive judgment is made in step S1014 (that is, it is determined that the value of the timer counter TC1 is "0". In the case of), it means that the conditions for closing the large winning opening have been met. In this case, in step S1019, the variable winning drive unit 451 is put into a non-driving state in order to close the upper variable winning device 64 (upper large winning opening 311).

In the following step S1020, it is determined whether or not the flow path switching member 316 is arranged at the retracted position. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1020, the output of the drive signal to the flow path switching drive unit 452 is stopped in step S1021, and the flow path switching member 316 is returned to the protruding position.

After executing the return process of step S1021 or when a negative determination is made in step S1020, the process proceeds to step S1022 to execute the update process of the round number counter RC. Specifically, when the value of the round number counter RC is not "0", the round number counter RC is decremented by 1, and when the value of the round number counter RC is "0", the round number counter RC is Keep the value of "0".

After that, in step S1023, it is determined whether or not the value of the updated round number counter RC is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S1023, the process proceeds to step S1024, and "1000" (corresponding to 2.0 sec) is set in the timer counter TC1.

After executing the process of step S1024, a close command is set in step S1025 to end the first open / close process. This set closing command is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 143 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 17). The notification / effect control device 143 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the closing command based on the received closing command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed.

Returning to the description of step S1023, if it is determined in step S1023 that the value of the round number counter RC is “0”, the process proceeds to step S1026. In step S1026, the ending process is executed. In the start processing, an ending waiting time (5 sec in the present embodiment) for waiting without starting the next game round for the ending of the open / close execution mode is set. Specifically, the waiting time information for the ending stored in advance in the ROM 603 is set in the waiting time counter area provided in the various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604.

Then, in step S1027, after setting the ending command, the first opening / closing process is completed. This set ending command is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 143 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 17).

Returning to the description of FIG. 24, if an affirmative determination is made in step S901, the second opening / closing process of step S903 is executed. Hereinafter, the second opening / closing process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 26.

(Second opening / closing process)
In the second opening / closing process, first, in step S1101, it is determined whether or not the lower variable winning device 65 (lower large winning opening 341) is open. Specifically, the determination is made based on the driving state of the variable winning drive unit 461 of the lower variable winning device 65. If the lower prize opening 341 is not open, the lower variable winning device 65 (lower prize opening 341) is opened in step S1102. Specifically, the variable winning drive unit 461 is set to the driving state in order to open the lower prize winning opening 341.

After that, the processes of steps S1103 to S1104 are executed as the closing condition setting process (opening setting process) corresponding to the lower variable winning device 65 (lower large winning opening 341). Specifically, in step S1103, "400" (corresponding to 0.8 sec) is set in the timer counter TC1, and in subsequent step S1104, "6" is set in the winning counter PC.

Returning to the description of step S1101, if it is determined in step S1101 that the lower variable winning device 65 (lower large winning opening 341) is open, the process proceeds to step S1105, and the value of the timer counter TC1 is "0". Judge whether or not. If the value of the timer counter TC1 is not "0", the process proceeds to step S1106, and whether or not a game ball has won a prize in the lower prize opening 341 is determined by a ball entry detection sensor provided in the lower variable winning device 65. Judgment is made based on the detection signal.

If a prize has been won, the output process of the prize command is executed in step S1107. The winning command is output to the notification / effect control device 143, and the notification / effect control device 143 changes the display on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 based on the winning command.

After executing the command output process in step S1107, the process proceeds to step S1108. In step S1108, the value of the winning counter PC is decremented by 1, and in the following step S1109, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is "0". To do.

When an affirmative judgment is made in step S1109, that is, when the value of the winning counter PC is "0", or when a positive judgment is made in step S1105 (that is, it is determined that the value of the timer counter TC1 is "0". In the case of), it means that the conditions for closing the large winning opening have been met. In this case, in step S1110, the variable winning drive unit 461 is put into a non-driving state in order to close the lower variable winning device 65 (lower large winning opening 341).

In the following step S1111, the ending process is executed. In the start processing, an ending waiting time (0.2 sec in the present embodiment) for waiting without starting the next game round for the ending of the open / close execution mode is set. Specifically, the waiting time information for the ending stored in advance in the ROM 603 is set in the waiting time counter area provided in the various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604.

After that, in step S1112, after setting the ending command, the opening / closing process of the main winning opening is completed. This set ending command is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 143 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 17).

Returning to the description of FIG. 23 again, after executing the large winning opening opening / closing process of step S813, the process proceeds to step S814. In step S814, it is determined whether or not the round number counter RC is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S814, the game state transition process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S814, the process proceeds to step S815. In step S815, it is determined whether or not the waiting time for the ending has elapsed. If the waiting time for the ending has not elapsed, the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the value of the round number counter RC is "0" and the waiting time for the ending has elapsed, in step S816, after executing the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode, this game End the state transition process. Here, with reference to FIG. 27, the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode will be described.

(Transition processing at the end of open / close execution mode)
In the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode, it is first determined whether or not the special game state this time corresponds to the first winning mode. If it corresponds to the first winning mode, an affirmative determination is made in step S1201 and the process proceeds to step S1202. In step S1202, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the advantageous ball-entry unit 314 during the special game state this time. When the ball has entered the advantageous ball entry unit 314, the high probability mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604 in step S1203. As a result, in the subsequent normal game state, the lottery mode for winning / failing lottery becomes the high probability mode.

In the present embodiment, when the number of consecutive probabilistic jackpot results reaches the upper limit (10 times), even if the probabilistic jackpot result is obtained, entry into the advantageous entry portion 314 is avoided. The upper variable winning device 64 is driven and controlled, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even when the number of consecutive probabilistic jackpot results reaches the upper limit (10 times), the upper variable winning device 64 is driven and controlled so that the ball enters the advantageous ball-entry portion 314, while the probabilistic jackpot is hit. When the number of consecutive results reaches the upper limit (10 times), even if the ball enters the advantageous entry section 314, the transition to the high probability mode is avoided (for example, to the advantageous entry section 314). It is also possible to make it a configuration that invalidates the entry of the ball.

After executing the process of step S1203, or when a negative determination is made in step S1202, the process proceeds to step S1204. In step S1204, it is determined whether or not the current special game state corresponds to the transition to the high frequency support mode. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1204, the high-frequency support mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604 in step S1205, and the number of games provided in the various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604 in the following step S1206. Set the value corresponding to this jackpot result in the counter. The game count counter is subtracted each time the game count is executed, and when the value of the game count counter becomes "0", the mode shifts from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode.

After executing the process of step S1206, or when a negative determination is made in both steps S1201 and S1204, the process proceeds to step S1207. In step S1207, the various flags for the special game state (for example, the winning mode flag, the jackpot flag, etc.) stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604 are erased, and the main transition process is completed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 28 to 30, the electric service support process executed in step S205 of the normal process (see FIG. 17) will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the electric service support process, FIG. 29 is a schematic view comparing the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode, and FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the electric service opening / closing process.

(Processing for electrical support)
In the electric service support process, first, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not the support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the supporting flag is stored in the supporting flag storage area provided in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. The supporting flag is a flag that is stored when the electric accessory 71 attached to the right operating port 62aR is switched to the open state and is erased when the electric accessory 71 is returned to the closed state.

If the supporting flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S1302, and it is determined whether or not the support winning flag is stored in the support winning flag storage area provided in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. The support winning flag is a flag that is stored when the open lottery for whether or not to open the electric accessory 71 is won, and is deleted when the supporting flag is stored.

If the support winning flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S1303, and it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter TC2 provided in the various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604 is “0”. If the value of the timer counter TC2 is not "0", the main electric service support process is terminated as it is.

If the value of the timer counter TC2 is "0", the process proceeds to step S1304, and it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the variation display of the pattern on the through-gate display unit DS. If it is the end timing of the variable display, in step S1305, after setting the off display and setting the timer counter TC2 to "250" (corresponding to 0.5 sec), the main electric service support process is terminated. .. By setting the off display, the variable display of the pattern on the through gate display unit DS is terminated in the state where the off display is stopped and displayed, and this off display is continued for 0.5 sec (FIG. 29). reference).

If the value of the timer counter TC2 is "0" and it is not the end timing of the fluctuation display, the process proceeds to step S1306, and it is determined whether or not the value of the accessory hold storage number SN is larger than "0". If the value of the character hold storage number SN is "0", the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. If the value of the accessory hold storage number SN is larger than "0", it is determined in step S1307 whether or not the support mode is the high frequency support mode.

If the high frequency support mode is in progress, an affirmative determination is made in step S1307, and the process proceeds to step S1308. In step S1308, it is determined by lottery (open lottery) whether or not to support by the electric accessory 71. Specifically, the value stored in the accessory holding ball storage area of the electric service storage area 633 is shifted and stored in the open random number counter C4 value shifted to the execution area and the pass / fail table storage area 621 of the ROM 603. The open lottery is performed with reference to the lottery table for the high frequency support mode. Further, at the same time as the open lottery, "750" (corresponding to 1.5 sec) is set in the timer counter TC2. The timer counter TC2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated. After that, the variation display of the pattern on the through-gate display unit DS is continued until the value of the timer counter TC2 becomes “0”, that is, for 1.5 sec (see FIG. 29).

In the following step S1309, it is determined whether or not the result of the open lottery in step S1308 is the winning result (support winning). If the support is not won, the processing for main electric service support is terminated as it is. If the support is won, the support winning flag is set in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604 in step S1310, and the main electric service support process is terminated.

If the low frequency support mode is in progress, a negative determination is made in step S1307, and the process proceeds to step S1311. In step S1311, it is determined by lottery (open lottery) whether or not to support by the electric accessory 71. Specifically, the value stored in the accessory holding ball storage area of the electric service storage area 633 is shifted and stored in the open random number counter C4 value shifted to the execution area and the pass / fail table storage area 621 of the ROM 603. The open lottery is performed with reference to the lottery table for the low frequency support mode. Further, at the same time as the open lottery, "60,000" to "180,000" (that is, corresponding to 120 to 360 sec) are set in the timer counter TC2. After that, the variation display of the pattern on the through-gate display unit DS is continued until the value of the timer counter TC2 becomes “0”, that is, for 120 to 360 sec (see FIG. 29).

In the following step S1312, it is determined whether or not the result of the open lottery in step S1311 is the winning result (support winning). If the support is not won, the processing for main electric service support is terminated as it is. If the support is won, the support winning flag is set in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604 in step S1313, and the main electric service support process is terminated.

The probability of winning support in high-frequency support mode (detailed 249/250) is higher than the probability of winning support in low-frequency support mode (detailed 50/250), and high-frequency support Mode is given preferential treatment.

Returning to the description of step S1302 in FIG. 28, when the support winning flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604, an affirmative determination is made in step S1302, the process proceeds to step S1314, and the value of the timer counter TC2 is set. It is determined whether or not it is "0". If the value of the timer counter TC2 is not "0", the pattern variation display on the through-gate display unit DS is in progress, and the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. When the value of the timer counter TC2 is "0", the hit display is set in step S1315. As a result, the variable display of the pattern on the accessory display unit 44 is terminated in the state where the hit display is stopped and displayed. In the following step S1316, the supporting flag is set in the various flag storage areas 635, the support winning flag stored in the various flag storage areas 635 is erased, and then the main electric service support process is terminated.

Returning to the description of step S1301, when an affirmative determination is made in step S1301, that is, when the supporting flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604, the process proceeds to step S1317 to open and close the electric accessory 71. After executing the electric service opening / closing process for control, the main electric service support process is terminated. Hereinafter, the electric service opening / closing process will be described with reference to FIG.

(Electric service opening / closing process)
In the electric function opening / closing process, first, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 71 is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 71 is open is determined by whether or not the electric accessory drive unit 332 is in the driving state. If the electric accessory 71 is open, the process proceeds to step S1402, and the number of winnings after opening the right operating port 62aR to which the electric accessory 71 is attached reaches the upper limit (“10” in the present embodiment). Judge whether or not. If a negative determination is made in step S1402, the process proceeds to step S1403 to determine whether or not the value of the timer counter TC2 is "0".

If the value of the timer counter TC2 is not "0", the main electric function opening / closing process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value of the timer counter TC2 is "0", or if it is determined in step S1402 that the number of winnings has reached the upper limit, the process proceeds to step S1404. In step S1404, the closing process of switching (returning) the electric accessory 71 to the closed state is performed. After that, in step S1405, the supporting flags stored in the various flag storage areas 635 are erased, and the main electric function opening / closing process is completed.

Returning to the description of step S1401, if the electric accessory 71 is not open, a negative determination is made in step S1401 and the process proceeds to step S1406. In step S1406, it is determined whether or not the timer counter TC2 is “0”. If the timer counter TC2 is not "0", the main electric function opening / closing process is terminated as it is. When the timer counter TC2 is "0", in step S1407, an opening process for switching the electric accessory 71 to the open state is executed.

After that, in step S1408, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode is in progress. If the high-frequency support mode is in progress, the timer counter TC2 is set to "250" (corresponding to 0.5 sec) in step S1409, and then the main electric service opening / closing process is terminated. On the other hand, when the low frequency support mode is in progress, the timer counter TC2 is set to "40" (corresponding to 0.08 sec) in step S1410, and then the main electric function opening / closing process is terminated.

(Relationship between game status and variable display time)
As described above, in the present embodiment, the hold information is acquired based on the entry into the first operating port 62a and the second operating port 63aR, and the pattern in the game round is obtained based on the acquired hold information. The configuration is such that the variable display to the final display of the symbol are executed. Here, the variable display time of the pattern or the pattern is set according to the game state. Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 31 to 35, the configuration related to the setting of the variation display time and the like (variation display time setting process (see FIG. 20) in the variation start process for the first operating port and the variation start process for the second operating port). (See FIG. 22)) will be supplementarily described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a variation display time setting process (variation display time setting process for the first operating port) in the variation start process for the first operating port, and FIG. 32 shows a variation display time setting process for the second operating port. The flowcharts, FIGS. 33 to 35, are schematic views showing the relationship between the gaming state and the variable display time.

(Variable display time setting process for the first operating port)
As shown in FIG. 31, in the variation display time setting process for the first operating port, first, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not the first normal gaming state is compatible with the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode. .. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1501, the first normal game state setting process is executed in step S1502, and then the variable display time setting process ends.

In the first normal game state setting process, a table corresponding to the current game time is selected from various variable display time tables for the first normal game state stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603. Then, the variable display time is set according to the number of hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first operating port in the hold ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604, the result of the winning / failing lottery, and the presence / absence of reach.

Regarding the variable display time, when comparing the jackpot result and the off result, the former is more likely to be longer than the latter, and in the case of the off result and the reach display does not occur (complete off). In the case of), it is configured to become shorter as the number of stored information on hold increases. In FIG. 33 (a1), the variation display time in the case of complete deviation in the first normal gaming state is illustrated. For example, when the number of stored pending information is "0" or "1", either "12, 13, 14 sec" is set as the variable display time, and the stored pending information When the number is "2", either "7, 8, 9 sec" is set as the variable display time, and when the number of stored information on hold is "3" or "4", it is set. Any of "3, 4, 5 sec" is set as the variable display time. In the first normal game state, the final display time of the symbol on the display unit D1 for the first operating port and the final display time of the symbol on the symbol display device 75 are configured to be "0.5 sec".

Incidentally, in the game times in which the reach display (disengagement reach) corresponding to the disengagement result occurs, any one of "20 to 40 sec" is set as the variable display time regardless of the number of stored information on hold. This variable display time is in the same range as the variable display time set in the game times corresponding to the jackpot result (see FIG. 34 (a1)), and if it is a jackpot result, it is relatively in the range. When a long time is easily set and the result is out of alignment, a relatively short time is easily set in the range. That is, the difference is provided so that the reach display having a long variable display time has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the reach display having a short variable display time.

Returning to the description of FIG. 31, if a negative determination is made in step S1501, the process proceeds to step S1503. In step S1503, it is determined whether or not the player is in the second normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1503, the second normal game state setting process is executed in step S1504, and then the variable display time setting process ends.

In the second normal game state setting process, a table corresponding to the current game time is selected from various variable display time tables for the second normal game state stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603. And set the variable display time.

In the second normal game state, unlike the first normal game state, the selection candidate of the variable display time is limited to one regardless of various conditions such as the number of stored information and the result of the winning / failing lottery. ing. Specifically, in the second normal game state, the variable display time is "600 sec" and the fixed display time is "0.5 sec" for any of the game times (FIG. 33 (a2)). And FIG. 34 (a2)), the variable display time is longer than that in the first normal gaming state.

Details will be described later, but in the second normal gaming state, by launching the gaming ball to the right route formed in the gaming area PE, the game is more advantageous to the player than when aiming at the left route. It will proceed. Most of the game balls launched to the right route win a prize in the second operating port 63a. Then, in the second normal gaming state, the variation display time of the game times related to the first operating port 62a becomes extremely long, so that the second game times related to the first operating port 62a are being executed. A large number of game times related to the operating port 63a can be executed, and the game proceeds mainly based on the hold information related to the second operating port 63a.

If a negative determination is made in step S1503 of FIG. 31, the process proceeds to step S1505. In step S1505, it is determined whether or not the player is in the third normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1505, the third normal game state setting process is executed in step S1506, and then the variable display time setting process ends.

In the third normal game state setting process, a table corresponding to the current game time is selected from various variable display time tables for the third normal game state stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603. And set the variable display time.

In the third normal game state, as in the first normal game state, when the jackpot result and the miss result are compared, the former is more likely to have a longer variable display time than the latter, and the player is out of the game. In the case of the result and the reach display does not occur (in the case of complete deviation), the variable display time is shortened as the number of stored information on hold increases. In FIG. 33 (a3), the variation display time in the case of complete deviation in the first normal gaming state is illustrated. For example, when the number of stored information on hold is "0", "5 sec" is set as the variable display time, and the number of stored information on hold is "1" or "2". If the variable display time is set to "1 sec", and if the number of stored information on hold is "3" or "4", the variable display time is set to "0.5 sec". That is, it is configured so that the variation display time is shorter as a whole when the result is completely out of alignment with the first normal gaming state. In the first normal game state, the final display time of the symbol on the display unit D1 for the first operating port and the final display time of the symbol on the symbol display device 75 are configured to be "0.5 sec".

Incidentally, in the game times in which the reach display (disengagement reach) corresponding to the disengagement result occurs, any one of "20 to 40 sec" is set as the variable display time regardless of the number of stored information on hold. This variable display time is in the same range as the variable display time set in the game times corresponding to the jackpot result (see FIG. 34 (a3)), and in the case of the jackpot result, it is relatively in the range. When a long time is easily set and the result is out of alignment, a relatively short time is easily set in the range. That is, the difference is provided so that the reach display having a long variable display time has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the reach display having a short variable display time.

If a negative determination is made in step S1505 of FIG. 31, that is, in the case of the fourth normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, the process proceeds to step S1507 and the setting process for the fourth normal game state is executed. After that, the variable display time setting process is terminated.

In the fourth normal game state setting process, a table corresponding to the current game time is selected from the various variable display time tables for the fourth normal game state stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603. And set the variable display time.

Since the setting mode of the variable display time in the fourth normal game state is basically the same as that in the third normal game state, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the present embodiment, the fourth normal gaming state is the most advantageous gaming state for the player among the normal gaming states. In order to differentiate from the third normal game state, it is possible to make the variable display time in the fourth normal game state different from that in the third normal game state. For example, the variable display time in the fourth normal game state may be differentiated so as to be longer than that in the third normal game state, or the variable display time in the fourth normal game state may be shorter than that in the third normal game state. You may differentiate to be. Even when such a change is made, it is preferable that the fluctuation display time does not exceed the fluctuation display time related to the second operating port 63a in the third / fourth normal gaming state.

(Variable display time setting process for the second operating port)
As shown in FIG. 32, in the variation display time setting process for the second operating port, first, in step S1601, it is determined whether or not the first normal gaming state is compatible with the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode. .. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1601, the first normal game state setting process is executed in step S1602, and then the variable display time setting process ends.

In the first normal game state setting process, a table corresponding to the current game time is selected from various variable display time tables for the first normal game state stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603. And set the variable display time. The variable display time table referred to in the variable display time setting process for the second operating port is a different table from the variable display time table referred to in the variable display time setting process for the lower operating port. ..

In the first normal game state, regardless of various conditions such as the number of hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second operation port in the hold ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604, the result of the winning / losing lottery, and the presence / absence of reach. , The selection candidate of the variable display time is limited to one. Specifically, in the first normal game state, the variable display time is "600 sec" and the fixed display time is "1 sec" for any of the game times (FIG. 33 (b1), FIG. 34 (b1), see FIG. 35 (b1)). A game ball launched to the right route in the first normal game state can win a prize in the second operating port 63a, but only "1" prize balls can be obtained by winning a prize in the second operating port 63a. It is necessary to wait 600 seconds until the lottery result based on the winning of the second operating port 63a is obtained. As a result, the act of launching a game ball aiming at the right route in the first normal game state and trying to advance the game in an advantageous manner is suppressed.

Returning to the description of FIG. 32, if a negative determination is made in step S1601, the process proceeds to step S1603. In step S1603, it is determined whether or not the player is in the second normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1603, the second normal game state setting process is executed in step S1604, and then the variable display time setting process ends.

In the second normal game state setting process, a table corresponding to the current game time is selected from various variable display time tables for the second normal game state stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603. And set the variable display time.

In the second normal game state, when the reach display does not occur in the case of the deviation result (in the case of complete deviation), the fluctuation display time is shortened as the number of stored information is increased. ing. In FIG. 33 (b2), the variation display time in the case of complete deviation in the first normal gaming state is illustrated. For example, when the number of stored information on hold is "0", "5 sec" is set as the variable display time, and the number of stored information on hold is "1" or "2". If the variable display time is set to "1.5 sec", and if the number of stored information on hold is "3" or "4", the variable display time is set to "0.5 sec". To. In the second normal game state, the final display time of the symbol on the display unit D2 for the second operating port and the final display time of the symbol on the symbol display device 75 are configured to be "1 sec".

Incidentally, in the game times in which the reach display (disengagement reach) corresponding to the disengagement result occurs, any one of "20 to 40 sec" is set as the variable display time regardless of the number of stored information on hold. This variable display time is in the same range as the variable display time set in the game times corresponding to the jackpot result (see FIG. 34 (b2)), and if it is a jackpot result, it is relatively in the range. When a long time is easily set and the result is out of alignment, a relatively short time is easily set in the range. That is, the difference is provided so that the reach display having a long variable display time has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the reach display having a short variable display time.

Further, in the second normal game state, in the case of the special hit result, "1.5 sec" is set as the variable display time regardless of the number of stored information on hold. Reach display is not supported for the variable display time = "1.5 sec", and if a special hit result is obtained in the second normal game state, the special hit result is obtained without going through the reach display. It is clearly stated.

If a negative determination is made in step S1603 of FIG. 32, the process proceeds to step S1605. In step S1605, it is determined whether or not the player is in the third normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1605, the third normal game state setting process is executed in step S1606, and then the variable display time setting process ends.

In the third normal game state setting process, a table corresponding to the current game time is selected from various variable display time tables for the third normal game state stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603. And set the variable display time.

In the third normal game state, regardless of various conditions such as the number of hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second operation port in the hold ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604, the result of the winning / losing lottery, and the presence / absence of reach. , The selection candidate of the variable display time is limited to one. Specifically, in the third normal game state, the variable display time is "600 sec" and the fixed display time is "1 sec" for any of the game times (FIG. 33 (b3), FIG. 34 (b3), see FIG. 35 (b3)).

If a negative determination is made in step S1605 of FIG. 32, that is, in the case of the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, the process proceeds to step S1607 and the setting process for the fourth normal gaming state is executed. After that, the variable display time setting process is terminated.

In the fourth normal game state setting process, a table corresponding to the current game time is selected from the various variable display time tables for the fourth normal game state stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603. And set the variable display time.

In the third normal game state, regardless of various conditions such as the number of hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second operation port in the hold ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604, the result of the winning / losing lottery, and the presence / absence of reach. , The selection candidate of the variable display time is limited to one. Specifically, in the third normal game state, the variable display time is "600 sec" and the fixed display time is "1 sec" for any of the game times (FIG. 33 (b4), FIG. 34 (b4), see FIG. 35 (b4)).

In the present embodiment, the game times related to the first operating port 62a and the game times related to the second operating port 63a are executed in parallel, but as described above, each normal gaming state has a first degree. By providing a large difference between the variable display time of the game times related to the first operating port 62a and the variable display time of the game times related to the second operating port 63a, the main target for advancing the game is switched. ing. Specifically, in the first normal game state, the game progresses so that the game times related to the first operating port 62a are the main, and in the second normal game state, the game times related to the second operating port 63a are played. The game progresses so as to be the main game, and in the third normal game state, the game progresses so that the game times related to the first operating port 62a become the main game, and in the fourth normal game state, the first operating port A configuration is realized in which the game progresses so that the game times related to 62a are the main game times.

(Flow of the game)
Next, a basic game flow will be described with reference to FIGS. 13, 36, and 37. FIG. 36 is a block diagram showing the flow of the game, and FIG. 37 is a schematic view comparing the game states. In the following description, FIG. 36 will be the center, and FIGS. 13 and 37 will be referred to as appropriate.

(1st normal game state)
In the first normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, a prize is generated in the first operating port 62a (specifically, the lower operating port 62aL) arranged in the game area PE (left route). , The jackpot lottery is executed. In the present embodiment, the first normal game state is a game state set so that the player has the lowest advantage among the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state.

When various jackpot results are obtained in the first normal game state, the game shifts to the first special game state (open / close execution mode). In the first special game state, the advantageous entry portion 314 is opened according to the type of jackpot result. When a ball enters the advantageous entry unit 314 during the first special game state, the lottery mode after the end of the first special game state becomes the high probability mode.

In the present embodiment, the third normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode is set to be more advantageous to the player than the second normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode. In view of such circumstances, when the 3R probability variation jackpot result A or the 2R probability variation jackpot result A is obtained in the first normal gaming state or the second normal gaming state, the player is in the first special gaming state (especially the probability variation). There is a possibility that an act such as intentionally avoiding entry into the advantageous entry section may be performed by stopping the launch of the game ball in the first round). However, if the ball is avoided from entering the advantageous ball entry portion by such an action, the game hole shifts to the first normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, and the game hole is unexpectedly unexpected. Avoiding profits.

As described above, in the first normal gaming state, the 3R probability variation jackpot result A and the 3R probability variation jackpot result B are provided as lottery results based on the winning of the first operating port 62a. The breakdown of the two is that the 3R probability variation jackpot result A is 98% and the 3R probability variation jackpot result B is 2%, and most of the cases where the jackpot result is obtained are the 3R probability variation jackpot result A (see FIG. 13).

When the 3R probability variation jackpot result B is obtained, the process shifts to the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode after the end of the first special gaming state. The fourth normal game state is a game state set so that the player has the highest advantage among the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state, and the 3R probability variation jackpot result B is the second normal game. It constitutes a direct hit route that does not go through the state or the third normal game state.

In the first normal game state, by firing the game ball to the right route, the second operating port 63a can be awarded a prize. However, the lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 63a is provided so as to be more disadvantageous than the lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 62a. Specifically, the 2R normal jackpot result A is set instead of the 3R probability variation jackpot result B that functions as the above-mentioned direct hit route, and when the 2R normal jackpot result A is obtained, the first special gaming state is passed and the first 1 It is configured to return to the normal gaming state. This is a device for suppressing the launch of the game ball to the right route in the first normal game state.

In the first normal game state, the symbol displayed on the display screen 75a (center portion) of the symbol display device 75 is associated with the game times related to the first operating port 62a. That is, in the first normal game state, the game rotation effect corresponding to the game times related to the first operating port 62a is executed in the central portion of the display screen 75a. In other words, the symbol displayed in the central portion of the display screen 75a is not associated with the game times related to the second operating port 63a. Further, when the game ball is launched toward the right route during the first normal game state, a warning sound is output from the speaker unit 29 and the display screen 75a is urged to launch the game ball toward the left route. "Please hit left" is displayed as a message.

(Second normal game state)
When the 3R probability variation jackpot result A is obtained, the process shifts to the second normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode after the end of the first special gaming state. In the second normal gaming state, the variation display time of the game times related to the first operating port 62a is significantly extended, and the variation display time of the game times related to the second operating port 63a is significantly shortened (see FIG. 37). ). As a result, the relationship between the length of the variable display time is opposite to that of the first normal gaming state. That is, the target of the main game progress is switched from the game times related to the first operating port 62a to the game times related to the second operating port 63a.

In the second normal game state, by firing the game ball toward the right route, about 1/5 of the game balls win the second operating port 63a. In the lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 63a, most of them are special winning results. In the case of a special winning result, the lower variable winning device 65 is promptly opened, and about one game ball wins the lower variable winning device 65 with one opening. As a result, the number of prize balls (so-called base) relative to the number of shots of the game balls becomes higher than that in the first normal game state, and the player shoots the game balls to the right route to suppress the decrease in the number of balls held while playing the game. It will be possible to continue. In the second normal game state, the jackpot probability is five times that in the first normal game state, and the decrease in the number of balls held is alleviated as compared with the first normal game state. As a result, the second normal game state is differentiated so as to be more advantageous to the player than the first normal game state.

In the second normal game state, a 2R probability variation jackpot result A and a 2R normal jackpot result B are provided as lottery results based on winning a prize in the second operating port 63a. The breakdown of the two is that the 2R probability variation jackpot result A is 98%, the 2R normal jackpot result B is 2%, and most of the cases where the jackpot result is obtained are the 2R probability variation jackpot result A (see FIG. 13).

When the 2R probability variation jackpot result A is obtained, basically, after the end of the first special gaming state, the mode shifts to the second normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode. That is, it returns to the second normal gaming state through the first special gaming state. However, in the present embodiment, an upper limit (specifically, 10 times) is set for the number of consecutive probabilistic jackpot results (so-called limiter). When the number of consecutive probabilistic jackpot results reaches the above upper limit in the second normal gaming state, the low probability mode and low frequency support mode are used after the end of the first special gaming state, which is triggered by the 2R probabilistic jackpot result A. It will shift to the corresponding first normal game state.

On the other hand, when the 2R normal jackpot result B is obtained during the second normal game state, the process shifts to the third normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode through the first special game state.

After the transition to the second normal gaming state, the game progresses centering on the game times related to the second operating port 63a by firing the game ball to the right route. Even in this case, since the game times related to the first operating port 62a are executed in parallel, it cannot be denied that the game times related to the first operating port 62a may result in a big hit. However, in the second normal gaming state, if a jackpot result is obtained in the game times related to the first operating port 62a, all of them are 3R probability variation jackpot results A (see FIG. 13). That is, if a big hit result is obtained in the game times related to the first operating port 62a during the second normal gaming state, the game returns to the second normal gaming state through the first special gaming state (except when the limiter is activated). ), There is no promotion route to the third normal game state. This is a device for suppressing an act of intentionally aiming at the first operating port 62a during the second normal gaming state.

Further, the 2R probability variation jackpot result A is a game result in which the support mode after the end of the first special game state becomes the low frequency support mode. Here, in a situation where a 2R probability variation jackpot result occurs and a ball enters the advantageous entry section 314 during the second normal game state, an attempt is made to intentionally avoid entering the advantageous entry section 314. When the launch of the game ball is stopped, the lottery mode after the end of the first special game state becomes the low probability mode, and the support mode also becomes the low frequency support mode. That is, instead of being promoted to the third normal gaming state, it is demoted to the first normal gaming state.

In the second normal game state, the symbol displayed on the display screen 75a (center portion) of the symbol display device 75 is associated with the game times related to the second operating port 63a. That is, in the second normal game state, the game rotation effect corresponding to the game times related to the second operating port 63a is executed in the central portion of the display screen 75a. In other words, the symbol displayed in the central portion of the display screen 75a is not associated with the game times related to the first operating port 62a. In addition, during the second normal game state, "Please hit right" is displayed on the display screen 75a as a message prompting the player to launch the game ball to the right route.

(Third normal game state)
The third normal game state corresponds to the high frequency support mode, and most of the game balls launched to the right route win a prize in the right operating port 62aR (first operating port 62a). Although the details will be described later, in the third normal game state, it is possible to further suppress the decrease in the number of balls held as compared with the second normal game state.

During the third normal gaming state, the variation display time of the game times related to the first operating port 62a is significantly shortened, and the variation display time of the game times related to the second operating port 63a is significantly extended (see FIG. 37). .. As a result, the relationship between the length of the variable display time is opposite to that of the second normal gaming state. That is, the target of the main game progress is switched from the game times related to the second operating port 63a to the game times related to the first operating port 62a. In the third normal game state, the variation display time of the game times related to the first operating port 62a is shorter than that in the first normal game state, and the game progresses in combination with the benefit of the high frequency support mode. It is being facilitated.

The third normal game state corresponds to the low probability mode, and the probability of a big hit result is 1/50. However, the configuration is such that the number of games is continued until the specified number of games reaches 100, and the probability of a big hit result by the time the specified number is reached is about 87%. That is, in most cases when the game shifts to the third normal game state, a big hit result is obtained before the specified number is reached.

In the third normal game state, when a big hit result is obtained in the lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 62a, all of them are the 3R probability variation big hit result B. When the 3R probability variation jackpot result B is obtained, the process shifts to the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode after the end of the first special gaming state.

In the third normal game state, the number of games played in the third normal game state is continued until the specified number (100 times) is reached, and when the number of games executed without a jackpot result reaches the specified number. Shifts (demotions) to the first normal game state as it is.

When the game ball is launched to the right route, a part of the game ball is awarded to the second operating port 63a as described above. If a jackpot result is obtained based on a prize in the second operating port 63a during the third normal gaming state, there is a 98% probability that the 2R probability variation jackpot result A will be obtained and the second normal gaming state will be passed through the first special gaming state. It shifts to the gaming state (demotion), and with a probability of 2%, it becomes the 2R normal jackpot result A and shifts to the first normal gaming state (demotion) via the first special gaming state.

In the third normal game state, the symbol displayed on the display screen 75a (center portion) of the symbol display device 75 is associated with the game times related to the first operating port 62a. That is, in the third normal game state, the game rotation effect corresponding to the game times related to the first operating port 62a is executed in the central portion of the display screen 75a. In other words, the symbol displayed in the central portion of the display screen 75a is not associated with the game times related to the second operating port 63a. In addition, during the third normal game state, "Please hit right" is displayed on the display screen 75a as a message prompting the player to launch the game ball to the right route.

(4th normal game state)
In the fourth normal game state, the relationship of the variation display time of the game times related to the respective operating ports 62a and 63a is the same, and the game progresses centering on the game times related to the first operating port 62a. .. The fourth normal game state also corresponds to the high frequency support mode, and most of the game balls launched to the right route win a prize in the right operating port 62aR (first operating port 62a). As a result, as in the third normal game state, it is possible to further suppress the decrease in the number of balls held as in the second normal game state.

If a big hit result is obtained in the lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 62a during the fourth normal game state, all of them are the 3R probability variation big hit result B (see FIG. 13). As described above, when the 3R probability variation jackpot result B is obtained, the process shifts to the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode after the end of the first special gaming state. That is, it returns to the fourth normal game state. Here, when the state shifts to the fourth normal game state via the third normal game state, the normal jackpot result is sandwiched, and the limiter is temporarily reset. That is, after the transition to the fourth normal gaming state, the probability variation jackpot loops until the above upper limit is reached. In other words, the transition to the 4th normal gaming state substantially guarantees a series of probabilistic jackpots (ream villas).

As described above, in the present embodiment, an upper limit (specifically, 10 times) is set for the number of consecutive probabilistic jackpot results, and the number of times that the 3R probabilistic jackpot result B is obtained in the fourth normal game state is When the above upper limit (10 times) is reached, after the end of the first special game state triggered by the 3R probability variation jackpot result B, the game shifts to the third normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. It becomes. As a result, the limiter is once reset.

As described above, the third normal gaming state is configured to have a jackpot result with an 87% probability. That is, it is configured to return to the fourth normal gaming state with a probability of 87%. By repeating the transition from the third normal game state to the fourth normal game state and the transition from the fourth normal game state to the third normal game state, the number of balls held is greatly increased.

When the game ball is launched to the right route, a part of the game ball is awarded to the second operating port 63a as described above. If a jackpot result is obtained based on a prize in the second operating port 63a during the fourth normal gaming state, there is a 98% probability that the 2R probability variation jackpot result B will be obtained and the fourth normal gaming state will be passed through the first special gaming state. It shifts (returns) to the gaming state, and has a 2% probability of becoming a 2R normal jackpot result B, and shifts (demotions) to the third normal gaming state via the first special gaming state.

In the present embodiment, the player can significantly increase the number of balls held by repeating the switching between the third normal game state and the fourth normal game state. In the present embodiment, the "special loop gaming state" is configured by the third normal gaming state and the fourth normal gaming state.

In the fourth normal game state, the symbol displayed on the display screen 75a (center portion) of the symbol display device 75 is associated with the game times related to the first operating port 62a. That is, in the fourth normal game state, the game rotation effect corresponding to the game times related to the first operating port 62a is executed in the central portion of the display screen 75a. In other words, the symbol displayed in the central portion of the display screen 75a is not associated with the game times related to the second operating port 63a. In addition, during the fourth normal game state, "Please hit right" is displayed on the display screen 75a as a message prompting the player to launch the game ball to the right route.

(Contrast of base)
Here, with reference to FIG. 38, the relationship between the game state and the launch destination of the game ball is as follows: Compare based on). For convenience of explanation below, the value obtained by dividing the number of prize balls (excluding the prize balls triggered by the big hit, that is, the prize balls related to the upper variable winning device 64) by the number of game balls fired to the specified route is ". It is called "base". FIG. 38 (a) is a schematic view showing the right route, and FIG. 38 (b) is a schematic view showing the relationship between the gaming state and the base.

First, with reference to FIG. 38 (a), the flow of the game ball on the right route will be supplementarily described. The game ball launched toward the right route has two major routes on the downstream side of the through gate 66 (specifically, the upper variable winning device 64), specifically, an inner route passing through the ball passage of the entry unit 70. , It is divided into an outer route that bypasses the outer circumference of the ball entry unit 70. For a game ball flowing down the right route (specifically, a game ball that has passed through the upper variable winning device 64), 1/2 of the game ball is distributed to the outer route and 1/2 is distributed to the inner route.

Regarding the game balls distributed to the outer route, approximately 1 / 2.5 wins the second actuating ball entry 63 (second actuating port 63a), and 1.5 / 2.5 wins the second actuating ball entry section 63a. It is discharged from the out port 68 without flowing into the 63. That is, in the normal game state, about 1/5 of the game balls launched to the right route enter the second actuating ball entry unit 63.

For the game balls distributed to the inner route, the game balls head toward the right operating entry portion 62R (right operating port 62aR). Here, when the support mode by the electric accessory 71 attached to the right-side actuating ball entry section 62R is the high-frequency support mode, about two-thirds of the game balls passing through the inner route are the right-hand actuation ball entry section. Win a prize in 62R. That is, in the third normal game state and the fourth normal game state, about one-third of the game balls flowing down the right route (specifically, the game balls that have passed through the upper variable winning device 64) are on the right-side actuating ball entry unit 62R. Win a prize.

Next, with reference to FIG. 38 (b), a base when a game ball is fired on the right route / left route in each game state will be described.

Since the variable ball entry portion is not arranged on the left route, the base is constant regardless of the normal game state from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state. Specifically, approximately 1/25 of the launched game balls win a prize in the lower actuating ball entry unit 62L, and two prize balls are paid out for each prize. Further, a general winning opening 61 is arranged on the left route, and a part of the game balls flowing down the left route wins the general winning opening 61, and 10 prize balls are paid out for each winning. As a result, the base when the game ball is launched to the left route is about 24/100.

On the other hand, on the right route, a right-hand actuating ball-entry part 62R and a lower variable-winning device 65 are arranged as variable ball-entry parts, and the behavior of these ball-entry parts depends on the gaming state. Because it is, the base changes depending on the game state.

When the game ball is launched to the right route in the first normal game state, about 1/5 of the game ball wins the second actuating ball entry unit 63. The number of prize balls based on the winning of the second actuating ball entry unit 63 is "1", and the balls are not substantially entered into other entry units where the prize balls are generated. Therefore, when the game ball is launched to the right route in the first normal game state, the base is about 20/100. That is, in the first normal game state, when compared on the base, it is possible to suppress the decrease of the number of balls held by firing the game ball to the left route rather than firing the game ball to the right route.

As described above, in the first normal game state, the game progress related to the second actuating ball entry unit 63 is significantly delayed, so that the ball enters the second actuating ball entry unit 63 as an opportunity. The pending information obtained as will soon reach a plateau. Further, in the first normal gaming state, the lottery based on the winning of the second operating ball entry unit 63 is treated colder than the lottery based on the winning of the first operating ball entry unit 62 (see FIG. 13). Incidentally, when the game ball is launched to the right route during the first normal game state, a warning message is displayed on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 and a warning sound is output from the speaker unit 29.

When the game ball is launched to the right route in the second normal game state, about 1/5 of the game ball wins the second actuating ball entry unit 63. Then, the lower variable winning device 65 is opened as a special winning result in 1/2 of the lottery based on the winning of the second operating ball entry unit 63, and the lower variable winning device 65 is approximately opened once. One game ball wins a prize. The number of prize balls based on the prize in the second operating ball-entry unit 63 is "1", and the number of prize balls based on the prize in the lower variable winning device 65 is "5". As a result, it becomes about 70/100 when the base when the game ball is launched to the right route in the second normal game state, specifically, when the prize ball related to the special hit result is included. That is, the base is significantly raised as compared with the case where the game ball is launched to the left route in the first normal game state.

When a game ball is launched to the right route in the third normal game state and the fourth normal game state, about one-fifth of the game balls win the second actuating ball entry unit 63. However, unlike the second normal game state, the game progress related to the second actuating ball entry unit 63 is significantly delayed, and the base-up due to the special hit as shown in the second normal game state cannot be expected substantially. ing. On the other hand, most of the game balls launched on the right route win the through gate 66, and most of the lottery based on the prize wins the support. Then, substantially one-third of the game balls launched to the right route in the third normal game state and the fourth normal game state win the right-hand actuated ball entry portion 62R. The number of prize balls based on the prize in the second actuating ball unit 63 is "1", and the number of prize balls based on the prize in the right side actuating ball unit 62R is "2". As a result, the base when the game ball is launched to the right route in the third normal game state is about 87/100. That is, the base is significantly raised as compared with the case where the game ball is launched to the left route in the first normal game state and the case where the game ball is launched to the right route in the second normal game state.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the base is higher in the order of the first normal game state <second normal game state <third normal game state <fourth normal game state, and the higher the normal game state, the higher the base. A configuration that suppresses the loss of balls has been realized.

(Flow of the game)
As described in detail above, the pachinko machine 10 shown in the present embodiment is configured to generate various states in which the changing mode of the holding ball is different, and it is advantageous for the player by combining these changing modes. It suppresses the progress of the game in the game state from becoming monotonous. Here, with reference to FIG. 39, the relationship between the flow of the game and the ball held in the pachinko machine 10 will be supplementarily described.

When the game ball is launched to the left route in the first normal game state, the number of balls held decreases as the game progresses. Under the situation where investment continues in this way, the 3R probability variation jackpot result A is obtained, and when the state shifts to the first special gaming state, the upper variable winning device 64 is opened and the upper variable winning device 64 is frequently won. The number of balls you have increases. Specifically, the first special game state is configured such that substantially six prizes can be generated during each round game. Since 10 game balls are paid out for each prize, about 60 prize balls can be obtained in one round. Then, since this round game is repeated three times after an interval time of 2 sec, about 180 prize balls can be obtained.

In the first round in the first special gaming state, the advantageous entry portion 314 is opened. When a ball enters the advantageous entry section 314 in this round, the state shifts to the second normal gaming state after the end of the first special gaming state. In the second normal game state, the support mode of the electric accessory 71 is maintained in the low frequency support mode, while the lottery mode is switched to the high probability mode.

Approximately 1/5 of the game balls launched to the right route under the situation of the second normal game state win the second actuating ball entry section 63, and the second actuating ball entry section 63 wins the prize. In the lottery based on, half of them will be special winning results. In the second special gaming state corresponding to the special hit result, a prize ball is obtained by winning a prize in the lower variable winning device 65. That is, after the transition to the second normal gaming state, by going back and forth between the second normal gaming state and the second special gaming state, it is possible to proceed with the game while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held.

When the game ball is launched to the right route in the second normal game state, the winning / losing lottery is executed based on the winning of the second operating ball entry unit 63. If the result of this winning / losing lottery is a big hit result, the game shifts to the first special gaming state. In the first special gaming state, the upper variable winning device 64 is opened, and the number of balls held increases due to frequent winning of the upper variable winning device 64. Specifically, the first special game state is configured such that substantially six prizes can be generated during each round game. Since 10 game balls are paid out for each prize, about 60 prize balls can be obtained in one round. Then, since this round game is repeated twice after an interval time of 2 sec, about 120 prize balls can be obtained.

The game result in the second normal game state includes the 2R probability variation jackpot result A and the 2R normal jackpot result B, and the 2R normal jackpot result B is set before the limiter is activated by repeating the 2R probability variation jackpot result A. Is a structure that leads to a large number of prize balls. In the example shown in FIG. 39, the result of three big hits is the 2R normal big hit result B.

Regarding the second normal game state, the first special game state corresponding to the special hit result and the second special game state corresponding to the big hit result frequently occur, and the probability change is made after the transition to the second normal game state. By the operation of the limiter of No. 1, the number of balls held by the player increases before the transition to the first normal gaming state or the 2R normal jackpot result B and the transition to the third normal gaming state (one point in FIG. 39). See Chain Line and Dashed Line).

In the third normal game state, since the game proceeds mainly based on the winning of the right-hand actuating ball entry unit 62R, the transition to the second special game state corresponding to the special hit result is substantially avoided. However, the third normal game state corresponds to the high-frequency support mode, and during the high-frequency support mode, the right-side actuating ball entry portion 62R is opened and the right-side actuating ball entry section 62R is frequently awarded. As a result, in the third normal game state, the decrease in the number of balls held is further reduced as compared with the second normal game state.

In the third normal game state, the game proceeds based on the winning of the right-handed ball entry unit 62R. In the example shown in FIG. 39, the 3R probability variation jackpot result B is obtained during the third normal gaming state, and the transition to the fourth normal gaming state is performed through the first special gaming state. Regarding the fourth normal game state, unlike the third normal game state, the lottery mode corresponds to the high probability mode. Therefore, switching between the first special gaming state and the fourth normal gaming state is repeated in a short span. As a result, the number of balls held will increase significantly.

When the state shifts to the fourth normal gaming state, the jackpot is substantially repeated until the limiter is activated, and when the limiter is activated, the limiter is temporarily demoted to the third normal gaming state. However, as described above, since pullback can occur with a high probability in the third normal game state, there is a chance of promotion from the third normal game state to the fourth normal game state. In this way, by looping the third normal game state and the fourth normal game state, the number of balls held is greatly increased. However, in the present embodiment, by making the third normal gaming state function as a kind of interval, it is suppressed that the increasing speed of the holding ball becomes excessively high. This is preferable in improving the soundness of the game.

As described in detail above, each normal gaming state shown in the present embodiment is configured to increase in the order of first normal gaming state <second normal gaming state <third normal gaming state <fourth normal gaming state. There is. Further, in the present embodiment, there is a chance to greatly increase the number of balls held by shifting to the special loop gaming state (particularly the fourth normal gaming state) consisting of the third normal gaming state and the fourth normal gaming state. The transition to the 4th normal game state is mainly the route of the 1st normal game state → the 2nd normal game state → the 3rd normal game state, and the 4th normal game state is to obtain a large amount of balls while suppressing investment. In aiming for a gaming state, the player's advantage is higher in the order of first normal gaming state <second normal gaming state <third normal gaming state <fourth normal gaming state.

According to the first embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be expected.

As for the second normal game state, the low frequency support mode is supported as in the first normal game state, and there is little expectation for winning support by the electric accessory. However, in the second normal gaming state, the probability of a special hit result (so-called small hit) is substantially increased from the first normal gaming state, the chances of winning the lower variable winning device 65 increase, and the lower variable winning device 65. A certain amount of prize balls can be obtained by winning a prize in the prize device 65. That is, the chances of winning a prize ball increase as compared with the first normal game state. With regard to such behavior, unlike the configuration in which the support mode of the electric accessory is switched to the high frequency support mode to increase the chances of paying out the game ball, the increase in payout = the increase in winnings in the operating port does not necessarily occur. This is preferable in order to realize diversification of games while suppressing the chance of winning a prize in the operating port. Here, in the present embodiment, the second normal game state in which a certain amount of ball can be expected due to the frequent occurrence of special hit results is more advantageous to the player than the first normal game state, while the fourth normal game state. When compared, it is disadvantageous to the player. By providing a gaming state higher than the second normal gaming state in this way, in other words, by configuring the second normal gaming state not to be positioned at the highest level in various normal gaming states, such a special game It is possible to preferably eliminate the inconvenience that the above effect is not exhibited well due to the strengthening of the restriction related to the transition to the state (second normal gaming state). Therefore, according to the configuration shown in the present embodiment, the degree of attention to the game can be suitably improved by diversifying the game.

Here, the third normal game state (so-called time saving) corresponding to the high-frequency support mode and the low-probability mode functions as an entrance to the fourth normal game state, which is the highest level, and the base is the second normal game state. Is higher than. The transition rate from the third normal game state to the fourth normal game state exceeds 80%, the transition rate from the second normal game state to the third normal game state, and the transition rate from the second normal game state to the fourth normal game state. It is high compared to any of the transition rates to the gaming state. Then, if the player shifts to the fourth normal game state, that is, if the loop in the special loop game state is started, a large amount of game balls (larger than the increase amount of the balls held in the second normal game state) is acquired and held. You can increase the number of balls at once. As a whole, the third normal game state is more advantageous to the player than the second normal game state. That is, the advantage of the player is configured to increase in the order of the first normal game state <second normal game state <third normal game state <fourth normal game state. As described above, lowering the order of the second normal gaming state to that of the third normal gaming state is advantageous in increasing the chances of transition to the second normal gaming state and exerting the above effects.

By shifting from the first normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode to the second normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode, the main operation port of the game progress becomes the first operation port. It switches from 62a to the second operating port 63a. In the lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 62a, the special winning result is not set, whereas in the lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 63a, the special winning result is set to about half of the lottery. Has been done. When a special winning result is obtained, the lower variable winning device 65 is switched to the open state, and the winning ball is paid out by winning the lower variable winning device 65. As a result, in the second normal game state, investment is suppressed as compared with the first normal game state, and the game can be advanced while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held.

Here, as a jackpot result, providing a normal jackpot result corresponding to the switch to the low probability mode and a probability variation jackpot result corresponding to the switch to the high probability mode realizes diversification of the game and suppresses the monotony of the game. Although it is advantageous in terms of playing, it is a normal jackpot result and an advantageous gaming state despite the fact that the game can be advanced advantageously by shifting from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state. It is feared that the simple termination of a certain second normal gaming state may be a factor that reduces the player's willingness to play.

In this regard, in the configuration shown in the present embodiment, when a probability variation jackpot result is obtained during the second normal gaming state, the game returns to the second normal gaming state via the first special gaming state. 2 If a normal jackpot result is obtained during the normal game state, the game shifts to the third normal game state, which is more advantageous to the player than the second normal game state, through the first special game state. That is, the normal jackpot result during the second normal game state is an opportunity to be promoted to a more advantageous normal game state. In this way, if it is a configuration that is advantageous for the player to obtain a normal jackpot result after shifting to a gaming state (second normal gaming state) that is more advantageous than the first normal gaming state, the existence of a normal jackpot result exists. Can be avoided as a factor that reduces the player's willingness to play. That is, in order to diversify the game by using the normal jackpot result and the probabilistic jackpot result together, the negative impression of the normal jackpot result can be alleviated. Therefore, it is possible to preferably exert the effect of improving the degree of attention to the game by diversifying the game.

In the first normal game state, the game basically proceeds centering on the game times related to the first operating port 62a. When a big hit result is obtained in a lottery based on a prize in the first operating port 62a, all the distributions are probabilistic big hit results, and are not usually big hits. In addition, the chances that the game times related to the second operating port 63a are interrupted are extremely small, and even if a lottery based on winning a prize in the second operating port 63a results in a normal jackpot, the first normal game state Also does not shift to a lower (unfavorable) normal gaming state. As a result, it is suppressed that the result of the normal jackpot in the first normal game state becomes a factor that rapidly lowers the player's willingness to play.

It should be noted that the subsequent behavior differs greatly between the case where the normal jackpot result is obtained in the first normal game state and the case where the low probability mode correspondence result is obtained in the second game state. In other words, even if the result is usually a big hit, the subsequent development of the game differs greatly depending on the situation. With such a configuration, diversification of games can be realized, and monotonous games can be suitably suppressed.

As described in detail above, by limiting the normal jackpot results to the player's advantage only under some circumstances, the normal jackpot will motivate the player to play while realizing diversification of the game. It can be suitably suppressed that it becomes a factor of lowering.

It is preferable to provide a direct route from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state (special loop game state) in order to diversify the game. However, the probability that the lottery during the second normal game state will result in a normal jackpot result before the limiter is activated is the jackpot result corresponding to the transition to the fourth normal game state by the lottery during the first normal game state (3R probability variation jackpot result). It is given preferential treatment so that it becomes higher than the probability of becoming B), and the second normal gaming state corresponds to the high probability mode, and the second normal gaming state shifts to the fourth normal gaming state for the player. It will be a chance to do it. In such a configuration, the player who expects the transition to the fourth normal gaming state first shifts to the second normal gaming state and expects to obtain a normal jackpot result during the second normal gaming state. Is expected to do. This is preferable in order to alleviate the negative image of the normal jackpot result as described above and to suppress that the normal jackpot result is an opportunity to reduce the player's willingness to play.

Further, if a probability variation jackpot result is obtained during the second normal game state, the second normal game state is looped. That is, in the second normal gaming state, the superiority of the probability variation jackpot result and the normal jackpot result is reversed when the first normal gaming state is used as a reference. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably increase the expectation for the normal jackpot result in the second normal game state. By the way, if a probability change jackpot result is obtained during the second normal game state, it is possible to re-challenge the normal jackpot result while increasing the number of balls held until the limiter is activated. Then, since the second normal game state corresponds to the high probability mode, the opportunity for the re-challenge occurs at a good tempo. This is preferable in order to arouse the player's willingness to play during the second normal gaming state.

During the second normal game state, the second normal game state is looped until the number of consecutive probabilistic jackpot results reaches the upper limit. A player who expects to be promoted to the third normal gaming state will play the game with the expectation that a normal jackpot result will be obtained by the time the number of consecutive times reaches the upper limit. In other words, the challenge to the normal jackpot result will continue until the upper limit is reached. With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably suppress the end of the second normal gaming state immediately after enjoying the game in the second normal gaming state despite the transition to the second normal gaming state.

When shifting to the fourth normal game state, which is most advantageous to the player in the normal game state, via the third normal game state, the third normal game state corresponds to the high probability mode. The following inconveniences can occur. That is, due to the relationship with the limiter, the period of stay (number of consecutive villas) in the fourth normal game state is greatly affected by the period of stay (number of consecutive villas) in the second normal game state, and the fourth normal game state and the second There is concern that the difference in superiority from the normal gaming state will become smaller. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in the present embodiment, when shifting from the second normal game state to the fourth normal game state, the game goes through the third normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode, and the probability variation jackpot result Will be interrupted once. As a result, even if the period of stay in the second normal game state (the number of consecutive high-probability mode correspondence results) increases, the difference in superiority between the fourth normal game state and the second normal game state becomes smaller due to the influence. This can be suitably suppressed.

After the transition to the fourth normal gaming state, the game is performed with the expectation that the fourth normal gaming state will continue. Here, while the game is performed aiming at the normal jackpot result during the second normal game state, the game is performed aiming at the probability variation jackpot result during the fourth normal game state, and the lottery result targeted by the player Is the opposite. With such a configuration, the effect of suppressing the monotony of the game can be more preferably exhibited.

A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a normal gaming state (so-called time saving) corresponding to a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode, and by giving the player a so-called pullback chance, a rapid decrease in the motivation to play is suppressed. There is something that is. Here, in the present embodiment, the second normal game state is shifted to the third normal game state (corresponding to the above time reduction) corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode, and the jackpot result is obtained in the third normal game state. When (Probability change jackpot result B) is obtained, the player shifts to the fourth normal gaming state, which is more advantageous to the player than the second normal gaming state before the transition to the third normal gaming state. With such a configuration, it is possible to dramatically improve the degree of attention of the player to the game in the third normal game state.

In the fourth normal gaming state, the game times related to the first operating port 62a correspond to short fluctuations and the game times related to the second operating port 63a correspond to long fluctuations, and during the fourth normal gaming state, the first operating opening The game progresses mainly with the game times related to 62a. On the other hand, in the second normal gaming state, the game times related to the first operating port 62a correspond to long fluctuations and the game times related to the second operating port 63a correspond to short fluctuations, and during the second normal gaming state. The game progresses mainly in the game times related to the second operating port 63a. Here, both the second normal game state and the fourth normal game state correspond to the high probability mode, and in the second normal game state, the number of consecutive probabilistic jackpot results becomes the upper limit, and the second normal game state ends. (Transition to another normal game state), and even in the 4th normal game state, the 4th normal game state ends (shifts to another normal game state) when the number of consecutive probabilistic jackpot results becomes the upper limit. Therefore, the ratio of the probability variation jackpot result and the normal jackpot result is different between the first operating port 62a and the second operating port 63a. Therefore, the probability that the number of consecutive probability variation jackpot results reaches the upper limit in the second normal game state (completion probability) and the probability that the number of consecutive probability variation jackpot results reaches the upper limit in the fourth normal game state (completion probability) are different. It is composed. In this way, by making the completion probability different for each of the two normal game states corresponding to the high probability mode, an unprecedented novel game becomes possible. This can contribute to increasing the degree of attention to the game.

In the present embodiment, the probability of probability change is 100% for the first operating port 62a and 98% for the second operating port 63a. Therefore, in the fourth normal game state in which the game progresses mainly with the game times related to the first operation port 62a, the limiter operates when the number of consecutive probabilistic jackpot results reaches the upper limit (10 times) for almost all of them. Will be done. On the other hand, in the second normal game state, since the game progresses mainly in the game times related to the second operating port 63a, the number of consecutive probabilistic jackpot results reaches the upper limit (10 times) in most of them. , In some cases, the result is a normal jackpot, and the loop in the second normal game state ends before the upper limit is reached. That is, the completion probability described above is higher in the fourth normal game state than in the second normal game state.

Since both the second normal game state and the fourth normal game state correspond to the high probability mode, the probability of winning the result is higher than that of the low probability mode. However, if the probabilistic jackpot result continues, it cannot be denied that a large fit may occur accidentally. When such a fit occurs, a dilemma may arise in which the game cannot be completed because the player is in the high-probability mode although the investment is high. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, if the number of payouts is larger in the second / fourth normal game state than in the first normal game state, two loop-type high-probability games are used. The above-mentioned adverse effects due to the combined use of the states can be reduced. The second normal game state and the fourth normal game state are both configured so that the base is higher than that of the first normal game state, and the probability variation jackpot results are continuously obtained in the second normal game state and the second normal game state. 4 It is avoided that a long stay period in the normal game state becomes a factor that makes the decrease in the number of balls conspicuous.

In a gaming machine in which the game progresses based on the winning of the operating opening, the player's interest tends to be directed to whether or not the operating opening is won. Here, as shown in the present embodiment, when the winning of the second operating port 63a is easier than the winning of the first operating port 62a (lower operating port 62aL) of the left route, A player who expects to enter the operating port is more likely to launch the game ball to the right route, ignoring the suggestion of launching the game ball toward the left route. This is not preferable in that the operating ports are arranged on the left route and the right route, respectively, to encourage the player to change the launch destination of the game ball according to the game state, and to suppress the monotony of the game. In this regard, as shown in the present embodiment, the determination relating to the first operating port 62a on the left route side is configured to be more likely to result in a probable change jackpot result than the determination relating to the second operating port 63a. Normal game state → Encourages a player who expects to be promoted to the second normal game state or the fourth normal game state to launch a game ball to the left route during the first normal game state to suppress the above-mentioned monotonicization. The effect can be suitably exhibited. This is preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the game by suppressing the monotonization.

As for the distribution of the probability variation jackpot results, the first operating port 62a is given preferential treatment over the second operating port 63a. Therefore, it is preferable to aim at the first operating port 62a (specifically, the lower operating port 62aL) in order to aim for promotion from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state or the fourth normal gaming state. However, while such preferential treatment can be experienced by actually producing a probabilistic jackpot result, it cannot be experienced in the state where the first normal game state continues. Therefore, in the configuration shown in the present embodiment, the value (base) obtained by dividing the number of payouts of the game balls by the number of shots becomes larger when the game balls are fired to the left route during the first normal game state, and the ball is held. You can feel that the left route is given preferential treatment in a visible way of increasing or decreasing. As a result, it is possible to promote the launch of the game ball toward the left route in the first normal game state and suppress the launch of the game ball into a flow path (right route) different from the assumption. This is preferable in order to exert the effect of suppressing the monotony of the game by changing the launch destination.

In the first normal game state, the variable display of the symbol (game effect) is executed in the central portion of the display screen 75a based on the winning of the first operating port 62a. On the other hand, even if a prize is generated in the second operating port 63a in the first normal game state, the variable display of the symbol in the central portion is not executed based on the prize. In this way, in the first normal game state, the game ball is aimed at the second operating port 63a even though the game effect is executed on the premise that the first operating ball entering portion 62a is won. When it is launched, there is a concern that the effect of increasing the degree of attention to the game by the game production will not be exhibited well. By applying the above technical idea to such a configuration and urging the player to launch the game ball aiming at the left route (lower operating port 62aL) in the first normal game state, the above concerns can be suitably dispelled.

In the present embodiment, the lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 63a is likely to result in a special winning result, and the winning of the second operating port 63a is the first operating port 62a (lower operating port) of the left route. It is easier than winning a prize in 62aL). This is a device that makes it possible to advance the game while reducing the number of balls held in the second normal game state by increasing the frequency of transition to the special game state to some extent. Although such a device is effective in realizing the diversification of games, as described above, the player who expects the ball to enter the operating port is a game ball directed to the left route even during the first normal game state. There is a high possibility that the game ball will be launched to the right route, ignoring the suggestion of launching. This is not preferable in that the operating ports are arranged on the left route and the right route, respectively, and the player is urged to change the launch destination of the game ball according to the game state to suppress the monotony of the game. In this regard, as described above, the determination relating to the first operating port 62a is configured to be more likely to result in a probability variation jackpot than the determination relating to the second operating port 63a, so that the first normal gaming state → the second normal gaming state or the second (4) During the first normal gaming state, the player who is expected to be promoted to the normal gaming state is urged to launch the game ball to the left route, and the above-mentioned effect of suppressing monotonization can be suitably exerted. This is preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the game by suppressing the monotonization.

In the second normal game state, when a normal jackpot result is obtained, the player shifts to a special loop game state (third normal game state and fourth normal game state) which is more advantageous to the player than the second normal game state. On the other hand, when a probability variation jackpot result is obtained in the second normal game state, the upper variable winning device 64 is controlled so that the game ball passes through the advantageous winning portion 314 of the upper variable winning device 64. Here, if the winning of the advantageous ball portion 314 is avoided by intentionally refraining from launching the game ball even though the probability change jackpot result is obtained during the second normal game state, the special game is played. After the end of the state, the player shifts to the first normal gaming state, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the second normal gaming state, and the transition to the special loop gaming state is avoided. With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably suppress an act of intentionally avoiding winning a prize in the advantageous ball-entry portion 314 and illegally acquiring a privilege (transition to an advantageous state). This is preferable in order to prevent the fairness between the players from being impaired and the game hall from suffering an unexpected disadvantage, and to preferably improve the reliability of the game machine.

In the present embodiment, during the second normal game state, the determination result corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode is not obtained. In such a configuration, it is sufficient to determine only whether or not to set the high probability mode based on the passing condition of the advantageous entry portion 314. That is, even if the advantageous entry portion 314 is not won when the probability variation jackpot result is obtained, it is not necessary to forcibly change the support mode accordingly. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the behavior of the gaming machine from becoming unstable due to complicated control related to switching of gaming states. This is preferable in order to improve the reliability of the gaming machine.

In addition, if the game ball cannot pass through a predetermined location due to an accidental factor such as a player's operation error, it is harsh for the player to switch both the lottery mode and the support mode to a mode that is disadvantageous to the player. .. In this respect, such a concern can be suitably dispelled by setting the probability variation jackpot result during the second normal game state to not include the probability variation jackpot result corresponding to the transition to the high frequency support mode.

In a type of gaming machine in which the decrease (investment) in the number of balls held as the game progresses is alleviated by the transition of the game state, the diversification of the game can contribute to the improvement of the degree of attention to the game. In this type of gaming machine, the impact of the mitigation function can be strengthened by increasing the gap between the case where the reduction of the number of balls held is mitigated and the case where the reduction is not mitigated, while increasing the gap is the mitigation function. It is feared that it will hinder the increase of opportunities to demonstrate. In other words, even if it has a mitigation function, the strengthening of the restriction on its activation may hinder the enhancement of the above-mentioned effect of improving the degree of attention. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in the present embodiment, the value (base) obtained by dividing the number of payouts by the number of shots is the first normal game state <second normal game state <third normal game state and fourth normal game state. The decrease (investment) of the number of balls held will be eased by shifting to a higher game state. In this way, by providing the medium base between the low base and the high base, it is possible to increase the chances of alleviating the decrease in the number of balls held as compared with the case where the medium base is not provided. Therefore, it is possible to preferably exert the effect of increasing the opportunity to raise the base and increasing the degree of attention to the game by diversifying the game.

By shifting from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state, the chances of getting a special winning result increase, and by winning the lower variable winning device 65, the chances of winning a prize ball increase. On the other hand, in the third normal game state and the fourth normal game state, the chances of entering the first operating port 62a (right operating port 62aR) are increased by the electric accessory, and the prize ball is won by winning the operating port. There are more opportunities to do it. Especially in the 3rd normal game state and the 4th normal game state, by increasing the chances of entering the ball into the operating port, the chances of acquiring the hold information (the chances of the judgment being executed) also increase, and the game (game times). Operation) can be advanced quickly. In this way, by granting benefits from the two aspects of the base and the game progress, the superiority of the third normal game state and the fourth normal game state over the first normal game state and the second normal game state is ensured. Is preferable for realizing diversification of games. In the second normal game state, the base is raised by increasing the chances of entering the ball into the operating port, and in the third normal game state and the fourth normal game state, the base is raised by increasing the chances of a special hit result. By comparison, it becomes difficult to increase the progress speed of the game in the fourth normal game state (special loop game state), which is the highest level. That is, in order to enhance the exhilaration in the special loop game state, it is technically significant to have the configuration shown in this feature.

Further, although the second normal game state and the third / fourth normal game state are common in that the base is pulled up from the first normal game state, the method is completely different. For example, when the base of the second normal game state and the third / fourth normal game state is raised by increasing the operation frequency of the electric accessory, the frequency of prize balls to the operating port and the progress of the game The correlation with speed becomes stronger, and one benefit is more likely to be influenced by the other benefit. In this regard, as shown in the present embodiment, if the raising of the base in the second normal gaming state and the raising of the base in the third / fourth normal gaming state are realized by different methods, such inconvenience is caused. It is possible to suppress the occurrence and preferably realize the diversification of games.

<Second embodiment>
In the first embodiment, when the 2R normal jackpot result B is obtained based on the winning of the second operating port 63a during the second normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode, the third The configuration is such that the player shifts to the normal game state (the chance zone for shifting to the fourth normal game state). In the present embodiment, the 2R probability variation jackpot result A is repeatedly won during the second normal game state to approach the third normal game state, thereby suppressing the monotonization of the game during the second normal game state. One of the features is that it does. Hereinafter, the characteristic configuration of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 and 41, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

The distribution table for the second operating port in the present embodiment has an 80% probability of a 2R probability variable jackpot when a jackpot result is obtained based on a prize in the second operating port 63a during the second normal gaming state. The result is A, and the result is changed from the first embodiment so that the 2R normal jackpot result A is obtained with a probability of 20%. Since the distribution table for the first operating port has the same configuration as the distribution table for the first operating port shown in the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

When the 2R probability variation jackpot result A is obtained during the second normal gaming state, the subsequent gaming state differs depending on whether or not the limiter that defines the upper limit of the number of consecutive probability variation jackpots is activated. Specifically, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 40, when the 2R probability variation jackpot result A is obtained and the number of consecutive probability variation jackpot results does not reach the above upper limit (10 times), the limiter is activated. Instead, after the end of the first special gaming state triggered by the 2R probability variation jackpot result A, the player shifts (returns) to the second normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode.

On the other hand, when the 2R probability variation jackpot result A is obtained and the number of consecutive probability variation jackpot results reaches the above upper limit (10 times), the limiter is activated and the 2R probability variation jackpot result A is used as an opportunity. After the end of the first special gaming state, the player shifts (promotes) to the third normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode.

Here, if the 2R normal jackpot result A is obtained during the second normal gaming state, the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode are supported via the first special gaming state triggered by the 2R normal jackpot result A. Transition (demotion) to the first normal game state. That is, as shown in FIG. 41, when aiming from the second normal gaming state to the fourth normal gaming state, the 2R probability variation jackpot result is continuously generated until the limiter operation while avoiding the 2R normal jackpot result A. There is a need. In other words, the transition trigger from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state is the limiter operation, which is different from the transition trigger (2R normal jackpot result B) shown in the first embodiment.

In a gaming machine having a limiter function for probabilistic change, the so-called consecutive villa is terminated by the operation of the limiter. It is expected that the operation of the limiter in a situation where the probability change jackpots are in good condition will give a negative impression to the player. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in the present embodiment, by operating the limiter, the player shifts (promotes) to the third normal gaming state, which is a chance zone for shifting to the fourth normal gaming state. Therefore, it is assumed that the player who expects the transition to the third / fourth normal gaming state plays the game while expecting the limiter to operate in the second normal gaming state. In this way, by repeating the probability variation jackpot during the second normal game state to approach the third / fourth normal game state, the negative image of the limiter function is dispelled, and in the second normal game state. It can contribute to increasing the degree of attention to the game.

<Third embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the distribution table for the first operating port is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the distribution table according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 42. Since the distribution table for the second operating port has the same configuration as the distribution table for the second operating port shown in the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

The distribution table for the first operating port includes a distribution table for the first normal game state, a distribution table for the second normal game state, a distribution table for the third normal game state, and a fourth normal game. It is roughly divided into a distribution table for states.

Regarding the distribution table for the first normal game state, a total of 96 values of "0" to "95" among the values of the hit type counters C2 of "0" to "99" correspond to the 3R probability variation jackpot result A. A total of two "96" to "97" correspond to the 3R probability variation jackpot result B, and a total of two "98" to "99" correspond to the 3R normal jackpot result B. Regarding the distribution table for the second normal game state, a total of 98 values of "0" to "97" among the values of the hit type counters C2 of "0" to "99" correspond to the 3R probability variation jackpot result A. A total of two "98" to "99" correspond to the 3R normal jackpot result B. Regarding the distribution table for the third normal game state, a total of 98 values of "0" to "97" among the values of the hit type counters C2 of "0" to "99" correspond to the 3R probability variation jackpot result B. A total of two "98" to "99" correspond to the 3R normal jackpot result B. Regarding the distribution table for the 4th normal game state, a total of 98 values of "0" to "97" among the values of the hit type counters C2 of "0" to "99" correspond to the 3R probability variation jackpot result B. A total of two "98" to "99" correspond to the 3R normal jackpot result B. As described above, in the first embodiment, the probability of change in the lottery for the first operating port 62a is 100%, whereas in the present embodiment, the lottery for the first operating port 62a The probability of change is 98%, which can usually be a big hit result.

As described in the first embodiment, the 3R probability variation jackpot result A is a jackpot result of shifting to the second normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode after the end of the first special gaming state. The 3R probability variation jackpot result B is a jackpot result of shifting to the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode after the end of the first special gaming state. On the other hand, the 3R normal jackpot result B is a jackpot result that shifts to the third normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode after the end of the first special gaming state, as shown in FIG. 43.

In the first embodiment, it is possible to shift to the third normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode by passing through the second normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode. As a result, the transition route to the third normal game state was restricted. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the 3R normal jackpot result B is obtained in the first normal game state, so that the second normal game state can be jumped over and the third normal game state can be shifted to. That is, it differs from the first embodiment in that a direct route from the first normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state is provided as the transition route.

Further, even in the third normal game state, there is a possibility that the 3R normal jackpot result B may be obtained by winning the first operating port 62a. In this case, after the end of the first special gaming state triggered by the 3R normal jackpot result B, the player returns to the third normal gaming state again. At this time, by resetting the specified number (100 times) that defines the number of games played in the third normal game state, the third normal game state is substantially extended. In this way, by increasing the degree of expectation of transition to the fourth normal game state, the player's willingness to play is that the 3R normal jackpot result B is obtained in the lottery related to the first operating port 62a in the third normal game state. It suppresses the factor that lowers the. When the third normal gaming state is continued in this way, the opening time in each round is shortened in the first special gaming state corresponding to the third normal jackpot result B (for example, low frequency winning mode). It is also possible to have a configuration in which the first special gaming state is promptly terminated.

As a result of changing the distribution table for the first operating port as described above, there is a possibility that the 3R normal jackpot result B may be obtained by winning the first operating port 62a even in the fourth normal game. In this way, when the 3R normal jackpot result B is obtained in the 4th normal gaming state, the game shifts to the 3rd normal gaming state (demotion) after the end of the 1st special gaming state triggered by the 3R normal jackpot result B. .. At this time, the limiter described above is reset.

In the present embodiment, the diversification of the game is realized by providing a direct route from the first normal game state to the third normal game state. In such a configuration, there is a possibility that the gambling property becomes excessively high due to an increase in the chances of transition to the fourth normal game state, but in the present embodiment, the same jackpot result (in the fourth normal game state) By configuring (demotion) from the 4th normal game state to the 3rd normal game state according to the 3R normal jackpot result B), the 3rd normal game state can be held in a short time and the number of balls does not increase too rapidly. It can function as a balancer. In other words, it suppresses excessively high gambling.

Further, in the present embodiment, in order to realize diversification of games by realizing two behaviors of promotion from the first normal game state and demotion from the fourth normal game state by using the same jackpot result. It prevents the configuration related to the game from becoming excessively complicated.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the first to third embodiments described above, in the second normal gaming state, the reduction of the number of balls held is alleviated due to the frequent occurrence of special hit results. In the present embodiment, in the second normal game state, the number of balls held increases due to the frequent occurrence of special hit results, and the difference in playability between the third normal game state and the fourth normal game state is further clarified. One of the features is that it is made to be unique. Hereinafter, the characteristic configuration of the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 44, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment. The technical idea shown in the present embodiment may be applied to any of the first to third embodiments.

In the present embodiment, the configuration of the distribution table for the second operating port is different from that of the first embodiment. Specifically, as the distribution table for the second operating port, the distribution table for the first normal game state, the distribution table for the second normal game state, the distribution table for the third normal game state, and the fourth normal game state. It is the same as the first embodiment in that it is provided with a distribution table for a game state, but the distribution mode in each distribution table is different. Hereinafter, the distribution table for the second operating port will be described. Since the distribution table for the first operating port has the same configuration as the distribution table for the first operating port shown in the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

Regarding the distribution table for the first normal game state, a total of 60 values of "0" to "59" among the values of the hit type counters C2 of "0" to "99" correspond to the 2R probability variation jackpot result A. A total of 40 pieces of "60" to "99" correspond to the 2R normal jackpot result C. Regarding the distribution table for the second normal game state, a total of 60 values of "0" to "59" among the values of the hit type counters C2 of "0" to "99" correspond to the 2R probability variation jackpot result A. A total of two "60" to "61" correspond to the 2R normal jackpot result B, and a total of 38 "62" to "99" correspond to the 2R normal jackpot result C. Regarding the distribution table for the third normal game state, a total of 60 values of "0" to "59" among the values of the hit type counters C2 of "0" to "99" correspond to the 2R probability variation jackpot result A. A total of 40 pieces of "60" to "99" correspond to the 2R normal jackpot result A. Regarding the distribution table for the 4th normal game state, a total of 60 values of "0" to "59" among the values of the hit type counters C2 of "0" to "99" correspond to the 2R probability variation jackpot result B. A total of 40 pieces of "60" to "99" correspond to the 2R normal jackpot result B. That is, in the present embodiment, the probability of probability change in the lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 63a is 60%.

As described in the first embodiment, the 2R probability variation jackpot result A is a jackpot result of shifting to the second normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode after the end of the first special gaming state. The 2R probability variation jackpot result B is a jackpot result of shifting to the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode after the end of the first special gaming state. The 2R normal jackpot result A is a jackpot result that shifts to the first normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode after the end of the first special gaming state, and the 2R normal jackpot result B is the first special game. This is a jackpot result of shifting to the second normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode after the state ends.

During the second normal gaming state, as in the first embodiment, the transition to the third normal gaming state provides a chance to shift to the fourth normal gaming state. After the transition to the second normal gaming state, the 2R normal jackpot result B is aimed at while avoiding the operation of the limiter and the 2R normal jackpot result A.

Here, in the present embodiment, in the second special gaming state corresponding to the special hit result, the opening time for opening the lower variable winning device 65 is changed (expanded) from "0.8 sec" to "2 sec". Has been done. As a result, the number of winnings to the lower variable winning device 65 is larger than that of the first embodiment, and the number of winnings in one opening is substantially "2". By increasing the number of prize balls based on the winning of the lower variable winning device 65 in this way, the above-mentioned base becomes 1 or more, and in the second normal game state, the number of balls held increases as the game progresses. It has become. That is, in the third normal game state and the fourth normal game state, the number of balls held is slightly reduced, whereas in the second normal game state, the number of balls held is slightly increased. In raising the base of the second normal gaming state to 1 or more, it is possible to increase the probability of a special winning result in the lottery related to the second operating port. For example, in the second normal game state, a special hit result may be obtained in almost all game times.

Incidentally, in the first embodiment, the trigger for the transition from the second normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state is mainly the operation of the limiter at the time of continuous probability variation jackpot. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is added that the 2R normal jackpot result A based on the winning of the second operating port 63a is the main trigger for the transition to the first normal gaming state. In this way, by increasing the chances of transition from the second normal game state to the first normal game state, the number of games executed in the second normal game state is substantially reduced. This is a device for maintaining the relationship of the advantage of the normal game state for the player (first normal game state <second normal game state <third normal game state <fourth normal game state).

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the first embodiment, when the 2R normal jackpot result A is obtained during the second normal game state, the mode is shifted to the third normal game state and the upper limit (specified number) of the number of continuations of the high frequency support mode is set. 100 times is set, and if the limiter is activated during the 4th normal game state, the limiter is set to the 3rd normal game state and 100 times is set as the upper limit (specified number) of the number of continuations of the high frequency support mode. did. That is, the advantage of the player is the same when the second normal game state is changed to the third normal game state and when the fourth normal game state is changed to the third normal game state. In the present embodiment, there is a difference in the player's advantage between the case where the second normal game state is changed to the third normal game state and the case where the fourth normal game state is changed to the third normal game state. That is one of the features.

Specifically, if the 2R normal jackpot result A is obtained during the second normal game state, the state is shifted to the third normal game state and 100 times is set as the upper limit (specified number) of the number of continuations of the high frequency support mode. However, if the limiter is activated during the 4th normal game state, the limiter is shifted to the 3rd normal game state, and 80 times is set as the upper limit (specified number) of the number of times the high frequency support mode is continued. The difference is provided so that the transition from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the transition from the gaming state to the third normal gaming state.

With such a configuration, when shifting from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state (promotion), the probability of shifting to the fourth normal gaming state (promotion) is 87%, and from the fourth normal gaming state. When the player shifts to the third normal game state (demotion), the probability of shifting to the fourth normal game state (return) is 80%.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the fifth embodiment, the number of time reductions when shifting from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state (promotion) and when shifting from the fourth normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state (demotion). By providing a difference from the number of time reductions in the above, the probability of transitioning to the fourth normal gaming state is different depending on the gaming state that is the source of the transition. In the present embodiment, the number of time reductions when shifting from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state (promotion) and the time reduction when shifting from the fourth normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state (demotion) While the number of times is the same, the variable display time table that is referred to when transitioning (promoting) from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state and the transition from the fourth normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state ( In the fluctuation display time table referred to in the case of demotion), the difference between the fluctuation display time related to the first actuating ball entry unit 62 and the fluctuation display time related to the second actuating ball entry unit 63 is made different from the migration source. The configuration is such that the probability of transitioning to the fourth normal gaming state differs depending on the normal gaming state. Hereinafter, a specific configuration for causing a difference in the transition probability from the third normal gaming state to the fourth normal gaming state will be described focusing on the differences between the fifth embodiment and the first embodiment. ..

In the present embodiment, when a big hit result is obtained in the lottery based on the entry into the first operating ball entry portion 62 (first operating port 62a), all of them are the 3R probability variation big hit result B. The configuration is consistent with that of the first embodiment. That is, when a big hit result is obtained by entering the ball into the first actuating entry unit 62, the transition to the fourth normal gaming state is confirmed.

On the other hand, if a big hit result is obtained by a lottery based on the entry into the second operating ball entry unit 63 (second operating port 63a), there is an 80% probability that the 2R probability variation big hit result B will be obtained and 20%. With the probability of 2R, the normal jackpot result is A. If the 2R probability variation jackpot result B is obtained during the 3rd normal game state, the process shifts to the 4th normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode after the end of the 1st special game state, and the 3rd normal game state is in progress. When the 2R normal jackpot result A is obtained, the game shifts to the first normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode after the end of the first special game state.

As described in detail above, comparing the lottery based on the entry into the first actuating ball 62 and the lottery based on the entry into the second actuating ball 63, the probability of transition to the fourth normal gaming state is obtained. There is a difference, and in aiming for the fourth normal gaming state, the lottery based on the entry into the first actuating ball 62 is more suitable for the player than the lottery based on the entry into the second actuating ball 63. It is advantageous.

Here, in the third normal game state, the first actuating ball entry portion 62 regardless of whether the state shifts to the third normal game state via any of the second normal game state and the fourth normal game state. The fluctuation display time according to the above is shorter than the fluctuation display time related to the second actuating entry unit 63. As a result, in the third normal game state, as shown in the first embodiment, the game proceeds mainly with the game times related to the first actuating ball entry unit 62. However, in the present embodiment, the variable display time table referred to in the third normal game state when shifting from the second normal game state to the third normal game state, and the third normal game state to the third normal game state. In the variation display time table referred to in the third normal gaming state when the game state is entered, the variation display time related to the first actuating ball entry unit 62 and the variation display time related to the second actuating ball entry unit 63. The difference between the above and the above is greatly different.

The variation display time table referred to when the third normal game state is changed to the third normal game state triggered by the 3R probability variation jackpot result B from the fourth normal game state is for the third normal game state shown in the first embodiment. It is the same as the fluctuation display time table of (see FIGS. 33 to 35). Specifically, the game times related to the first operating port 62a are basically short fluctuations (variation display time = 0.5 to 40 sec), and the game times related to the second operating port 63a are long fluctuations (variable display). Time = 600 sec). In this way, the variable display time table referred to when the fourth normal game state → the third normal game state is changed is the first actuated ball entry unit during one game rotation related to the second actuate ball entry unit 63. It is stipulated that the game times related to 62 can be executed 100 times or more, and the structure is less affected by the lottery result related to the second actuating ball entry unit 63.

On the other hand, the variation display time table referred to when the second normal game state → the third normal game state is changed is basically a short variation (variation display time) for the game times related to the first operation port 62a. = 0.5 to 40 sec), and the game times related to the second operating port 63a have a medium fluctuation (variation display time = 60 sec), and the first operation is entered during one game rotation related to the second operating ball entry unit 63. It is stipulated that the game times related to the ball portion 62 can be executed about 10 times. As a result, approximately 1/10 of the game times executed during the third normal game state becomes the game times related to the second actuating ball entry unit 63. That is, when the third normal game state is completed, the game times related to the second actuating ball entry unit 63 are executed about 10 times. By increasing the number of times the game is executed related to the second actuating ball entry unit 63, which is the actuating ball entry section on the disadvantage side, the fourth normal game state is compared with the case where the third normal game state is changed. The probability of transition to the game state is reduced.

<7th embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration related to the setting of the variable display time in the third normal gaming state is different from that in the sixth embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration related to the setting of the variable display time in the present embodiment will be described with a focus on the differences from the seventh embodiment.

As described above, the third normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode may be shifted from the second normal gaming state or the fourth normal gaming state. When the transition from the second normal game state to the third normal game state is performed, the reference variable display time table becomes the same as the variable display time table referred to in the second normal game state (FIGS. 33 to 35). reference). That is, the game times related to the first operating port 62a basically have a long fluctuation (variation display time = 600 sec), and the game times related to the second operating port 63a have a short fluctuation (variable display time = 0.5 to 40 sec). ). Therefore, although the winning of the first operating port 62a frequently occurs due to the benefit of the high frequency support mode, the game actually progresses mainly in the game times related to the second operating port 63a. The third normal game state corresponds to the high frequency support mode, and the base is higher than that of the second normal game state. That is, in addition to the increase in the base due to the special hit result, the increase in the base due to the high frequency support mode is added, so that the base becomes higher than in the second normal gaming state.

In the sixth embodiment, the increase in the base due to the special hit result and the increase in the base due to the high frequency support mode are included in the sixth embodiment so that the base in the third normal gaming state does not become excessively large. The base in the third normal game state is about 90/100.

The variable display time table referred to when the fourth normal gaming state is changed to the third normal gaming state is the same as that of the first embodiment. That is, the game times related to the first operating port 62a are basically short fluctuations (variation display time = 0.5 to 40 sec), and the game times related to the second operating port 63a are long fluctuations (variable display time = 600 sec). ). Therefore, due to the benefit of the high-frequency support mode, the first operating port 62a is frequently won, and the game progresses centering on the game times related to the first operating port 62a. Although the fourth normal game state corresponds to the high frequency support mode, the frequency of special hit results is reduced based on the winning of the second operating port 63a. Therefore, the base is lowered by the amount of the base due to the special hit result as compared with the third normal game state. However, with respect to the first operating port 62a, the ratio of the probability variation jackpot result is 100%, which is more advantageous than the second operating port 63a. That is, in the third normal game state that has shifted from the fourth normal game state, the first operating port 62a is frequently won by the high frequency support mode, and the addition of the base by the prize ball can be expected and is an advantageous side. As the game progresses centering on the game times related to the 1 operating port 62a, the lottery result is likely to be advantageous to the player.

In this way, the third normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode has a configuration in which the benefits differ depending on whether the state is changed from the second normal game state or the fourth normal game state. Diversification can be preferably realized.

<Eighth Embodiment>
In each of the above embodiments, the round game is automatically started when the opening waiting time (predetermined waiting time) elapses after the game shifts to the special game state as a big hit result. It is also possible to change this so that when the game shifts to the special game state, the round game is started when the game ball passes through the through gate 66 after the opening waiting time has elapsed. With such a configuration, it is possible that a prize will not be generated due to an operation error of the player, etc., even though the prize should be generated in the advantageous ball portion 314. It can be suitably suppressed.

In particular, the through gate 66 is arranged on the upstream side in the right route from the upper variable winning device 64 having the advantageous ball entry portion 314. Therefore, before the game ball that has passed through the through gate 66 reaches the upper variable winning device 64, the upper variable winning device 64 is opened and the advantageous ball winning portion 314 can be won. The occurrence of inconvenience can be suppressed more preferably.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, in the special gaming state corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result (except when the limiter is activated), the upper variable winning device 64 is driven and controlled so that the advantageous winning portion 314 is won. By doing so, the transition to the high-probability mode is substantially confirmed. Here, if a probabilistic jackpot result is obtained in the second normal game state, the launch of the game ball is intentionally stopped even though the winning of the advantageous entry section 314 should occur. There is a possibility that winning a prize in the advantageous ball-entry section 314 may be avoided. In each of the above embodiments, the third normal game is configured so that the probabilistic jackpot result corresponding to the high frequency support mode is not obtained during the second normal game state, so that even if the winning of the advantageous ball portion 314 is intentionally avoided, the third normal game is performed. Although the configuration is not promoted to the gaming state, according to the configuration shown in the present embodiment, the above-mentioned inconvenience may occur even as a configuration that can result in a probable change jackpot corresponding to the high frequency support mode during the second normal gaming state. It can be preferably avoided. This makes it possible to increase the variation of the jackpot result in the second normal game state and contribute to the diversification of the game. If a direct route from the second normal game state to the fourth normal game state can be provided, the superiority of the second normal game state over the first normal game state can be further enhanced.

<Other embodiments>
The content is not limited to the description of each of the above-described embodiments, and may be implemented as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above-described embodiments, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied to each of the above-described embodiments. Further, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or a part of the various configurations shown in each of the above embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effect to be exerted) of each configuration to be combined is guaranteed. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration consisting of a combination of embodiments, or may be partially or wholly applied in combination.

(1) In each of the above embodiments, the configuration is such that the second normal gaming state corresponding to the high-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode is followed by the third normal gaming state corresponding to the low-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode. Here, in the second normal game state, the game progresses mainly with the game times related to the second operating port 63a, and when the game shifts to the third normal gaming state, the pending information related to the second operating port 63a remains. Can be done. Further, in order to advance the game advantageously in the third normal game state, it is necessary to launch the game ball to the right route, and during the third normal game state, winning a prize in the second operating port 63a → acquisition of hold information may be possible. .. A 2R normal jackpot result A is provided as a distribution when a jackpot result is obtained in a lottery based on a prize in the second operating port 63a, but when a 2R normal jackpot result A is obtained, a low probability mode and a low frequency are provided. It will shift to the first normal gaming state corresponding to the support mode. In the third normal game state, the game times related to the second operating port 63a are long fluctuations (600 sec), and although the chance of becoming the 2R normal jackpot result A is reduced, the 2R normal jackpot result A can be obtained. Gender does not become zero. Despite the transition to the 3rd normal gaming state (special loop gaming state), the 2R normal jackpot result A and the transition (demotion) to the 1st normal gaming state is a factor that reduces the player's motivation to play. Can be. In consideration of such circumstances, if a jackpot result is obtained in the game round related to the second operating port 63a during the third normal gaming state, there is a 98% probability that the 2R probability variation jackpot result B will be obtained and the 2R probability variation jackpot. If the result is B, the game shifts to the 4th normal game state (promotion) through the 1st special game state, and there is a 2% probability that the 2R normal jackpot result B will be obtained and the 2R normal jackpot result B will be obtained. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the player shifts (returns) to the third normal game state through the first special game state. However, even if such a change is made, the distribution destination when a big hit result is obtained in the lottery related to the second operating port 63a in the first normal game state is not the 2R normal big hit result B but the 2R normal. It is preferable that the jackpot result is A.

(2) In the case where the probability variation jackpot result corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode can be won based on the ball entering the second operating port 63a during the second normal game state, and the probability variation jackpot result is obtained. It is also possible to have a configuration (a configuration in which a direct route is provided) that shifts to the fourth normal gaming state without going through the third normal gaming state.

(3) In each of the above embodiments, when it is a part of the jackpot result (3R probability variation jackpot result B) in the first normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, the second normal gaming state or the second 3 The configuration is such that the player shifts to the fourth normal game state without going through the normal game state, but in the first normal game state, no matter which jackpot result is obtained, the game does not shift to the fourth normal game state. It is also possible to.

(4) In each of the above embodiments, the number of consecutive probabilistic jackpot results (upper limit) in which the limiter operates in the second normal gaming state and the number of consecutive probabilistic jackpot results (upper limit) in which the limiter operates in the fourth normal gaming state (upper limit). Although it is specified that the number of times is 10 in each case, the number of consecutive probabilistic jackpot results in which the limiter operates in the second normal game state and the number of consecutive probabilistic jackpot results in which the limiter operates in the fourth normal game state are defined. It is possible to make a difference.

For example, it is possible to make the number of consecutive probabilistic jackpot results in which the limiter operates in the second normal gaming state greater than the number of consecutive probabilistic jackpot results in which the limiter operates in the fourth normal gaming state. It is also possible to make the number of consecutive probabilistic jackpot results in which the limiter operates in the second normal game state less than the number of consecutive probabilistic jackpot results in which the limiter operates in the fourth normal game state.

(5) In each of the above embodiments, the base (number of prize balls / number of shots) in the second normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode is the first normal corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode. Of the base in the game state and the base in the third normal game state and the fourth normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode, the configuration is close to the latter, but it is also possible to have a configuration close to the former.

(6) In the fifth embodiment, the advantage of the player is the case where the second normal game state is changed to the third normal game state and the case where the fourth normal game state is changed to the third normal game state. The configuration is such that there is a difference in. Specifically, if the 2R normal jackpot result A is obtained during the second normal game state, the game shifts to the third normal game state and the upper limit (specified number) of the number of continuations of the high frequency support mode is set to 100 times. However, if the limiter is activated during the 4th normal gaming state, the limiter is shifted to the 3rd normal gaming state, and 80 times is set as the upper limit (specified number) of the number of continuations of the high frequency support mode. When shifting from the 2nd normal gaming state to the 3rd normal gaming state (promotion), the probability of shifting to the 4th normal gaming state (promotion) is 87%, and the transition from the 4th normal gaming state to the 3rd normal gaming state (demotion). ), The difference is provided so that the probability of shifting (returning) to the fourth normal gaming state is 80%. This may be changed as follows. That is, when the 2R normal jackpot result A is obtained during the second normal game state, the player shifts to the third normal game state and sets 80 times as the upper limit (specified number) of the number of continuations of the high frequency support mode. 4 When the limiter is activated during the normal game state, the limiter is shifted to the third normal game state, and 100 times is set as the upper limit (specified number) of the number of continuations of the high frequency support mode, so that the second normal game state is set. When shifting from the gaming state to the 3rd normal gaming state (promotion), the probability of shifting to the 4th normal gaming state (promotion) is 80%, and when shifting from the 4th normal gaming state to the 3rd normal gaming state (demotion). A difference may be provided so that the probability of shifting (returning) to the fourth normal gaming state is 87%.

(6) In the sixth embodiment, the advantage of the player is the case where the second normal game state is changed to the third normal game state and the case where the fourth normal game state is changed to the third normal game state. The configuration is such that there is a difference in. Specifically, when the 2R normal jackpot result A is obtained during the second normal game state and when the limiter is activated during the fourth normal game state, the variable display time referred to during the third normal game state is displayed. The table is a variable display time table in which the game rounds are centered on the first operating port 62a, while the variable display is referred to when the second normal game state is changed to the third normal game state. In the time table, the fluctuation display time related to the second operating port 63a, which is on the disadvantage side of the fluctuation display time table referred to when shifting from the fourth normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state, becomes shorter, and the third It is configured so that the number of times the game times related to the second operating port 63a are executed is increased during the normal game state. This may be changed as follows. That is, in the variable display time table referred to when the second normal game state is changed to the third normal game state, the variable display time table is referred to when the fourth normal game state is changed to the third normal game state. The variation display time related to the second operating port 63a, which is on the disadvantage side, becomes longer, and the number of times the game times related to the second operating port 63a are executed during the third normal gaming state is reduced. May be good.

(7) In each of the above embodiments, the probability that the number of consecutive probabilistic jackpot results reaches the upper limit and the limiter operates in the fourth normal game state, and the number of consecutive probabilistic jackpot results in the second normal game state reaches the upper limit. The difference is set so that it is higher than the probability that the limiter is activated, but the difference is not limited to this. The probability that the number of consecutive probability variation jackpot results will reach the upper limit and the limiter will operate in the second normal game state will be higher than the probability that the number of consecutive probability variation jackpot results will reach the upper limit and the limiter will operate in the fourth normal game state. The difference may be provided as follows.

(8) In the first embodiment or the like, the variable display time is limited to one candidate (600 sec) for the game times related to the second operating port 63a executed during the first normal game state. It is not limited to. For example, it is possible to set the variable display time to be one of a plurality of candidates (600 sec to 700 sec) for the game times related to the second operating port 63a executed during the first normal game state. Similarly, with respect to the game times related to the first operating port 62a executed during the second normal game state, the variable display time is limited to one candidate (600 sec), but the game is not limited to this. For example, it is possible to set the variable display time to be one of a plurality of candidates (600 sec to 700 sec) for the game times related to the second operating port 63a executed during the first normal game state. Further, regarding the game times related to the second operating port 63a executed during the third normal game state and the fourth normal game state, the variable display time is limited to one candidate (600 sec), but the game is limited to this. is not it. For example, it is possible to set the variable display time to be one of a plurality of candidates (600 sec to 700 sec) for the game times related to the second operating port 63a executed during the first normal game state.

(9) In the first embodiment or the like, the variation display time of the game times related to the first operating port 62a in the second normal gaming state is set to 600 sec, but one game time related to the first operating port 62a is set. It is sufficient if the length is such that the probability variation jackpot result can continuously reach the upper limit in the game rounds related to the second operating port 63a, and may be shorter or longer than 600 sec. However, in order to shift from the second normal gaming state to another normal gaming state during one game round related to the first operating port 62a, the longest of the completely disengaged and special hit-corresponding game rounds related to the second operating port 63a. It is preferable to set it to be longer than the product of the reciprocal of the fluctuation display time (5 sec) and the jackpot probability (1/10) and the upper limit of the number of consecutive times (remaining 9 times).

Similarly, in the first embodiment and the like, the variation display time of the game times related to the second operating port 63a in the third normal gaming state is set to 600 sec, but the one game time related to the second operating port 63a is set to 600 sec. It is sufficient as long as the number of times the game is executed related to the first operating port 62a can reach the upper limit (100 times), and it may be shorter or longer than 600 sec. However, in order to shift from the third normal gaming state to another normal gaming state during one game rotation related to the second operating port 63a, the maximum variation display time corresponding to the complete deviation of the game rotation related to the first operating port 62a. It is preferable to set it to be longer than the product of (5 sec) and the number of time reductions (100 times).

Further, in the first embodiment and the like, the variation display time of the game times related to the second operating port 63a in the fourth normal gaming state is set to 600 sec, but during the one game rotation related to the second operating port 63a. The length is sufficient as long as the probability variation jackpot result can continuously reach the upper limit in the game rounds related to the first operating port 62a, and may be shorter or longer than 600 sec. However, in order to shift from the third normal gaming state to another normal gaming state during one game round related to the second operating port 63a, the maximum variation display time of the game round corresponding to complete disconnection related to the first operating port 62a. It is preferable to set it to be longer than the product of (5 sec), the reciprocal of the jackpot probability (1/10), and the upper limit of the number of consecutive times (remaining 10 times).

(10) In each of the above embodiments, the lower variable winning device 65 corresponding to the low frequency winning mode and the upper variable winning device 64 corresponding to the high frequency winning mode are individually provided, but the present invention is not limited thereto. .. It is also possible to integrate the upper variable winning device 64 and the lower variable winning device 65 into one variable winning device.

(11) In each of the above embodiments, the game ball that has passed through the outer route does not reach the lower variable winning device 65, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to configure all or part of the game balls that have passed through the outer route to reach the lower variable winning device 65. In other words, it is also possible to give a winning opportunity to the lower variable winning device 65 even for the game ball that has passed through the outer route.

(12) In each of the above embodiments, a difference is provided so that the number of prize balls based on one prize in the lower variable winning device 65 is smaller than the number of prize balls based on one prize in the upper variable winning device 64. However, it is not limited to this. The difference may be provided so that the number of prize balls based on one prize in the lower variable winning device 65 is larger than the number of prize balls based on one prize in the upper variable winning device 64, or the lower variable winning device 65 may be provided. The number of prize balls based on one prize in the upper variable winning device 64 may be the same as the number of prize balls based on one prize in the upper variable winning device 64.

(13) In each of the above embodiments, the result of the lottery based on the winning of the through gate 66 is displayed on the through gate display unit DS of the main display unit 81, but the present invention is limited to this. is not it. It is also possible to display the result of the lottery based on the winning of the through gate 66 on another display unit such as the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75.

(14) In each of the above embodiments, the upper variable winning device 64 and the through gate 66 are arranged on the right route upstream of the right-handed ball entry portion 62R, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to dispose the upper variable winning device 64 and the through gate 66 on the right route on the downstream side of the right-handed ball entry portion 62R.

(15) In each of the above embodiments, the game times related to the first operating port 62a and the game times related to the second operating port 63a are configured to be able to be executed while one is being executed. However, it is not limited to this. It is also possible to configure the game times related to the first operating port 62a and the game times related to the second operating port 63a so that the other cannot be executed while one is being executed. In such a configuration, the game times related to the first operating port 62a may be executed with priority over the game times related to the second operating port 63a, or the game times related to the second operating port 63a may be executed first. It may be configured to be executed with priority over the game times related to one operating port 62a. It is also possible to execute each game in the order of winning.

(16) In each of the above embodiments, the fixed display time of the pattern on the first operating port display unit D1 and the second operating port display unit D2 is not changed in any of the normal gaming states. The fixed display time of the first operating port display unit D1 and the second operating port display unit D2 may be changed according to the type of the normal gaming state. For example, the confirmation display time may be shortened in the order of the first normal game state → the second normal game state → the third normal game state.

(17) In each of the above embodiments, the lower variable winning device 65 is opened in the second special gaming state, and the right side operation is entered on the flow path (right route) toward the lower variable winning device 65. The ball portion 62R is arranged, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is also possible to dispose a configuration corresponding to the lower variable winning device 65 on the flow path toward the right-side actuating ball entry portion 62R.

(18) In each of the above embodiments, the type of jackpot result in the second normal gaming state does not include the jackpot result corresponding to the transition to the fourth normal gaming state, but the second normal gaming state A 2R probability variation jackpot result B is set as a part of the jackpot result in the lottery related to the second operating port 63a, and when the 2R probability variation jackpot result B is obtained, the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state are changed. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the player shifts to the fourth normal gaming state without going through the game. In such a configuration, when a 2R probability variation jackpot result occurs during the second normal game state and a prize is generated in the advantageous ball portion 314 of the upper variable winning device 64, the player shifts to the fourth normal game state, which is advantageous. If no prize is awarded to the ball entry portion 314, the third normal gaming state may be entered. Further, if the advantageous winning portion 314 is not won, it is possible to shift to the first normal gaming state.

(19) In each of the above embodiments, the ridges 335a and 336a are provided as deceleration means for decelerating the game ball rolling on the shutter 331 of the right-side actuating entry portion 62R, but the protrusions 335a and 336a pass over the shutter 331. The specific configuration for earning the time required for the above is arbitrary. For example, the upper limit of the shutter 331 may be provided with irregularities so that the flow path meanders up and down.

Further, the ridges 335a and 336a were arranged biased to the downstream part (intermediate passage 323 side) in the upstream passage 322, but the ridges 335a and 336a were arranged in the upstream part and the middle flow part in the upstream passage 322. It is also possible to place it in.

(20) In each of the above embodiments, the right-side actuating ball entry unit 62R and the lower variable winning device 65 are arranged so as to be vertically offset, and the ball passage in the ball entry unit 70 is cranked up and down. It is also possible to arrange the right-side actuating ball entry portion 62R and the lower variable winning device 65 side by side in a row.

(21) The right-side actuating ball entry portion 62R shown in each of the above embodiments is configured to switch between the open state and the closed state by sliding the shutter 331 in the front-rear direction, but the present invention is not limited to this. .. For example, the shutter may be switched between the open state and the closed state by sliding in the left-right direction or the up-down direction. The shutter 331 does not necessarily have to be a slide type, and a rotary type can be used.

Similarly, the shutter 345 of the lower variable winning device 65 slides in the front-rear direction to switch between the open state and the closed state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the shutter may be switched between the open state and the closed state by sliding in the left-right direction or the up-down direction. The shutter 345 does not necessarily have to be a slide type, but can be a rotary type.

Further, the upper variable winning device 64 shown in the above embodiment has a configuration in which the shutter 315 is rotated in parallel with the front surface of the game board 60 to switch between the open state and the closed state, but the present invention is limited to this. is not it. For example, the shutter may be switched between the open state and the closed state by rotating in the direction intersecting the front surface of the game board. The shutter 315 does not necessarily have to be a rotary type, and a slide type can be used.

(22) In each of the above embodiments, the transition to the high probability mode is determined by entering the advantageous ball entry unit 314 provided in the upper variable winning device 64, but the advantageous ball entry unit 314 is used. It is also possible to omit it and configure it so that the transition to the high probability mode is confirmed when the probability variation jackpot result is obtained.

(23) In each of the above embodiments, the lottery based on the entry into the lower operating port 62aL does not result in a special winning result, but this has been changed to the lottery based on the entry into the lower operating opening 62aL. However, it may be configured as a special hit result.

(24) In each of the above embodiments, a variation display of a pattern on the operation port display units D1 and D2 and a symbol on the symbol display device 75 are displayed based on the winning / failing lottery (determination process) performed in the main control device 162. The configuration is such that the variable display is started, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to start the variation display of the symbol on the operation port display units D1 and D2 and the variation display of the symbol on the symbol display device 75 prior to the winning / fail lottery (determination process) in the main control device 162.

(25) In each of the above-described embodiments, the advantage is different depending on the game state when a normal jackpot result is obtained. For example, in the first embodiment, in the second normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode, when the probability variation jackpot result is obtained, the second normal game state is looped, whereas it is normal. When the game is entered, the player shifts to the third normal game state, which is the entrance to the fourth normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode. Here, when the normal jackpot result is obtained during the second normal game state, the display mode of the symbol displayed on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 is different from the case where the normal jackpot result is obtained during the other normal game state. It may be different. That is, as a configuration that suggests to the player that it is advantageous to have an even-numbered symbol combination as a configuration in which an effect or the like is added to an even-numbered symbol (for example, the outer peripheral portion of the even-numbered symbol) while an effect or the like is not added to the probabilistic symbol. May be good. In this case, by changing the display mode of the symbol by adding an effect or the like instead of changing the symbol combination itself, the types of symbols to be stored may increase or the processing load in the symbol determination process may increase. It can be suitably suppressed.

(26) In the above embodiment, the normal jackpot result is obtained during the second normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode, so that the third normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode is entered. Then, the probability variation jackpot result is obtained during the third normal game state, so that the system shifts to the fourth normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode. On the other hand, even if a normal jackpot result is obtained after a probability variation jackpot result is obtained during the second normal gaming state, the configuration does not shift to the fourth normal gaming state. That is, in order to aim for promotion from the second normal game state to the fourth normal game state, the order of the normal jackpot result → the probability variation jackpot result is required. Only when multiple types of jackpots (normal jackpots and probabilistic jackpots) are won in a predetermined order, the game state is shifted to the highest level (most advantageous to the player) to preferably suppress monotony of the game. it can. Here, for example, when the highest normal game state that is most advantageous to the player is set to the normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, the game is a game before the normal game state due to a probability variation jackpot. It shifts to the state (normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and high frequency support mode), and shifts to the highest normal game state by getting a normal jackpot result in the normal game state, low probability mode and low Even if the normal jackpot result → the probability variation jackpot result is obtained in the normal gaming state corresponding to the frequency support mode, it is possible to configure the configuration so as not to shift to the highest normal gaming state.

(27) In the first embodiment described above, the third mode corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode is supported based on the result of the normal jackpot in the second normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode. The configuration is such that the player shifts to the normal game state and shifts to the fourth normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode based on the probability variation jackpot result in the third normal game state. The 4th normal gaming state is set to be the most advantageous gaming state among the 1st normal gaming state to the 4th normal gaming state, and aims at the 4th normal gaming state from the 2nd normal gaming state. It is necessary to win in the order of normal jackpot result → probability variation jackpot result. The configuration for shifting to the most advantageous gaming state for the player by winning two jackpot results having different corresponding lottery modes in a predetermined order is not limited to the above configuration. For example, the normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode may be set to the normal game state that is most advantageous to the player, and may be shifted to the game state by the following procedure. That is, when the probability variation jackpot result is obtained in the normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, the game shifts to the normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode, and the normal jackpot result is obtained in this normal gaming state. It is also possible to shift to a normal gaming state corresponding to a low probability mode and a high frequency support mode. The specific configuration for ensuring the superiority of the normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode is arbitrary, but for example, the difference between the winning probability in the high probability mode and the winning probability in the low probability mode. By increasing the difference between the base in the low-frequency support mode and the base in the high-frequency support mode (by giving preferential treatment to the high-frequency support mode), the low-probability mode and low It is preferable to configure the configuration to ensure the superiority of the normal gaming state corresponding to the frequency support mode.

(28) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, for example, pachinko machines in which the electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of the special device, or a game in a specific area of the special device. The present invention can also be applied to pachinko machines that generate a right when a ball enters and become a big hit, pachinko machines equipped with other accessories, arrange ball machines, and game machines such as sparrow balls.

In addition, a non-ballistic gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction is provided, the reels are started to rotate by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. After the reels have stopped after a predetermined time has passed, if a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line that can be seen from the display window, a privilege such as a medal payout is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

Further, a pachinko machine and a slot machine equipped with a take-in device, in which a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are taken in by the take-in device and then the start lever is operated to start the rotation of the reel. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which and is fused.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the characteristic configurations extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiment are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic A group>
The following feature A group is described in that "a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board in which a game area is formed and a game ball launching means for launching a game ball into the game area based on a launch operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry portion provided in a game area, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out and other benefits are given to the player. Regarding the background technology of "(for example, see Patent Document 1)", there is an invention that "in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the degree of attention to the game." It was made with the problem to be solved.

Features A1. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launch mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on the operation of the player, and
With a payout means (pain device 222) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry unit (actuated ball entry units 62, 63 and variable winning devices 64, 65) provided in the game area. It is a game machine equipped with
Special information acquisition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry unit (actuated ball entry units 62, 63) as the ball entry unit. A function to execute the process of acquiring pending information) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means (for lottery in MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to the jackpot result). (Function to execute the processing of) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the result of the determination is As a result of the notification corresponding to the above, the end of the game round operation is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The game time control means (a function of executing the game time control process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that controls the predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the operation port), and
Based on the determination result by the determination means being the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means being completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). A special game state transition means (a function of executing the game state transition process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that shifts to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state).
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning devices 64, 65) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing the opening / closing process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the game shifts to the special gaming state.
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the receiving state. 71) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the special gaming state, the first special gaming state (special gaming state corresponding to the jackpot result) and the second special gaming state (special) in which the variable entry portion is in the receiving state for a shorter period than the first special gaming state. (Special game state corresponding to the winning result) is provided,
The first judgment information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and the second judgment information (random number group corresponding to the special hit result) are provided as the predetermined judgment information.
The special game state transition means
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the first determination result (big hit result) corresponding to the first determination information, the means for shifting to the first special gaming state and
It has a means for shifting to the second special gaming state when the determination result by the determination means becomes the second determination result (special hit result) corresponding to the second determination information.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state are longer than those of the first switching mode. There is a second switching mode (high frequency support mode).
As a determination mode (lottery mode) in which the determination is performed by the determination means, a low probability mode in which the probability of the first determination result corresponding to the first determination information is relatively low and the determination mode corresponding to the first determination information are supported. There is a high probability mode in which the probability of becoming the first judgment result is relatively high.
As the predetermined gaming state, the first gaming state (first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode and the low probability mode, and the first gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode and the high probability mode. A second gaming state (second normal gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player, and a third gaming state that corresponds to the second switching mode and the high probability mode and is more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state ( 4th normal game state) is provided,
The probability that the second determination result corresponding to the second determination information by the determination in the second gaming state corresponds to the second determination information by the determination in the first gaming state and the third gaming state. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to have a higher probability than the second determination result.

According to the feature A1, the third game state corresponds to the second switching mode, and the chance of entering the starting ball entry section increases. Therefore, by shifting to the third gaming state, it is possible to proceed with the game while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held, for example, as compared with the first gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode. Here, the second gaming state corresponds to the first switching mode as in the first gaming state, and it cannot be expected that the variable mechanism will increase the chances of entering the ball. However, in the second gaming state, the probability of becoming a second determination result (special hit result, so-called small hit) increases, and the chance that the game ball is paid out by entering the variable entry portion increases. With regard to such behavior, unlike the configuration in which the second switching mode is used to increase the chances of paying out the game ball, the increase in payout = the increase in the number of balls entering the starting ball entry section does not necessarily occur. This is preferable in order to realize diversification of games while suppressing the chance of entering the starting ball. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, the second game state in which a certain amount of ball can be expected due to the frequent occurrence of the second determination result is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, but is compared with the third game state. In that case, it is disadvantageous to the player. By providing a gaming state that is higher than the second gaming state in this way, in other words, by configuring the second gaming state not to be positioned at the highest level, such a special gaming state (second gaming state). It is possible to preferably eliminate the inconvenience that the above-mentioned effect is not exhibited well due to the strengthening of the restriction on the transition to. Therefore, according to the configuration shown in this feature, the degree of attention to the game can be suitably improved by diversifying the game.

Feature A2. As the predetermined gaming state, a fourth gaming state (third) corresponding to the second switching mode and the low probability mode, which is more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state and more disadvantageous to the player than the third gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature A1, characterized in that a normal gaming state) is provided.

According to the feature A2, the fourth gaming state (so-called time saving) corresponding to the second switching mode and the low probability mode is more advantageous than the second gaming state, and the player's advantage is the first gaming state <first. It is configured so that the two game states <fourth game state <third game state are higher in this order. As described above, lowering the rank of the second gaming state is advantageous in increasing the chances of transition to the second gaming state and exerting the effects shown in the feature A1 and the like.

Feature A3. The gaming machine according to feature A2, which comprises means for shifting to the fourth gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined transition condition in the second gaming state.

As shown in this feature, it depends on the configuration in which the second gaming state in which the second determination result frequently occurs functions as a kind of hurdle (for example, a chance zone) for shifting to the fourth gaming state (third gaming place song). For example, the behavior of the gaming machine can be significantly changed in the process of transitioning from the first gaming state to the second gaming state to the third / fourth gaming state, and the game is configured to increase the chances of transitioning to the second gaming state. The effect of suppressing monotonization can be suitably exhibited.

Feature A4. The starting ball entry section includes a first starting ball entry section (first actuating ball entry section 62) and a second start ball entry section (second actuating ball entry section 63).
As the predetermined notification means, a first notification means (display unit D1 for the first operation port) that performs a game rotation operation based on the ball entering the first start ball entry unit, and the second start ball entry unit. A second notification means (display unit D2 for the second operation port) that performs a game rotation operation based on the entry into the ball is provided.
The game rotation control means can execute the game rotation operation on one of the first notification means and the second notification means during the game rotation operation on the other.
The game rotation control means is an execution period determining means (in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that determines the execution period of the game rotation operation in the first notification means and the execution period of the game rotation operation in the second notification means. Has a function to determine the variable display time)
The first notification means has a determination mode (a function of specifying a variation display time table referred to in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 for each game state) for determining the execution period of the game rotation operation by the execution period determining means. The first determination mode (for example, the variable display time corresponding to the fourth normal game state) for determining the execution period so that the execution period of the game rotation operation is shorter than the execution period of the game rotation operation in the second notification means. The function of referring to the table) and the second determination to determine the execution period so that the execution period of the game rotation operation in the first notification means is longer than the execution period of the game rotation operation in the second notification means. A mode (for example, a function of referring to a variable display time table corresponding to the second normal game state) is provided.
In the determination based on the entry into the second starting ball entry portion, the second determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained rather than the determination based on the entry into the first start entry ball portion. It is set to have a high probability,
A means for switching the determination mode so that the determination mode becomes the first determination mode in the first gaming state and the third gaming state, and the determination mode becomes the second determination mode in the second gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of feature A1 to feature A3, which is provided with a function of switching a variable display time table referred to by MPU 602 of the main control device 162 according to a gaming state).

According to the configuration shown in this feature, in the second gaming state, the execution period of the game rotation operation based on the entry into the second starting ball entry section is the game rotation based on the entry into the first starting ball entry section. It is shorter than the execution period of the operation, and the game progresses mainly by the game rotation operation based on the ball entering the second starting ball entry section. As a result, the chances of obtaining the second judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information increase, and the chances of entering the variable ball entry section (second variable entry section) increase. On the other hand, in the first gaming state and the third gaming state, the execution period of the game rotation operation based on the entry into the first starting entry section is the game based on the entry into the second starting entry section. The second judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information by shortening the execution period of the turn-around motion and progressing the game mainly by the game turn-around motion based on the entry into the first start ball entry portion. The probability of becoming is low. As a result, the probability of transition to the second special game state is lowered, and the number of game balls to be paid out is reduced. Further, since the first game state corresponds to the first switching mode, the number of game balls to be paid out based on the entry into the starting ball entry portion is relatively small, and the third gaming state is the second switching mode. The number of game balls to be paid out based on the entry into the starting entry section is relatively large. In this way, by providing a difference in the execution period according to the game state and switching the main game rotation operation, the probability that the second determination result will be obtained in the second game state is increased, and in each predetermined game state. A configuration that generates a difference between the bases can be preferably realized.

In addition, for example, the following configuration may be applied to the configuration shown in this feature. That is, "as the first determination result, the high probability mode correspondence result corresponding to the transition to the high probability mode (probability variation jackpot result) and the low probability mode correspondence result corresponding to the transition to the low probability mode (normal jackpot result). Is provided, and the ratio of the high-probability mode correspondence result and the low-probability mode correspondence result to the high-probability mode correspondence result in the determination based on the entry into the second starting ball entry portion is , The determination based on the entry into the first starting ball entry portion is configured to be lower than the ratio of the high probability mode correspondence result and the low probability mode correspondence result to the high probability mode correspondence result. The "is" configuration may be applied.

Further, for example, the following configuration may be applied to the configuration shown in this feature. That is, "the variable ball-entry unit includes a first variable ball-entry unit (variable winning device 64) and a second variable ball-entry unit (variable winning device 65), and the special gaming state transition means is determined by the determination means. When the result is the first determination result (big hit result) corresponding to the first determination information, the means for shifting the first variable ball entry portion to the first special gaming state to be switched, and the determination. When the determination result by the means becomes the second determination result (special hit result) corresponding to the second determination information, the means for shifting to the second special gaming state in which the second variable ball entry portion is the switching target. The payout means is such that the number of game balls to be paid out based on the entry into the first start entry section is the number of game balls to be paid out based on the entry into the second variable entry section. A configuration that is "configured to be less than the number of" may be applied.

Feature A5. The transition condition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state is configured to be easier to be established than the transition condition from the first gaming state to the third gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of feature A1 to feature A4.

As shown in feature A5, if the transition condition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state is easier to establish than the transition condition from the first gaming state to the third gaming state, there is an opportunity to transition to the second gaming state. Can be increased to favorably exert the effects shown in the feature A1 and the like.

Feature A6. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launch mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (pain device 222) for paying out the game ball based on the ball entering the ball entry units (actuated ball entry units 62, 63 and variable winning devices 64, 65) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry unit (actuated ball entry units 62, 63) as the ball entry unit. A function to execute the process of acquiring pending information) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means (for lottery in MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to the jackpot result). (Function to execute the processing of) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the result of the determination is As a result of the notification corresponding to the above, the end of the game round operation is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The game time control means (a function of executing the game time control process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that controls the predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the operation port), and
Based on the determination result by the determination means being the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means being completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). A special game state transition means (a function of executing the game state transition process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that shifts to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state).
As the ball entry unit that can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning devices 64, 65) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing the opening / closing process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the game shifts to the special gaming state.
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the receiving state. 71) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the special gaming state, the first special gaming state (special gaming state corresponding to the jackpot result) and the second special gaming state (special) in which the variable entry portion is in the receiving state for a shorter period than the first special gaming state. (Special game state corresponding to the winning result) is provided,
The first judgment information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and the second judgment information (random number group corresponding to the special hit result) are provided as the predetermined judgment information.
The special game state transition means
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the first determination result (big hit result) corresponding to the first determination information, the means for shifting to the first special gaming state and
It has a means for shifting to the second special gaming state when the determination result by the determination means becomes the second determination result (special hit result) corresponding to the second determination information.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state are longer than those of the first switching mode. There is a second switching mode (high frequency support mode).
As a determination mode (lottery mode) in which the determination is performed by the determination means, a low probability mode in which the probability of the first determination result corresponding to the first determination information is relatively low and the determination mode corresponding to the second determination information are supported. There is a high probability mode in which the probability of the second judgment result is relatively high.
As the predetermined gaming state, the first gaming state (first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode and the low probability mode, and the first gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode and the high probability mode. A second gaming state (second normal gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player, and a third gaming state that corresponds to the second switching mode and the high probability mode and is more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state ( 4th normal game state) is provided,
In the second gaming state, the probability of the second determination result corresponding to the second determination information is higher than that in the first gaming state and the third gaming state, while the said. The ratio of the number of game balls paid out by the payout means to the number of game balls fired by the game ball launching means is the ratio of the number of game balls fired by the game ball launching means in the third game state. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be lower than the ratio of the number of gaming balls paid out by the payout means.

According to the feature A6, the third game state corresponds to the second switching mode, and the chance of entering the starting ball entry section increases. Therefore, by shifting to the third game state, for example, the ratio of the number of game balls paid out by the payout means to the number of game balls fired is higher than that of the first game state corresponding to the first switching mode. That is, the value obtained by dividing the number of payouts of the game balls by the number of shots of the game balls (hereinafter referred to as the base) becomes high, and it becomes possible to proceed with the game while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held. Here, the second gaming state corresponds to the first switching mode as in the first gaming state, and it cannot be expected that the variable mechanism will increase the chances of entering the ball. However, in the second gaming state, the probability of becoming a second determination result (special hit result, so-called small hit) increases, and the chance that the game ball is paid out by entering the variable entry portion increases. With regard to such behavior, unlike the configuration in which the second switching mode is used to increase the chances of paying out the game ball, the increase in payout = the increase in the number of balls entering the starting ball entry section does not necessarily occur. This is preferable in order to realize diversification of games while suppressing the chance of entering the starting ball. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, the second gaming state in which a certain amount of ball can be expected due to the frequent occurrence of the second determination result has a higher base than the first gaming state (advantageous to the player), while the first 3 The base is lower when compared to the game state (disadvantageous to the player). By providing a gaming state in which the base is higher than that of the second gaming state in this way, in other words, by configuring the second gaming state not to be the highest level, such a special gaming state (second gaming state) can be obtained. It is possible to preferably eliminate the inconvenience that the above-mentioned effect is not exhibited well due to the strengthening of the restriction on the transition of the above. Therefore, according to the configuration shown in this feature, the degree of attention to the game can be suitably improved by diversifying the game.

Feature A7. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launch mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (pain device 222) for paying out the game ball based on the ball entering the ball entry units (actuated ball entry units 62, 63 and variable winning devices 64, 65) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry unit (actuated ball entry units 62, 63) as the ball entry unit. A function to execute the process of acquiring pending information) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means (for lottery in MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to the jackpot result). (Function to execute the processing of) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the result of the determination is As a result of the notification corresponding to the above, the end of the game round operation is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The game time control means (a function of executing the game time control process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that controls the predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the operation port), and
Based on the determination result by the determination means being the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means being completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). A special game state transition means (a function of executing the game state transition process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that shifts to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state).
As the ball entry unit that can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning devices 64, 65) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing the opening / closing process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the game shifts to the special gaming state.
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the receiving state. 71) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the special gaming state, the first special gaming state (special gaming state corresponding to the jackpot result) and the second special gaming state (special) in which the variable entry portion is in the receiving state for a shorter period than the first special gaming state. (Special game state corresponding to the winning result) is provided,
The first judgment information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and the second judgment information (random number group corresponding to the special hit result) are provided as the predetermined judgment information.
The variable ball-entry unit includes a first variable ball-entry unit (variable winning device 64) and a second variable ball-entry unit (variable winning device 65).
The special game state transition means
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the first determination result (big hit result) corresponding to the first determination information, the first variable entry portion is shifted to the first special gaming state to be switched. Means and
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the second determination result (special hit result) corresponding to the second determination information, the state shifts to the second special gaming state in which the second variable ball entry portion is the switching target. Have a means to make
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state are longer than those of the first switching mode. There is a second switching mode (high frequency support mode).
As a determination mode (lottery mode) in which the determination is performed by the determination means, a low probability mode in which the probability of the first determination result corresponding to the first determination information is relatively low and the determination mode corresponding to the second determination information are supported. There is a high probability mode in which the probability of the second judgment result is relatively high.
As the predetermined gaming state, the first gaming state (first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode and the low probability mode, and the first gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode and the high probability mode. A second gaming state (second normal gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player, and a third gaming state that corresponds to the second switching mode and the high probability mode and is more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state ( 4th normal game state) is provided,
The second gaming state is configured so that the probability of a second determination result corresponding to the second determination information is higher than that of the first gaming state and the third gaming state, while the game. The ratio of the number of game balls paid out by the payout means to the number of game balls fired by the ball launching means is the ratio of the number of game balls fired by the game ball launching means in the third gaming state. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be lower than the ratio of the number of gaming balls paid out by the payout means.

According to the feature A7, the third game state corresponds to the second switching mode, and the chance of entering the starting ball entry section increases. Therefore, by shifting to the third game state, for example, the ratio of the number of game balls paid out by the payout means to the number of game balls fired is higher than that of the first game state corresponding to the first switching mode. That is, the value obtained by dividing the number of payouts of the game balls by the number of shots of the game balls (hereinafter referred to as the base) becomes high, and it becomes possible to proceed with the game while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held. Here, the second gaming state corresponds to the first switching mode as in the first gaming state, and it cannot be expected that the variable mechanism will increase the chances of entering the ball. However, in the second gaming state, the probability of becoming a second determination result (special hit result, so-called small hit) increases, and the chance that the game ball is paid out by entering the second variable entry portion increases. With regard to such behavior, unlike the configuration in which the second switching mode is used to increase the chances of paying out the game ball, the increase in payout does not mean the increase in the number of balls entering the starting ball. This is preferable in order to realize diversification of games while suppressing the chance of entering the starting ball. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, the second gaming state in which a certain amount of ball can be expected due to the frequent occurrence of the second determination result has a higher base than the first gaming state (advantageous to the player), while the first 3 The base is lower when compared to the game state (disadvantageous to the player). By providing a gaming state in which the base is higher than that of the second gaming state in this way, the frequency of transition to such a special gaming state (second gaming state) is extremely reduced, and the above effects are effectively exhibited. It is possible to preferably eliminate the inconvenience that the problem is not achieved. Therefore, according to the configuration shown in this feature, the degree of attention to the game can be suitably improved by diversifying the game.

Feature A8. The game ball launching means can launch a game ball at a predetermined cycle based on the launch operation of the player.
The variable ball-entry control means is characterized in that the period during which the variable ball-entry unit is in the receiving state in the second special gaming state is longer than the predetermined cycle. The gaming machine according to A6 or feature A7.

As shown in the feature A6 and the like, in the configuration in which the base is pulled up by entering the variable entry portion during the second special game state, if the entry into the variable entry portion does not occur well, the first game The superiority of the second gaming state over the state will be reduced. In view of such circumstances, it is preferable that the period during which the variable ball entry portion is in the receiving state during the second special game state is at least longer than the launch cycle (predetermined cycle) of the game ball.

Feature A9. The game ball launching means can launch a game ball at a predetermined cycle based on the launch operation of the player.
The variable ball-entry unit includes a first variable ball-entry unit (variable winning device 64) and a second variable ball-entry unit (variable winning device 65).
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the first determination result (big hit result) corresponding to the first determination information, the first special gaming state in which the first variable ball entry portion is switched is set. When the transition is made and the determination result by the determination means becomes the second determination result (special hit result) corresponding to the second determination information, the second special ball input portion is switched. It is configured to shift to the game state,
The second variable ball entry portion has an opening through which the game ball can flow (large winning opening 341), a first position that prevents the game ball from flowing into the opening by covering the opening, and retracts from the opening. It has a movable member (shutter 345) that can be displaced to a second position that allows the inflow of the game ball into the opening, and the movable member is arranged at the first position to be in the non-accepting state. The movable member is arranged at the second position so as to be in the receiving state.
The movable member is formed so that the game ball can roll on the upper surface of the movable member, and the second variable entry portion allows the game ball to roll on the upper surface and pass above the opening. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A6 to A8, wherein the required period of the case is configured to be longer than the predetermined cycle.

As shown in this feature, the required period when the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the movable member and passes above the opening is configured to be longer than the firing cycle (predetermined cycle) of the game ball. , It is possible to prevent the function of pulling up the base from being properly exerted due to the entry of the ball into the second variable entry portion during the second special gaming state, and to reduce the superiority of the second gaming state over the first gaming state. It can be preferably avoided.

Feature A10. As the predetermined gaming state, a fourth gaming state (third normal gaming state) corresponding to the second switching mode and the low probability mode is provided.
In the second gaming state, the probability of obtaining the second determination result corresponding to the second determination information is higher than that in the fourth gaming state, while the next from the end of the first special gaming state to the next. The feature A6 is characterized in that the ratio of the number of game balls paid out by the payout means to the number of game balls fired until the start of the first special game state is low. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A9.

According to the feature A10, in the fourth gaming state (so-called time saving) corresponding to the second switching mode and the low probability mode, the ratio (base) of the number of payouts to the number of shots is set to be higher than that in the second gaming state. Has been done. That is, the base is configured to increase in the order of the first gaming state <second gaming state <fourth gaming state <third gaming state. As described above, lowering the order of the second gaming state to that of the fourth gaming state is advantageous in increasing the chances of transition to the second gaming state and exerting the effects shown in the feature A6 and the like.

Feature A11. A10 characterized by providing means for shifting to the third gaming state or the fourth gaming state through the first special gaming state when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied in the second gaming state. The gaming machine described in.

As shown in this feature, according to the configuration in which the second gaming state in which the second determination result frequently occurs functions as a kind of hurdle (for example, a chance zone) for shifting to the third gaming state or the fourth gaming state. The behavior of the gaming machine can be significantly changed in the process of transitioning from the first gaming state to the second gaming state to the third / fourth gaming state, and the game is monotonized as a configuration that increases the chances of transitioning to the second gaming state. It is possible to preferably exert the effect of suppressing.

Feature A12. The starting ball entry section includes a first starting ball entry section (first actuating ball entry section 62, right-hand actuating ball entry section 62R) to which the variable mechanism is attached, and a second start ball entry section (second start ball entry section) to which the variable mechanism is not attached. The first start ball entry part and the second start ball entry part are arranged in a predetermined flow path (right route) in the game area, including the two actuating ball entry part 63).
As the predetermined notification means, a first notification means (display unit D1 for the first operation port) that performs a game rotation operation based on the ball entering the first start ball entry unit, and the second start ball entry unit. A second notification means (display unit D2 for the second operation port) that performs a game rotation operation based on the entry into the ball is provided.
The game rotation control means can execute the game rotation operation on one of the first notification means and the second notification means during the game rotation operation on the other.
The game rotation control means is an execution period determining means (in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that determines the execution period of the game rotation operation in the first notification means and the execution period of the game rotation operation in the second notification means. Has a function to determine the variable display time)
The first notification means has a determination mode (a function of specifying a variation display time table referred to in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 for each game state) for determining the execution period of the game rotation operation by the execution period determining means. The first determination mode (for example, the variable display time corresponding to the fourth normal game state) for determining the execution period so that the execution period of the game rotation operation is shorter than the execution period of the game rotation operation in the second notification means. The function of referring to the table) and the second determination to determine the execution period so that the execution period of the game rotation operation in the first notification means is longer than the execution period of the game rotation operation in the second notification means. A mode (for example, a function of referring to a variable display time table corresponding to the second normal game state) is provided.
In the determination based on the entry into the second starting ball entry portion, the second determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained rather than the determination based on the entry into the first start entry ball portion. It is set to have a high probability,
A means for switching the determination mode so that the determination mode becomes the first determination mode in the first gaming state and the third gaming state, and the determination mode becomes the second determination mode in the second gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of feature A6 to feature A11, which is provided with a function of switching a variable display time table referred to by MPU 602 of the main control device 162 according to a gaming state).

According to the configuration shown in this feature, in the second gaming state, the execution period of the game rotation operation based on the entry into the second starting ball entry section is the game rotation based on the entry into the first starting ball entry section. It is shorter than the execution period of the operation, and the game progresses mainly by the game rotation operation based on the ball entering the second starting ball entry section. As a result, the chances of obtaining the second judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information increase, and the chances of entering the variable ball entry section (second variable entry section) increase. On the other hand, in the first gaming state and the third gaming state, the execution period of the game rotation operation based on the entry into the first starting entry section is the game based on the entry into the second starting entry section. The second judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information by shortening the execution period of the turn-around motion and progressing the game mainly by the game turn-around motion based on the entry into the first start ball entry portion. The probability of becoming is low. As a result, the probability of transition to the second special game state is lowered, and the number of game balls to be paid out is reduced. Further, since the first game state corresponds to the first switching mode, the number of game balls to be paid out based on the entry into the starting ball entry portion is relatively small, and the third gaming state is the second switching mode. The number of game balls to be paid out based on the entry into the starting entry section is relatively large. In this way, by providing a difference in the execution period according to the game state and switching the main game rotation operation, the probability that the second determination result will be obtained in the second game state is increased, and in each predetermined game state. A configuration that generates a difference between the bases can be preferably realized.

In addition, for example, the following configuration may be applied to the configuration shown in this feature. That is, "as the first determination result, the high probability mode correspondence result corresponding to the transition to the high probability mode (probability variation jackpot result) and the low probability mode correspondence result corresponding to the transition to the low probability mode (normal jackpot result). Is provided, and the ratio of the high-probability mode correspondence result and the low-probability mode correspondence result to the high-probability mode correspondence result in the determination based on the entry into the second starting ball entry portion is , The determination based on the entry into the first starting ball entry portion is configured to be lower than the ratio of the high probability mode correspondence result and the low probability mode correspondence result to the high probability mode correspondence result. The "is" configuration may be applied.

Further, for example, the following configuration may be applied to the configuration shown in this feature. That is, "the variable ball-entry unit includes a first variable ball-entry unit (variable winning device 64) and a second variable ball-entry unit (variable winning device 65), and the special gaming state transition means is determined by the determination means. When the result is the first determination result (big hit result) corresponding to the first determination information, the means for shifting the first variable ball entry portion to the first special gaming state to be switched, and the determination. When the determination result by the means becomes the second determination result (special hit result) corresponding to the second determination information, the means for shifting to the second special gaming state in which the second variable ball entry portion is the switching target. The payout means is such that the number of game balls to be paid out based on the entry into the first start entry section is the number of game balls to be paid out based on the entry into the second variable entry section. A configuration that is "configured to be less than the number of" may be applied.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the features A6 to A12 to the features A1 to A5.

Incidentally, the description of "the ratio of the number of game balls paid out by the payout means to the number of game balls fired by the game ball launching means" in the feature A group is "paid out by the payout means". The number of game balls may be changed to "a value divided by the number of game balls fired by the game ball launching means".

<Characteristic B group>
The following feature B group is described as "a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed and a gaming ball launching means for launching a gaming ball into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry portion provided in a game area, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out and other benefits are given to the player. Regarding the background technology of "(for example, see Patent Document 1)", there is an invention that "in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the degree of attention to the game." It was made with the problem to be solved.

Feature B1. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launch mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (pain device 222) for paying out the game ball based on the ball entering the ball entry units (actuated ball entry units 62, 63 and variable winning devices 64, 65) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry unit (actuated ball entry units 62, 63) as the ball entry unit. A function to execute the process of acquiring pending information) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means (main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result and a special hit result). Function to execute lottery processing in MPU602) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the result of the determination is As a result of the notification corresponding to the above, the end of the game round operation is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The game time control means (a function of executing the game time control process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that controls the predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the operation port), and
Based on the determination result by the determination means being the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means being completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). A special game state transition means (a function of executing the game state transition process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that shifts to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state).
It is possible to switch between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area is provided in the game area and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning devices 64, 65) and
It is provided with a control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing opening / closing processing by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the special gaming state is entered. ,
As the special gaming state, the first special gaming state (special gaming state corresponding to the jackpot result) and the second special gaming state (special) in which the variable entry portion is in the receiving state for a shorter period than the first special gaming state. (Special game state corresponding to the winning result) is provided,
The first judgment information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and the second judgment information (random number group corresponding to the special hit result) are provided as the predetermined judgment information.
The special game state transition means
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the first determination result (big hit result) corresponding to the first determination information, the means for shifting to the first special gaming state and
It has a means for shifting to the second special gaming state when the determination result by the determination means becomes the second determination result (special hit result) corresponding to the second determination information.
As a determination mode (lottery mode) in which the determination is performed by the determination means, a low probability mode in which the probability of the first determination result corresponding to the first determination information is relatively low and the determination mode corresponding to the first determination information are supported. There is a high probability mode in which the probability of becoming the first judgment result is relatively high.
As the predetermined gaming state,
The first gaming state (first normal gaming state) corresponding to the low probability mode and
A second gaming state (second normal gaming state) corresponding to the high probability mode and set so that the probability of the second determination result corresponding to the second determination information is higher than that of the first gaming state. )When,
A third gaming state (a special loop gaming state including a third normal gaming state and a fourth normal gaming state) is provided, which is more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state.
As the first determination result, the high probability mode correspondence result (probability variation jackpot result) that shifts to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode with the end of the first special gaming state, and the end of the first special gaming state. Along with this, a low-probability mode-corresponding result (normal jackpot result) for shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low-probability mode is provided.
When the high probability mode correspondence result is obtained in the first gaming state, the first transition means for shifting to the second gaming state via the first special gaming state and
A gaming machine characterized in that it includes a second transition means for shifting to the third gaming state via the first special gaming state when the result corresponding to the low probability mode is obtained in the second gaming state. ..

According to the feature B1, by shifting from the first gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode to the second gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode, the probability that the first judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained becomes high and the second The probability of becoming a judgment result increases. When the second determination result is obtained, the game ball is paid out by the second special game state → the ball entering the variable ball entry section. As a result, in the second gaming state, it is possible to proceed with the game while suppressing investment as compared with the first gaming state. Here, the low-probability mode correspondence result triggers the end of the high-probability mode. Although it is advantageous to make the first judgment result include the high-probability mode correspondence result and the low-probability mode correspondence result in order to realize the diversification of the game and suppress the monotony of the game, from the first game state. It is the player's willingness to play that the second game state ends easily as a result of supporting the low probability mode even though the situation has changed to the second game state and the game can be advanced advantageously. It is feared that it will be a factor to reduce.

In this respect, in the configuration shown in this feature, when the low probability mode correspondence result is obtained during the second game state, the game shifts to the third game state which is more advantageous to the player than the second game state. That is, the low-probability mode correspondence result in the second gaming state is an opportunity to be promoted to a more advantageous predetermined gaming state. In this way, if it is a configuration that is advantageous for the player that the low probability mode correspondence result is obtained after shifting to the gaming state (second gaming state) on the more advantageous side than the first gaming state, the low probability mode correspondence result It is possible to prevent the existence of the player from becoming a factor that reduces the player's willingness to play. That is, in order to diversify the game by using the low probability mode correspondence result and the high probability mode correspondence result together, the negative impression on the low probability mode correspondence result can be alleviated. Therefore, it is possible to preferably exert the effect of improving the degree of attention to the game by diversifying the game.

Feature B2. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launch mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (pain device 222) for paying out the game ball based on the ball entering the ball entry units (actuated ball entry units 62, 63 and variable winning devices 64, 65) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry unit (actuated ball entry units 62, 63) as the ball entry unit. A function to execute the process of acquiring pending information) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result and the special hit result). (Function to execute the process for lottery) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the result of the determination is As a result of the notification corresponding to the above, the end of the game round operation is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The game time control means (a function of executing the game time control process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that controls the predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the operation port), and
Based on the determination result by the determination means being the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means being completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). A special game state transition means (a function of executing the game state transition process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that shifts to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state).
It is possible to switch between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area is provided in the game area and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning devices 64, 65) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing the opening / closing process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the game shifts to the special gaming state.
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the receiving state. 71) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the special gaming state, the first special gaming state (special gaming state corresponding to the jackpot result) and the second special gaming state (special) in which the variable entry portion is in the receiving state for a shorter period than the first special gaming state. (Special game state corresponding to the winning result) is provided,
The first judgment information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and the second judgment information (random number group corresponding to the special hit result) are provided as the predetermined judgment information.
The special game state transition means
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the first determination result (big hit result) corresponding to the first determination information, the means for shifting to the first special gaming state and
It has a means for shifting to the second special gaming state when the determination result by the determination means becomes the second determination result (special hit result) corresponding to the second determination information.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state are longer than those of the first switching mode. There is a second switching mode (high frequency support mode).
As a determination mode (lottery mode) in which the determination is performed by the determination means, a low probability mode in which the probability of the first determination result corresponding to the first determination information is relatively low and the determination mode corresponding to the first determination information are supported. There is a high probability mode in which the probability of becoming the first judgment result is relatively high.
As the predetermined gaming state,
The first gaming state (first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode and the low probability mode, and
A second gaming state (which corresponds to the first switching mode and the high probability mode and is set so that the probability of a second determination result corresponding to the second determination information is higher than that of the first gaming state. 2nd normal game state) and
A third gaming state (a special loop gaming state including a third normal gaming state and a fourth normal gaming state) is provided, which is more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state.
As the first determination result, the high probability mode correspondence result of shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode with the end of the first special gaming state, and the low with the end of the first special gaming state. There is a low probability mode support result that shifts to the predetermined game state corresponding to the probability mode.
When the high probability mode correspondence result is obtained in the first gaming state, the first transition means for shifting to the second gaming state via the first special gaming state and
A gaming machine characterized in that it includes a second transition means for shifting to the third gaming state via the first special gaming state when the result corresponding to the low probability mode is obtained in the second gaming state. ..

According to the feature B2, the first determination is made by shifting from the first gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode and the low probability mode to the second gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode and the high probability mode (so-called small hit RUSH). The probability of becoming a result (high probability mode correspondence result and low probability mode correspondence result) becomes high, and the probability of becoming a second judgment result also becomes high. When the second determination result is obtained, the game ball is paid out by the second special game state → the ball entering the variable ball entry section. Therefore, in the second gaming state, it is possible to proceed with the game while suppressing the investment as compared with the first gaming state. Here, the low-probability mode correspondence result is a determination result that triggers the end of the high-probability mode. Although it is advantageous to make the first judgment result include the high-probability mode correspondence result and the low-probability mode correspondence result in order to realize the diversification of the game and suppress the monotony of the game, from the first game state. It is the player's willingness to play that the second game state ends easily as a result of supporting the low probability mode even though the situation has changed to the second game state and the game can be advanced advantageously. It is feared that it will be a factor to reduce.

In this respect, in the configuration shown in this feature, when a high probability mode correspondence result is obtained during the second game state, the game returns to the second game state via the first special game state, whereas the second game If the result corresponds to the low probability mode during the state, the game shifts to the third gaming state, which is more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state, through the first special gaming state. That is, the low-probability mode correspondence result in the second gaming state is an opportunity to be promoted to a more advantageous predetermined gaming state. In this way, if it is a configuration that is advantageous for the player that the low probability mode correspondence result is obtained after shifting to the gaming state (second gaming state) on the more advantageous side than the first gaming state, the low probability mode correspondence result It is possible to prevent the existence of the player from becoming a factor that reduces the player's willingness to play. That is, in order to diversify the game by using the low probability mode correspondence result and the high probability mode correspondence result together, the negative impression on the low probability mode correspondence result can be alleviated. Therefore, it is possible to preferably exert the effect of improving the degree of attention to the game by diversifying the game.

The configuration shown in this feature may be changed as follows. That is, "a game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on an operation of a player. 110) and a payout means (payout device 222) for paying out the game ball based on the ball entering the ball entry units (actuated ball entry units 62, 63 and variable winning devices 64, 65) provided in the game area. Special information acquisition to acquire special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (acting ball entry section 62, 63) as the ball entry section. Means (a function of executing a process of acquiring hold information in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) and acquisition information storage means (in RAM 604 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means. A determination to determine whether or not the reserved ball storage area 632) and the special information stored in the acquired information storage means correspond to predetermined determination information (a random number group corresponding to the jackpot result and the special hit result). A game rotation operation (operation port) based on the means (a function of executing the lottery process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) and the determination made prior to the determination by the determination means or by the determination means. (Variable display of the pattern on the display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game rotation operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination. Game turn control means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that controls predetermined notification means (operation port display units D1 and D2) so that the game turn operation of each game turn is performed according to the stored special information. Based on the function of executing the game rotation control process), the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed. , A special game state transition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that shifts the game state to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state). (Function to execute the game state transition process), the accepted state (open state) in which the game ball provided in the game area and flowing down the game area can enter, and the entering state of the game ball from the accepted state. The variable ball entry unit (variable winning devices 64, 65) that can be switched to the non-acceptance state (closed state), which is difficult to play, and the variable entry unit in the acceptance state and the non-acceptance state when the game shifts to the special gaming state. A control means for a variable ball entry unit that switches to a state (a function of executing opening / closing processing by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162), a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball can enter the starting ball entering unit, and the receiving state. A variable mechanism (electric accessory 71) that can be switched to a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the state, and a variable mechanism control means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that controls the variable mechanism. The special game state (a function of executing the electric service support process) is provided as the first special game state (special game state corresponding to the jackpot result) and the variable ball entry unit rather than the first special game state. A second special game state (special game state corresponding to the special hit result) is provided in which the period in which the player is in the accepting state is short, and the first judgment information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and the predetermined judgment information are provided. The second determination information (random number group corresponding to the special hit result) is provided, and in the special game state transition means, the determination result by the determination means is the first determination result (big hit result) corresponding to the first determination information. ), The means for shifting to the first special gaming state, and the second determination result (special hit result) corresponding to the second determination information. It has a means for shifting to the second special gaming state, and as a switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, a first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the first switching. A second switching mode (high frequency support mode) is provided in which the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the mode, and the determination mode (lottery mode) in which the determination is performed by the determination means is the first. A low probability mode in which the probability of the first judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information is relatively low and a high probability mode in which the probability of the first judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information is relatively high are provided. The predetermined game state corresponds to the first game state (first normal game state) corresponding to the first switching mode and the low probability mode, and the first switching mode and the high probability mode. A second gaming state (second normal gaming state) set so that the probability of a second determination result corresponding to the second determination information is higher than that of the first gaming state, and a game more than the second gaming state. A third gaming state (a special loop gaming state including a third normal gaming state and a fourth normal gaming state) is provided, which is advantageous to the player, and as the first determination result, the first special gaming state With the end A high-probability mode correspondence result that shifts to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high-probability mode and a low-probability mode correspondence result that shifts to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low-probability mode upon the end of the first special gaming state are provided. The gaming machine is characterized in that, when the result corresponding to the low probability mode is obtained in the second gaming state, the gaming machine is provided with a means for shifting to the third gaming state through the first special gaming state. .. May be.

Feature B3. When the result corresponding to the low probability mode is obtained in the first gaming state, the configuration is such that the player shifts to a predetermined gaming state other than the third gaming state through the first special gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature B1 or feature B2.

In the configuration shown in this feature, the behavior is significantly different between the case where the low probability mode correspondence result is obtained in the first gaming state and the case where the low probability mode correspondence result is obtained in the second gaming state. That is, even if the same low-probability mode correspondence result is won, the subsequent development of the game differs greatly depending on the situation (first game state / second game state). With such a configuration, diversification of games can be realized, and monotonous games can be suitably suppressed.

Feature B4. Features B1 to B3 are configured to return to the first gaming state through the first special gaming state when the result corresponding to the low probability mode is obtained in the first gaming state. The gaming machine described in any one of.

In the configuration shown in this feature, the behavior is significantly different between the case where the low probability mode correspondence result is obtained in the first gaming state and the case where the low probability mode correspondence result is obtained in the second gaming state. In other words, even if the same low-probability mode correspondence result is won, the subsequent development of the game differs greatly depending on the situation. With such a configuration, the low-probability mode support result is a game while realizing diversification of the game by limiting the low-probability mode support result to the player's advantage only in some situations. It is possible to preferably suppress a factor that lowers a person's willingness to play.

Feature B5. When the determination in the first gaming state results in a special result that is one of the high-probability mode correspondence results, the configuration is such that the transition to the third gaming state is possible through the first special gaming state. Ori,
The probability that the determination in the second gaming state will result in the low probability mode correspondence result is configured to be higher than the probability that the determination in the first gaming state will result in the special result. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature B1 to the feature B4.

It is preferable to provide a direct route from the first gaming state to the third gaming state in order to diversify the game. However, the probability that the judgment in the second game state will result in a low probability mode correspondence result is given preferential treatment so that the probability that the judgment in the first game state will result in a special result is higher, and the second game state is high. Coupled with the fact that it corresponds to the probability mode, the second gaming state provides a chance for the player to shift to the third gaming state. In such a configuration, the player who expects the transition to the third gaming state first shifts to the second gaming state and expects that the low probability mode correspondence result will be obtained during the second gaming state. Expected to do. This alleviates the negative image of the low-probability mode correspondence result as shown in the feature B1 and the like, and suppresses that the low-probability mode correspondence result becomes an opportunity to reduce the player's motivation to play. Preferred above.

Feature B6. It is characterized in that it includes a third transition means for shifting to the second gaming state through the first special gaming state when the high probability mode correspondence result is obtained by the determination during the second gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of feature B1 to feature B5.

In the configuration shown in this feature, when the high probability mode correspondence result is obtained during the second gaming state, the transition to the third gaming state is avoided, and the second gaming state is looped. That is, in the second game state, the superiority between the low-probability mode correspondence result and the high-probability mode correspondence result is reversed. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably increase the expectation for the low-probability mode correspondence result in the second gaming state.

Feature B7. As the third gaming state, the first specific gaming state (third normal gaming state) corresponding to the low probability mode and the second switching mode and the second specific gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode (the third normal gaming state) ( 4th normal game state) is provided,
When the determination in the second game state results in the low probability mode correspondence result, the process shifts to the first specific game state, and the determination in the first specific game state results in the high probability mode correspondence result. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature B1 to the feature B6, which is configured to shift to the second specific gaming state when the game is played.

In the second specific gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode constituting the third gaming state, the player can advance the game advantageously. Since the third gaming state is configured to shift through the first specific gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the second switching mode, which also constitutes the third gaming state, the high probability mode and the second switching mode are supported. The player who expects the transition to the second specific gaming state will first aim for the first specific gaming state.

Feature B8. When the number of consecutive high-probability mode correspondence results reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 times), the means for shifting to the low-probability mode-corresponding normal gaming state via the first special gaming state is provided. The gaming machine according to feature B7.

If both the second gaming state and the second specific gaming state (the third gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode) correspond to the high probability mode, it is assumed that the second gaming state is to the second predetermined state. By making it possible to directly shift to the gaming state, the staying period (number of consecutive villas) in the second predetermined gaming state is greatly affected by the staying period (number of consecutive villas) in the second gaming state, and the third gaming state and the second game It is feared that the difference in superiority with the state will become smaller. In this respect, according to the combination with the above-mentioned feature B7, the transition to the second specific gaming state goes through the first specific gaming state, and the continuation of the high probability mode correspondence result is temporarily interrupted. As a result, even if the period of stay in the second gaming state (the number of consecutive high-probability mode correspondence results) increases, the difference in superiority between the second gaming state and the second specific gaming state becomes smaller due to the effect. It can be suitably suppressed.

Feature B9. When the high-probability mode correspondence result is obtained in the determination during the second gaming state and the number of consecutive high-probability mode correspondence results does not reach the specified number (for example, 10 times), the first A means for shifting to the second gaming state again after passing through the special gaming state, and
When the high-probability mode correspondence result is obtained in the second gaming state and the number of consecutive high-probability mode correspondence results reaches the specified number, the first game is passed through the first special gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of feature B1 to feature B8, which comprises means for shifting to a state.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, after shifting to the second gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode, it is aimed at the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information while suppressing the investment, more specifically, the result corresponding to the low probability mode. Here, during the second gaming state, the second gaming state is looped until the number of consecutive high-probability mode correspondence results reaches a predetermined number. A player who expects to be promoted to the third gaming state will play the game with the expectation that the result corresponding to the low probability mode will be obtained by the time the number of consecutive times reaches the specified number. In other words, the challenge to the low probability mode correspondence result will continue until the specified number is reached. With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably prevent the second gaming state from ending soon after the game in the second gaming state is enjoyed, even though the transition to the second gaming state has occurred.

Feature B10. When the result corresponding to the high probability mode is obtained during the third gaming state, the normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode constituting the third gaming state through the first special gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature B8 or feature B9, which is characterized in that it is configured to shift to.

After the transition to the third gaming state, the game is performed with the expectation that the third gaming state will continue. Here, during the second game state, the game is performed aiming at the low probability mode correspondence result, while during the third game state, the game is performed aiming at the high probability mode correspondence result, and the player aims. The determination result is the opposite of the second game state. With such a configuration, the effect of suppressing the monotony of the game can be more preferably exhibited.

Feature B11. The starting ball entry section includes a first starting ball entry section (right-side actuating ball entry section 62R which is the first actuating ball entry section 62) and a second start ball entry section (second actuating ball entry section 63). The 1-start ball entry section and the 2 start ball entry section are arranged in a predetermined flow path (right route) provided in the game area.
When the determination result based on the entry into the first start ball entry portion results in the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, the probability of the high probability mode correspondence result and the second start entry ball portion. When the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information is obtained by the judgment based on the entry of the ball, the probability of the high probability mode correspondence result is different.
As the predetermined notification means, a first notification means (display unit D1 for the first operation port) that performs a game rotation operation based on the ball entering the first start ball entry unit, and the second start ball entry unit. A second notification means (display unit D2 for the second operation port) that performs a game rotation operation based on the entry into the ball is provided.
The game rotation control means can execute the game rotation operation on one of the first notification means and the second notification means during the game rotation operation on the other.
The game rotation control means is an execution period determining means (in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that determines the execution period of the game rotation operation in the first notification means and the execution period of the game rotation operation in the second notification means. Has a function to determine the variable display time)
As a determination mode (a function of specifying a variation display time table referred to in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 for each game state) by the execution period determination means, the game in the first notification means. A first determination mode (for example, a variable display time table corresponding to the fourth normal gaming state) in which the execution period is determined so that the execution period of the diversion operation is shorter than the execution period of the game diversion operation in the second notification means. The second determination mode in which the execution period is determined so that the execution period of the game rotation operation in the first notification means is longer than the execution period of the game rotation operation in the second notification means. (For example, a function to refer to a variable display time table corresponding to the second normal game state) is provided.
A means for switching the determination mode so that the determination mode becomes the first determination mode in the first gaming state and the third gaming state, and the determination mode becomes the second determination mode in the second gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of feature B1 to feature B10, which is provided with a function of switching a variable display time table referred to by MPU 602 of the main control device 162 according to a gaming state).

As shown in this feature, the game ball launched into a predetermined flow path is placed in either the first starting ball entry section or the second starting ball entry section in which a difference in distribution probability is provided as a result corresponding to the high probability mode. By setting the execution period of the game rotation operation in each starting and entering part to be opposite between the 1st and 3rd gaming states and the 2nd gaming state, the feature B1 and the like can be obtained. The presented technical idea can be suitably embodied.

Further, according to the combination with the feature B8 to the feature B10 (limiter), the following effects can be expected. That is, in the second game state, by launching the game ball into the predetermined flow path, the game progresses mainly by the game rotation operation related to the second start ball entry portion, and in the first / third game state. Similarly, by launching the game ball into a predetermined flow path, the game progresses mainly by the game rotation operation related to the first start ball entry portion. Here, when the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained by the determination by the determination means as described above, the probability that the determination result is the high probability mode correspondence result is determined by the entry into the first starting ball entry section. There is a difference between the judgment based on the judgment and the judgment based on the ball entering the second starting ball entry section. That is, it is possible to provide a difference in the number of consecutive high-probability mode correspondence results for the second gaming state and the third gaming state. As a result, the effect of suppressing the monotony of the game can be suitably exerted.

In addition, the configuration shown in this feature states that "the determination based on the entry into the second starting ball entry portion results in both the high probability mode correspondence result and the low probability mode correspondence result, while the first It is also possible to apply a configuration in which the determination based on the entry into the starting ball entry portion is configured to be only the high probability mode correspondence result among the high probability mode correspondence result and the low probability mode correspondence result. It is possible.

Feature B12. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launch mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (pain device 222) for paying out the game ball based on the ball entering the ball entry units (actuated ball entry units 62, 63 and variable winning devices 64, 65) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry unit (actuated ball entry units 62, 63) as the ball entry unit. A function to execute the process of acquiring pending information) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means (main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result and a special hit result). Function to execute lottery processing in MPU602) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the result of the determination is As a result of the notification corresponding to the above, the end of the game round operation is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The game time control means (a function of executing the game time control process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that controls the predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the operation port), and
Based on the determination result by the determination means being the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means being completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). A special game state transition means (a function of executing the game state transition process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that shifts to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state).
It is possible to switch between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area is provided in the game area and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning devices 64, 65) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing the opening / closing process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the game shifts to the special gaming state.
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the receiving state. 71) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the special gaming state, the first special gaming state (special gaming state corresponding to the jackpot result) and the second special gaming state (special) in which the variable entry portion is in the receiving state for a shorter period than the first special gaming state. (Special game state corresponding to the winning result) is provided,
The first judgment information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and the second judgment information (random number group corresponding to the special hit result) are provided as the predetermined judgment information.
The special game state transition means
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the first determination result (big hit result) corresponding to the first determination information, the means for shifting to the first special gaming state and
It has a means for shifting to the second special gaming state when the determination result by the determination means becomes the second determination result (special hit result) corresponding to the second determination information.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state are longer than those of the first switching mode. There is a second switching mode (high frequency support mode).
As a determination mode (lottery mode) in which the determination is performed by the determination means, a low probability mode in which the probability of the first determination result corresponding to the first determination information is relatively low and the determination mode corresponding to the first determination information are supported. There is a high probability mode in which the probability of becoming the first judgment result is relatively high.
As the predetermined gaming state,
The first gaming state (first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode and the low probability mode, and
A second gaming state (second game state) corresponding to the first switching mode and the high probability mode, and set so that the probability of a second determination result corresponding to the second determination information is higher than that of the first gaming state. 2 Normal game state) is provided,
As the first determination result, the high probability mode correspondence result (probability variation jackpot result) that shifts to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode through the first special gaming state, and the low probability through the first special gaming state. A low-probability mode-compatible result (normal jackpot result) that shifts to a predetermined game state corresponding to the mode is provided.
When the high-probability mode correspondence result is obtained in the second gaming state and the number of consecutive high-probability mode correspondence results does not reach a predetermined number (for example, 10 times), the first special gaming state ends. As a means of shifting to the second gaming state again later,
When the high-probability mode correspondence result is obtained in the second gaming state and the number of consecutive high-probability mode correspondence results reaches the predetermined number, the second game is performed after the end of the first special gaming state. A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a means for shifting to another predetermined gaming state different from the state.

According to the feature B12, the first determination result (high probability mode correspondence result and low probability mode correspondence result) is obtained by shifting from the first gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode to the second gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode. The probability is high, and the probability of the second judgment result is also high. When the second determination result is obtained, the game ball is paid out by the second special game state → the ball entering the variable ball entry section. Therefore, in the second gaming state, it is possible to proceed with the game while suppressing the investment as compared with the first gaming state. Here, it is the player's willingness to play that the second game state is easily terminated even though the situation is such that the game can be advanced advantageously by shifting from the first game state to the second game state. Can be a factor that reduces.

In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, when a high-probability mode correspondence result is obtained during the second gaming state, the gaming state is determined by whether or not the number of consecutive high-probability mode correspondence results reaches a predetermined number. The migration destination has a different configuration. That is, when the number of consecutive high-probability mode correspondence results has not reached the predetermined number, the process shifts to the second gaming state again through the first special gaming state, and the number of consecutive high-probability mode correspondence results reaches the predetermined number. In the case, the game shifts to another predetermined gaming state different from the second gaming state through the first special gaming state. With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably prevent the second gaming state from ending soon after the game in the second gaming state is enjoyed, even though the transition to the second gaming state has occurred.

Feature B13. The gaming machine according to feature B12, wherein the other predetermined gaming state is a predetermined gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state.

As shown in this feature, when the number of consecutive high-probability mode correspondence results reaches a predetermined number in the second game state, the predetermined game is more advantageous to the player than the second game state through the first special game state. If it is configured to shift to the state, it will be possible to play a novel game that has never been seen before.

Feature B14. The gaming machine according to feature B12, wherein the other predetermined gaming state is the first gaming state.

As shown in this feature, according to the configuration in which the game shifts to the first game state when the number of consecutive high-probability mode correspondence results reaches a predetermined number in the second game state, the probability is low until the predetermined number is reached. The chances of the mode correspondence result come repeatedly, and it is possible to preferably suppress the end of the second gaming state shortly after enjoying the game in the second gaming state, even though the transition to the second gaming state has occurred.

Feature B15. The starting ball entry section includes a first starting ball entry section (right-side actuating ball entry section 62R which is the first actuating ball entry section 62) and a second start ball entry section (second actuating ball entry section 63). The 1-start ball entry section and the 2 start ball entry section are arranged in a predetermined flow path (right route) provided in the game area.
In the determination based on the entry into the second starting ball entry portion, the probability that the determination based on the entry into the first start entry section results in the second determination result is high.
As the predetermined notification means, a first notification means (display unit D1 for the first operation port) that performs a game rotation operation based on the ball entering the first start ball entry unit, and the second start ball entry unit. A second notification means (display unit D2 for the second operation port) that performs a game rotation operation based on the entry into the ball is provided.
The game rotation control means can execute the game rotation operation on one of the first notification means and the second notification means during the game rotation operation on the other.
The game rotation control means is an execution period determining means (in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that determines the execution period of the game rotation operation in the first notification means and the execution period of the game rotation operation in the second notification means. Has a function to determine the variable display time)
As a determination mode (a function of specifying a variation display time table referred to in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 for each game state) by the execution period determination means, the game in the first notification means. A first determination mode (for example, a variable display time table corresponding to the fourth normal gaming state) in which the execution period is determined so that the execution period of the diversion operation is shorter than the execution period of the game diversion operation in the second notification means. The second determination mode in which the execution period is determined so that the execution period of the game rotation operation in the first notification means is longer than the execution period of the game rotation operation in the second notification means. (For example, a function to refer to a variable display time table corresponding to the second normal game state) is provided.
Means for switching the determination mode so that the determination mode becomes the first determination mode in the first gaming state and the determination mode becomes the second determination mode in the second gaming state (MPU 602 of the main control device 162). The gaming machine according to any one of feature B12 to feature B14, which is provided with a function of switching the variable display time table referred to in the above section according to the gaming state).

As shown in this feature, the first start ball entry section and the second start ball entry section with a difference in the probability of the second determination result are used in combination, and the execution period of the game rotation operation in each start ball entry section is used. Is configured to switch to the first determination mode in the first gaming state and the second determination mode in the second gaming state, the second determination result → the second special gaming state → variable ball entry in the second gaming state. It is possible to preferably embody the function of suppressing the decrease of the number of balls held by entering the ball.

In addition, each technical idea shown in feature B12 to feature B15 may be applied to the said feature B1 to feature B11.

Moreover, each technical idea shown in feature B1 to feature B15 may be applied to the said feature A group.

<Characteristic C group>
The following feature C group is described in that "a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board in which a game area is formed and a game ball launching means for launching a game ball into the game area based on a launch operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry portion provided in a game area, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out and other benefits are given to the player. Regarding the background technology of "(for example, see Patent Document 1)", there is an invention that "in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the degree of attention to the game." It was made with the problem to be solved.

Feature C1. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
In the special information acquisition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry unit (actuated ball entry unit 62, 63) provided in the game area. (A function to execute the process of acquiring the pending information) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means (for lottery in MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to the jackpot result). (Function to execute the processing of) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the result of the determination is As a result of the notification corresponding to the above, the end of the game round operation is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The game time control means (a function of executing the game time control process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that controls the predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the operation port), and
Based on the determination result by the determination means being the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means being completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). A special game state transition means (a function of executing the game state transition process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that shifts to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state).
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the receiving state. 71) and
It is provided with a switching control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the switching control means, the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state are longer than those of the first switching mode. Two switching modes (high frequency support mode) are provided.
As the determination mode (lottery mode) in which the determination is performed by the determination means, the low probability mode in which the probability of the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively low and the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information are obtained. There is a high probability mode with a relatively high probability,
As the predetermined gaming state, a predetermined gaming state (third normal gaming state) corresponding to the second switching mode and the low probability mode is provided.
When the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained in the predetermined gaming state, the player is more than the predetermined gaming state (for example, the second normal gaming state) before shifting to the predetermined gaming state through the special gaming state. A gaming machine comprising means for shifting to another predetermined gaming state (for example, a fourth normal gaming state) which is advantageous to the player.

A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine may be provided with a predetermined gaming state (so-called time saving) corresponding to a second switching mode and a low probability mode. In such a gaming state, there is a so-called pullback chance, and it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from rapidly decreasing due to the end of the special gaming state. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, when the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained in the predetermined gaming state, the player is more than the predetermined gaming state before shifting to the predetermined gaming state through the special gaming state. It shifts to another predetermined gaming state which is advantageous to. In this way, if the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information during the predetermined gaming state is configured to shift to a more advantageous gaming state than the previous gaming state, attention to the player's game in the predetermined gaming state is taken. The degree can be dramatically improved.

Feature C2. When the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained in the previous predetermined gaming state, it is configured to shift to the predetermined gaming state other than the other gaming states through the special gaming state. Characteristic The gaming machine according to the feature C1.

By providing a configuration in which a direct route for shifting from the previous predetermined gaming state to the other predetermined gaming state is not provided, that is, a configuration requiring a passage through the predetermined gaming state for transitioning to another predetermined gaming state is provided. It is possible to enhance the sense of urgency of the game in the predetermined game state. As a result, the effect of improving the degree of attention shown in the feature C1 can be suitably exhibited.

Feature C3. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
In the special information acquisition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry unit (actuated ball entry unit 62, 63) provided in the game area. (A function to execute the process of acquiring the pending information) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means (for lottery in MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to the jackpot result). (Function to execute the processing of) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the result of the determination is As a result of the notification corresponding to the above, the end of the game round operation is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The game time control means (a function of executing the game time control process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that controls the predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the operation port), and
Based on the determination result by the determination means being the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means being completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). A special game state transition means (a function of executing the game state transition process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that shifts to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state).
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the receiving state. 71) and
It is provided with a switching control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the switching control means, the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state are longer than those of the first switching mode. Two switching modes (high frequency support mode) are provided.
As the determination mode (lottery mode) in which the determination is performed by the determination means, the low probability mode in which the probability of the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively low and the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information are obtained. There is a high probability mode with a relatively high probability,
As the predetermined game state, the first predetermined game state (second normal game state) corresponding to the first switching mode and the high probability mode, and the second predetermined game corresponding to the second switching mode and the low probability mode. A state (third normal game state) is provided,
When the number of consecutive times in which the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information reaches a predetermined number in the first predetermined gaming state, A first transition means for transitioning to the second predetermined gaming state after the end of the special gaming state, and
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information in the second predetermined gaming state shifted from the first predetermined gaming state by the first transition means, the special gaming state A gaming machine comprising a second transition means for transitioning to another predetermined gaming state (for example, a fourth normal gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first predetermined gaming state.

A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine may be provided with a second predetermined gaming state (so-called time saving) corresponding to a second switching mode and a low probability mode. In such a gaming state, there is a so-called pullback chance, and it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from rapidly decreasing due to the end of the special gaming state. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, when the number of consecutive determination results corresponding to the predetermined determination information reaches a predetermined number in the first predetermined gaming state, the game shifts to the second predetermined gaming state and the second predetermined gaming state. When the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained in, the player shifts to another predetermined gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined gaming state (first predetermined gaming state) before shifting to the second predetermined gaming state. Transition. With such a configuration, it is possible to dramatically improve the degree of attention of the player to the game in the second predetermined gaming state.

In addition, the "first transition means" shown in this feature is referred to as "a determination result in which the determination result by the determination means in the first predetermined gaming state corresponds to the special determination information (probability variation jackpot result) included in the predetermined determination information". And when the number of consecutive times that the determination result corresponding to the special determination information reaches a predetermined number, the configuration is such that the player shifts to the second predetermined gaming state after the end of the special gaming state, and "second transition". When the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the special determination information in the second predetermined gaming state in which the means is shifted from the first predetermined gaming state by the first transition means, the said. After the end of the special gaming state, it is possible to shift to another predetermined gaming state (for example, a fourth normal gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first predetermined gaming state.

Feature C4. In the second predetermined gaming state, the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the predetermined determination information in the second predetermined gaming state shifted from the first predetermined gaming state by the first transition means. In that case, after the end of the special gaming state, the transition to the second switching mode and the third predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode, which is another predetermined gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first predetermined gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature C3, which is characterized in that it is configured to be used.

In the configuration shown in this feature, if a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained during the second predetermined gaming state, the predetermined gaming state before shifting to the second predetermined gaming state through the special gaming state ( It shifts to the third predetermined gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the first predetermined gaming state). With such a configuration, it is possible to dramatically improve the degree of attention of the player to the game in the second predetermined gaming state.

The combination of the feature C4 and the feature C3 may be changed as follows. That is, "a game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
In the special information acquisition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry unit (actuation ball entry unit 62, 63) provided in the game area. The function of executing the process of acquiring the hold information), the acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and the above. Judgment means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) (for lottery in MPU 602 of the main control device 162). (Function to execute the process) and the game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operation port display units D1 and D2) based on the determination by the determination means or prior to the determination by the determination means. Is started, and the game round operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, as one of the game rounds, and each game round according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. With the game rotation control means (function of executing the game rotation control process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that controls the predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the operation port) so that the game rotation operation of Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal game). With a special game state transition means (a function of executing the game state transition process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the state to the fourth normal game state). , A variable mechanism (electric combination) that can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the receiving state. The object 71) and a switching control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function of executing the electric service support process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) are provided, and the switching control mode (support) of the variable mechanism by the switching control means is provided. Modes) include a first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high frequency support mode) in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state for a longer period than the first switching mode. As a determination mode (lottery mode) in which the determination is made by the determination means, the determination result corresponds to the predetermined determination information. A low-probability mode in which the probability of the game is relatively low and a high-probability mode in which the probability of obtaining a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information is relatively high are provided. Further, a first predetermined gaming state (second normal gaming state) corresponding to the high probability mode and a second predetermined gaming state (third normal gaming state) corresponding to the second switching mode and the low probability mode are provided. The number of consecutive times that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information reaches the predetermined number in the first predetermined gaming state. In the case of the first transition means for shifting to the second predetermined gaming state after the end of the special gaming state and the second predetermined gaming state shifted from the first predetermined gaming state by the first transition means. When the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, the transition to the second switching mode and the third predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode is performed after the end of the special gaming state. A gaming machine characterized by having a second transition means. May be.

Feature C5. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launch mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on the operation of the player, and
With a payout means (pain device 222) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry unit (actuated ball entry units 62, 63 and variable winning devices 64, 65) provided in the game area. It is a game machine equipped with
Special information acquisition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry unit (actuated ball entry units 62, 63) as the ball entry unit. A function to execute the process of acquiring pending information) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means (for lottery in MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to the jackpot result). (Function to execute the processing of) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the result of the determination is As a result of the notification corresponding to the above, the end of the game round operation is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The game time control means (a function of executing the game time control process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that controls the predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the operation port), and
Based on the determination result by the determination means being the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means being completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). A special game state transition means (a function of executing the game state transition process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that shifts to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state).
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning devices 64, 65) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing the opening / closing process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the game shifts to the special gaming state.
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the receiving state. 71) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the special gaming state, the first special gaming state (special gaming state corresponding to the jackpot result) and the second special gaming state (special) in which the variable entry portion is in the receiving state for a shorter period than the first special gaming state. (Special game state corresponding to the winning result) is provided,
The first judgment information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and the second judgment information (random number group corresponding to the special hit result) are provided as the predetermined judgment information.
The special game state transition means
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the first determination result (big hit result) corresponding to the first determination information, the means for shifting to the first special gaming state and
It has a means for shifting to the second special gaming state when the determination result by the determination means becomes the second determination result (special hit result) corresponding to the second determination information.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state are longer than those of the first switching mode. There is a second switching mode (high frequency support mode).
As a determination mode (lottery mode) in which the determination is performed by the determination means, a low probability mode in which the probability of the first determination result corresponding to the first determination information is relatively low and the determination mode corresponding to the first determination information are supported. There is a high probability mode in which the probability of becoming the first judgment result is relatively high.
As the predetermined gaming state, the first gaming state (first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode and the low probability mode, and the first gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode and the high probability mode. A second gaming state (second normal gaming state) set so that the frequency of the second determination result is higher than that of the second determination result, and a third gaming state (third) corresponding to the second switching mode and the low probability mode. 3 Normal game state) is provided,
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first determination information in the second gaming state, the first transition to shift to the third gaming state after the end of the first special gaming state. Means and
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first determination information in the third gaming state shifted from the second gaming state by the first transition means, the first special gaming state The gaming machine is characterized by comprising a second transition means for transitioning to another predetermined gaming state (for example, a fourth normal gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the two gaming states.

A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine may be provided with a second gaming state (so-called time saving) corresponding to a second switching mode and a low probability mode. In such a gaming state, there is a so-called pullback chance, and it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from rapidly decreasing due to the end of the first special gaming state. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, when the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained in the third game state, the second judgment result frequently occurs, so that the game is played while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held. You can proceed. When the first determination result is obtained in the third game state, the game shifts to another predetermined game state that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state (second game state) before the transition to the third game state. .. With such a configuration, it is possible to dramatically improve the degree of attention of the player to the game in the third game state.

Feature C6. As the first determination result, the high-probability mode correspondence result (probability variation jackpot result) corresponding to the transition to the high-probability mode and the low-probability mode correspondence result (normal jackpot result) corresponding to the transition to the low-probability mode are It is provided,
The first transition means shifts to the second gaming state after the end of the first special gaming state when the determination result by the determination means becomes the result corresponding to the low probability mode in the second gaming state. It is composed and
The second transition means is said to be special when the determination result by the determination means becomes the high probability mode correspondence result in the third gaming state in which the first transition means has transitioned from the second gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature C5, which is configured to shift to the other predetermined gaming state after the end of the gaming state.

According to the feature C6, when the result of the low probability mode correspondence result in the second game state and the state shifts to the third game state, the state shifts to another predetermined game state which is more advantageous to the player than the second game state. It will be a chance. With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably suppress that the low probability mode correspondence result during the second gaming state and the termination of the second gaming state become a factor that lowers the player's motivation to play.

Feature C7. When the determination result by the determination means becomes the first determination result, the ratio of the first determination result being the high probability mode correspondence result is higher than the ratio of the low probability mode correspondence result. Ori,
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the high probability mode correspondence result in the second gaming state, the third transition means for shifting to the second gaming state after the end of the first special gaming state, and
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the low probability mode correspondence result in the third gaming state shifted from the second gaming state by the first transition means, the third after the end of the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature C6, which comprises a fourth transition means for transitioning to a gaming state.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, when the high probability mode correspondence result is obtained in the second game state, the game returns to the second game state, and when the low probability mode correspondence result is obtained, the third game state is obtained. Move to. Therefore, the probability that the second gaming state is repeated is relatively high, and the probability of being promoted to the third gaming state is relatively low. On the other hand, if the result corresponds to the high probability mode in the third game state, the player is promoted to another predetermined game state, and if the result corresponds to the low probability mode, the player returns to the third game state. Therefore, the probability that the third gaming state is repeated is relatively low, and the probability of being promoted to another predetermined gaming state is relatively high. With such a configuration, while raising the hurdle when promoting from the second gaming state to the third gaming state, lowering the hurdle when promoting from the third gaming state to another predetermined gaming state, the third game It is preferable to raise the expectation in the state.

Feature C8. In the second gaming state, the probability that the second determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained is higher than in the first gaming state, so that the number of gaming balls launched by the gaming ball launching means is increased. The ratio of the number of game balls paid out by the payout means to the number of game balls paid out by the payout means to the number of game balls fired by the game ball launching means in the first gaming state. It is configured to be higher than the percentage
In the third gaming state, the ratio of the number of game balls paid out by the payout means to the number of game balls fired by the game ball launching means by the second switching mode is the first. 2 The feature C5 is characterized in that it is configured to be higher than the ratio of the number of game balls paid out by the payout means to the number of game balls fired by the game ball launching means in the game state. The gaming machine according to any one of the features C7.

According to feature C8, the ratio of the number of game balls paid out by the payout means to the number of fired game balls, that is, the value obtained by dividing the number of game balls paid out by the number of game balls fired, that is, the number of payouts. Is divided by the number of shots (hereinafter referred to as the base) so that the value increases in the order of the first game state <second game state <third game state. If the result corresponds to the low probability mode in the second game state, the game shifts to the third game state, but in this third game state, the base is higher than in the second game state, and the player has The decrease of balls can be further suppressed. With such a configuration, it is possible to expect the player to shift to the third gaming state, and it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the degree of attention to the game.

Feature C9. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launch mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on the operation of the player, and
With a payout means (pain device 222) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry unit (actuated ball entry units 62, 63 and variable winning devices 64, 65) provided in the game area. It is a game machine equipped with
Special information acquisition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry unit (actuated ball entry units 62, 63) as the ball entry unit. A function to execute the process of acquiring pending information) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means (for lottery in MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to the jackpot result). (Function to execute the processing of) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the result of the determination is As a result of the notification corresponding to the above, the end of the game round operation is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The game time control means (a function of executing the game time control process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that controls the predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the operation port), and
Based on the determination result by the determination means being the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means being completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). A special game state transition means (a function of executing the game state transition process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that shifts to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state).
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning devices 64, 65) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing the opening / closing process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the game shifts to the special gaming state.
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the receiving state. 71) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the special gaming state, the first special gaming state (special gaming state corresponding to the jackpot result) and the second special gaming state (special) in which the variable entry portion is in the receiving state for a shorter period than the first special gaming state. (Special game state corresponding to the winning result) is provided,
The first judgment information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and the second judgment information (random number group corresponding to the special hit result) are provided as the predetermined judgment information.
The special game state transition means
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the first determination result (big hit result) corresponding to the first determination information, the means for shifting to the first special gaming state and
It has a means for shifting to the second special gaming state when the determination result by the determination means becomes the second determination result (special hit result) corresponding to the second determination information.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state are longer than those of the first switching mode. There is a second switching mode (high frequency support mode).
As a determination mode (lottery mode) in which the determination is performed by the determination means, a low probability mode in which the probability of the first determination result corresponding to the first determination information is relatively low and the determination mode corresponding to the first determination information are supported. There is a high probability mode in which the probability of becoming the first judgment result is relatively high.
As the predetermined gaming state, the first gaming state (first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode and the low probability mode, and the first gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode and the high probability mode. A second gaming state (second normal gaming state) set so that the frequency of the second determination result is higher than that of the second determination result, and a third gaming state (third) corresponding to the second switching mode and the low probability mode. 3 Normal game state) is provided,
As the first determination result, the high-probability mode correspondence result (probability variation jackpot result) corresponding to the transition to the high-probability mode and the low-probability mode correspondence result (normal jackpot result) corresponding to the transition to the low-probability mode are It is provided,
After the end of the first special gaming state, when the determination result by the determination means becomes the high probability mode correspondence result and the number of consecutive times of the high probability mode correspondence result reaches a predetermined number in the second gaming state. The first transition means for transitioning to the third gaming state and
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the high probability mode correspondence result in the third gaming state shifted from the second gaming state by the first transition means, the second after the end of the special gaming state. A gaming machine characterized in that it includes a second transition means for transitioning to another predetermined gaming state (for example, a fourth normal gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the gaming state.

A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine may be provided with a third gaming state (so-called time saving) corresponding to a second switching mode and a low probability mode. In such a gaming state, there is a so-called pullback chance, and it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from rapidly decreasing due to the end of the special gaming state. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature,
By shifting from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, the second determination result is likely to be obtained, and the game can be advanced while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held. In this state, when the number of consecutive high-probability mode correspondence results reaches a predetermined number, the game shifts to the third gaming state. When the high probability mode correspondence result is obtained in the third game state, the state shifts to another predetermined game state which is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state (second game state) before the state shifts to the third game state. With such a configuration, it is possible to dramatically improve the degree of attention of the player to the game in the third game state.

Feature C10. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launch mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on the operation of the player, and
With a payout means (pain device 222) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry unit (actuated ball entry units 62, 63 and variable winning devices 64, 65) provided in the game area. It is a game machine equipped with
Special information acquisition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry unit (actuated ball entry units 62, 63) as the ball entry unit. A function to execute the process of acquiring pending information) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means (for lottery in MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to the jackpot result). (Function to execute the processing of) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the result of the determination is As a result of the notification corresponding to the above, the end of the game round operation is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The game time control means (a function of executing the game time control process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that controls the predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the operation port), and
Based on the determination result by the determination means being the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means being completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). A special game state transition means (a function of executing the game state transition process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that shifts to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state).
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning devices 64, 65) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing the opening / closing process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the game shifts to the special gaming state.
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the receiving state. 71) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the special gaming state, the first special gaming state (special gaming state corresponding to the jackpot result) and the second special gaming state (special) in which the variable entry portion is in the receiving state for a shorter period than the first special gaming state. (Special game state corresponding to the winning result) is provided,
The first judgment information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and the second judgment information (random number group corresponding to the special hit result) are provided as the predetermined judgment information.
The special game state transition means
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the first determination result (big hit result) corresponding to the first determination information, the means for shifting to the first special gaming state and
It has a means for shifting to the second special gaming state when the determination result by the determination means becomes the second determination result (special hit result) corresponding to the second determination information.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state are longer than those of the first switching mode. There is a second switching mode (high frequency support mode).
As a determination mode (lottery mode) in which the determination is performed by the determination means, a low probability mode in which the probability of the first determination result corresponding to the first determination information is relatively low and the determination mode corresponding to the first determination information are supported. There is a high probability mode in which the probability of becoming the first judgment result is relatively high.
As the predetermined gaming state, the first gaming state (first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode and the low probability mode, and the first gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode and the high probability mode. A second gaming state (second normal gaming state) is provided so that the frequency of the second determination result is higher than that of the second game state.
As the first determination result, the high-probability mode correspondence result (probability variation jackpot result) corresponding to the transition to the high-probability mode and the low-probability mode correspondence result (normal jackpot result) corresponding to the transition to the low-probability mode are It is provided,
After the end of the first special gaming state, when the determination result by the determination means becomes the high probability mode correspondence result and the number of consecutive times that the high probability mode correspondence result reaches a predetermined number in the second gaming state A gaming machine characterized in that it includes means for shifting to a predetermined gaming state different from the second gaming state.

A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine may be provided with a second gaming state (so-called small hit RUSH) corresponding to a second switching mode and a low probability mode. Despite the transition to such a gaming state, it is feared that the termination of the second gaming state shortly after enjoying the game in the second gaming state will be a factor that lowers the player's willingness to play. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, when the number of consecutive times that the high probability mode correspondence result reaches a predetermined number in the second game state, the game shifts to another predetermined game state through the first special game state. With the configuration, the above concerns can be preferably dispelled.

In addition, each technical idea shown in feature C1 to feature C9 may be applied to feature C10.

Further, each technical idea shown in the features C1 to C10 may be applied to the above-mentioned features A to B.

<Feature D group>
The following feature D group is described in that "a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board in which a game area is formed and a game ball launching means for launching a game ball into the game area based on a launch operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry portion provided in a game area, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out and other benefits are given to the player. Regarding the background technology of "(for example, see Patent Document 1)", there is an invention that "in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the degree of attention to the game." It was made with the problem to be solved.

Feature D1. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on a player's operation. It is a gaming machine equipped with
In the special information acquisition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry unit (actuated ball entry unit 62, 63) provided in the game area. (A function to execute the process of acquiring the pending information) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means (for lottery in MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to the jackpot result). (Function to execute the processing of) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the result of the determination is As a result of the notification corresponding to the above, the end of the game round operation is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The game times control means for controlling the predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the operation port), and
Based on the determination result by the determination means being the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means being completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). A special game state transition means (a function of executing the game state transition process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that shifts to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). Prepare,
As the determination mode (lottery mode) in which the determination is performed by the determination means, the low probability mode in which the probability of the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively low and the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information are obtained. There is a high probability mode with a relatively high probability,
As the predetermined determination information, first information (normal random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and second information (random number group corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result) are provided.
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result (normal jackpot result) corresponding to the first information, after the end of the special gaming state, the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode (for example, the first normal gaming state) is set. Means to migrate and
The determination result by the determination means is the determination result (probability variation jackpot result) corresponding to the second information, and the number of consecutive determinations corresponding to the second information has not reached a predetermined number (for example, 10 times). In this case, after the end of the special gaming state, a means for shifting to a predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode (for example, a second normal gaming state or a fourth normal gaming state), and
When the determination result by the determination means is the determination result corresponding to the second information and the number of consecutive times of the determination result corresponding to the second information reaches the predetermined number, after the end of the special gaming state A means for shifting to a predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode (for example, a first normal gaming state or a third normal gaming state) is provided.
When the first start ball entry unit (first actuated ball entry unit 62) and the first start ball entry unit are determined to correspond to the predetermined determination information as the start entry unit. A second starting ball entry unit (second actuating ball entry unit 63) having a different ratio of the determination result corresponding to the first information and the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is provided.
As the predetermined notification means, a first notification means (display unit D1 for the first operation port) that performs a game rotation operation based on the ball entering the first start ball entry unit, and the second start ball entry unit. A second notification means (display unit D2 for the second operation port) that performs a game rotation operation based on the entry into the ball is provided.
The game rotation control means can execute the game rotation operation on one of the first notification means and the second notification means during the game rotation operation on the other.
The game rotation control means has an execution period determining means (a function of determining a variable display time by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining an execution period of the game rotation operation.
The first determination mode (for example, a function of specifying the variation display time table referred to in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 for each gaming state) as the determination mode for determining the execution period of the game rotation operation by the execution period determination means (for example, The difference between the function of referring to the variable display time table corresponding to the fourth normal gaming state), the execution period of the game rotation operation in the first notification means, and the execution period of the game rotation operation in the second notification means is described above. A second determination mode (for example, a function of referring to a variable display time table corresponding to the second normal gaming state) is provided to determine the execution period differently from the first determination mode.
As the predetermined gaming state, a first high-probability gaming state (fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the high-probability mode and a second high-probability gaming state (second normal gaming state) corresponding to the high-probability mode are provided. And
The determination mode switching means for switching the determination mode by the execution period determination means to the first determination mode in the first high-probability gaming state and the second determination mode in the second high-probability gaming state is provided. A gaming machine characterized by being.

According to the feature D1, the first high-probability gaming state corresponds to the first determination mode, and the second high-probability gaming state corresponds to the second determination mode. In the first high-probability gaming state, the first high-probability gaming state ends when the number of consecutive judgment results corresponding to the second information becomes a predetermined number, and the judgment result corresponding to the second information also in the second high-probability gaming state. When the number of consecutive times of is a predetermined number, the second high-probability gaming state ends. Here, the first start ball entry section and the second start ball entry section have different proportions of the determination results corresponding to the first determination information and the determination results corresponding to the second determination information (the advantages are different). There is). Therefore, both the first high-probability gaming state and the second high-probability gaming state are the same in that each high-probability gaming state ends when the number of consecutive determination results corresponding to the second information reaches a predetermined number. However, the advantages in the process are different. In this way, by providing a difference between advantages and disadvantages for each of the two loop-type high-probability gaming states, an unprecedented novel game becomes possible. This can contribute to increasing the degree of attention to the game.

Feature D2. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on a player's operation. It is a gaming machine equipped with
In the special information acquisition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry unit (actuated ball entry unit 62, 63) provided in the game area. (A function to execute the process of acquiring the pending information) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means (for lottery in MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to the jackpot result). (Function to execute the processing of) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the result of the determination is As a result of the notification corresponding to the above, the end of the game round operation is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The game times control means for controlling the predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the operation port), and
Based on the determination result by the determination means being the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means being completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). A special game state transition means (a function of executing the game state transition process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that shifts to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). Prepare,
As the determination mode (lottery mode) in which the determination is performed by the determination means, the low probability mode in which the probability of the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively low and the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information are obtained. There is a high probability mode with a relatively high probability,
As the predetermined determination information, first information (normal random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and second information (random number group corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result) are provided.
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result (normal jackpot result) corresponding to the first information, after the end of the special gaming state, the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode (for example, the first normal gaming state) is set. Means to migrate and
The determination result by the determination means is the determination result (probability variation jackpot result) corresponding to the second information, and the number of consecutive determinations corresponding to the second information has not reached a predetermined number (for example, 10 times). In this case, after the end of the special gaming state, a means for shifting to a predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode (for example, a second normal gaming state or a fourth normal gaming state), and
When the determination result by the determination means is the determination result corresponding to the second information and the number of consecutive times of the determination result corresponding to the second information reaches the predetermined number, after the end of the special gaming state A means for shifting to a predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode (for example, a first normal gaming state or a third normal gaming state) is provided.
As the start ball entry unit, the first start ball entry unit (first actuating ball entry unit 62) and the first start ball entry unit correspond to the determination result corresponding to the first information and the second information. A second starting ball entry section (second actuating ball entry section 63) having a different ratio of judgment results is provided.
As the predetermined notification means, a first notification means (display unit D1 for the first operation port) that performs a game rotation operation based on the ball entering the first start ball entry unit, and the second start ball entry unit. A second notification means (display unit D2 for the second operation port) that performs a game rotation operation based on the entry into the ball is provided.
The game rotation control means can execute the game rotation operation on one of the first notification means and the second notification means during the game rotation operation on the other.
The game rotation control means has an execution period determining means (a function of determining a variable display time by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining an execution period of the game rotation operation.
The first notification means has a determination mode (a function of specifying a variation display time table referred to in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 for each game state) for determining the execution period of the game rotation operation by the execution period determining means. The first determination mode (for example, the variable display time corresponding to the fourth normal game state) for determining the execution period so that the execution period of the game rotation operation is shorter than the execution period of the game rotation operation in the second notification means. The function of referring to the table) and the second determination to determine the execution period so that the execution period of the game rotation operation in the first notification means is longer than the execution period of the game rotation operation in the second notification means. A mode (for example, a function of referring to a variable display time table corresponding to the second normal game state) is provided.
As the predetermined gaming state, a first high-probability gaming state (fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the high-probability mode and a second high-probability gaming state (second normal gaming state) corresponding to the high-probability mode are provided. And
The determination mode switching means for switching the determination mode by the execution period determination means to the first determination mode in the first high-probability gaming state and the second determination mode in the second high-probability gaming state is provided. A gaming machine characterized by being.

According to the feature D2, since the first high-probability gaming state corresponds to the first determination mode, the game proceeds mainly with the game rotation operation related to the first starting ball entry portion. On the other hand, since the second high-probability gaming state corresponds to the second determination mode, the game proceeds mainly with the game rotation operation related to the second starting ball entry portion. In the first high-probability gaming state, the first high-probability gaming state ends when the number of consecutive judgment results corresponding to the second information becomes a predetermined number, and the judgment result corresponding to the second information also in the second high-probability gaming state. When the number of consecutive times of is a predetermined number, the second high-probability gaming state ends. Here, the first start ball entry section and the second start ball entry section have different proportions of determination results corresponding to the first and second information. Therefore, the probability that the number of consecutive determination results corresponding to the second information reaches a predetermined number in the first high-probability gaming state (completion probability) and the determination result corresponding to the second information in the second high-probability gaming state. The probability that the number of consecutive runs will reach a predetermined number (probability of completing the race) will be different. In this way, by making the completion probability different for each of the two high-probability gaming states, an unprecedented novel game becomes possible. This can contribute to increasing the degree of attention to the game.

Feature D3. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on a player's operation. It is a gaming machine equipped with
In the special information acquisition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry unit (actuated ball entry unit 62, 63) provided in the game area. (A function to execute the process of acquiring the pending information) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means (for lottery in MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to the jackpot result). (Function to execute the processing of) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the result of the determination is As a result of the notification corresponding to the above, the end of the game round operation is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The game times control means for controlling the predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the operation port), and
Based on the determination result by the determination means being the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means being completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). A special game state transition means (a function of executing the game state transition process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that shifts to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). Prepare,
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the receiving state. 71) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the first switching mode are different in the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state. A second switching mode (high frequency support mode) is provided.
As the determination mode (lottery mode) in which the determination is performed by the determination means, the low probability mode in which the probability of the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively low and the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information are obtained. There is a high probability mode with a relatively high probability,
As the predetermined determination information, first information (normal random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and second information (random number group corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result) are provided.
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result (normal jackpot result) corresponding to the first information, after the end of the special gaming state, the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode (for example, the first normal gaming state) is set. Means to migrate and
The determination result by the determination means is the determination result (probability variation jackpot result) corresponding to the second information, and the number of consecutive determinations corresponding to the second information has not reached a predetermined number (for example, 10 times). In this case, after the end of the special gaming state, a means for shifting to a predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode (for example, a second normal gaming state or a fourth normal gaming state), and
When the determination result by the determination means is the determination result corresponding to the second information and the number of consecutive times of the determination result corresponding to the second information reaches the predetermined number, after the end of the special gaming state A means for shifting to a predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode (for example, a first normal gaming state or a third normal gaming state) is provided.
As the start ball entry unit, the first start ball entry unit (first actuating ball entry unit 62) and the first start ball entry unit correspond to the determination result corresponding to the first information and the second information. A second starting ball entry section (second actuating ball entry section 63) having a different ratio of judgment results is provided.
As the predetermined notification means, a first notification means (display unit D1 for the first operation port) that performs a game rotation operation based on the ball entering the first start ball entry unit, and the second start ball entry unit. A second notification means (display unit D2 for the second operation port) that performs a game rotation operation based on the entry into the ball is provided.
The game rotation control means can execute the game rotation operation on one of the first notification means and the second notification means during the game rotation operation on the other.
The game rotation control means has an execution period determining means (a function of determining a variable display time by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining an execution period of the game rotation operation.
The first notification means has a determination mode (a function of specifying a variation display time table referred to in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 for each game state) for determining the execution period of the game rotation operation by the execution period determining means. The first determination mode (for example, the variable display time corresponding to the fourth normal game state) for determining the execution period so that the execution period of the game rotation operation is shorter than the execution period of the game rotation operation in the second notification means. The function of referring to the table) and the second determination to determine the execution period so that the execution period of the game rotation operation in the first notification means is longer than the execution period of the game rotation operation in the second notification means. A mode (for example, a function of referring to a variable display time table corresponding to the second normal game state) is provided.
The predetermined gaming states include a first high-probability gaming state (fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the second switching mode and the high-probability mode, and a second high-probability gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode and the high-probability mode. (Second normal game state) is provided,
The determination mode switching means for switching the determination mode by the execution period determination means to the first determination mode in the first high-probability gaming state and the second determination mode in the second high-probability gaming state is provided. A gaming machine characterized by being.

According to the feature D3, since the first high-probability gaming state corresponds to the first determination mode, the game proceeds mainly with the game rotation operation related to the first starting ball entry portion. On the other hand, since the second high-probability gaming state corresponds to the second determination mode, the game proceeds mainly with the game rotation operation related to the second starting ball entry portion. In the second high-probability gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode and the high-probability mode, the second high-probability gaming state ends when the number of consecutive determination results corresponding to the second information reaches a predetermined number, and the second switching mode and high probability are achieved. Regarding the first high-probability gaming state corresponding to the probability mode, the first high-probability gaming state ends when the number of consecutive determination results corresponding to the second information becomes a predetermined number. Here, the first start ball entry section and the second start ball entry section have different proportions of determination results corresponding to the first and second information. Therefore, the probability that the number of consecutive determination results corresponding to the second information reaches a predetermined number in the first high-probability gaming state (completion probability) and the determination result corresponding to the second information in the second high-probability gaming state. The probability that the number of consecutive runs will reach a predetermined number (probability of completing the race) will be different. In this way, by making the completion probability different for each of the two game states corresponding to the high probability mode, a novel game that has never existed becomes possible. This can contribute to increasing the degree of attention to the game.

Feature D4. The switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism is configured so that the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer in the second switching mode than in the first switching mode. Has been
The ratio of the determination result corresponding to the second information based on the entry into the first start ball entry portion corresponds to the second information based on the entry into the second start entry section. The gaming machine according to feature D3, wherein the gaming machine is configured to be larger than the ratio of the determination result.

According to the feature D4, the completion probability described above is higher in the first high-probability gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode than in the second high-probability gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode. With such a configuration, the superiority of the first high-probability gaming state over the second high-probability gaming state is clarified, and the satisfaction level of the player when shifting to the first high-probability gaming state is suitably improved. Can be made to.

Feature D5. The switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism is configured so that the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer in the second switching mode than in the first switching mode. Has been
The ratio of the determination result corresponding to the second information based on the entry into the first start ball entry portion corresponds to the second information based on the entry into the second start entry section. The gaming machine according to feature D3, wherein the gaming machine is configured to be smaller than the ratio of the determination result.

According to the feature D5, the completion probability described above is lower in the first high-probability gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode than in the second high-probability gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode. In the first high-probability gaming state, the frequency of entering the game ball can be increased by the second switching mode, but in such a situation, by lowering the completion probability, the gambling in the first high-probability gaming state can be improved. It is possible to prevent it from becoming excessively high.

Feature D6. A payout means (payout device 222) for paying out the game ball when the ball enters the ball entry portion provided in the game area.
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning devices 64, 65) and
It is provided with a control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing opening / closing processing by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the special gaming state is entered. ,
The variable ball entry section is included in the ball entry section.
Based on the special gaming state that shifts when the determination result corresponding to the second information is obtained by the determination based on the entry into the first starting ball entry section, and the entry into the second starting ball entry section. The special gaming state that shifts when the determination results in the determination result corresponding to the second information is characterized in that the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout means is different. The gaming machine according to any one of D2 to D5.

According to the feature D6, the number of prize balls based on the entry into the variable entry portion can be made different between the completion of the second gaming state and the completion of the third gaming state. According to such a configuration, when the two loop-type high-probability gaming states are used in combination, the difference in superiority between the two states can be increased.

Feature D7. In the first determination mode, each game rotation is performed so that a plurality of game rotation operations can be executed by the first notification means while one game rotation operation is being executed by the second notification means. There is a difference in the execution period of the operation,
In the second determination mode, each game rotation is performed so that a plurality of game rotation operations can be executed by the second notification means while one game rotation operation is being executed by the first notification means. The gaming machine according to any one of feature D3 to feature D6, wherein a difference is provided in the execution period of the operation.

By providing a clear difference in the execution period of each game rotation operation as shown in this feature, the effect shown in feature D3 and the like can be suitably exhibited.

Feature D8. In the first determination mode, the determination result corresponding to the second information is based on the ball entering the first start ball entry section while the game rotation operation of 1 is being executed by the second notification means. There is a difference in the execution period of each game rounding operation so that the continuous number of times becomes can reach a predetermined number of times.
In the second determination mode, the determination result corresponding to the second information is based on the ball entering the second start ball entry section while the game rotation operation of 1 is being executed by the first notification means. The gaming machine according to any one of the features D2 to D6, wherein a difference is provided in the execution period of each gaming rotation operation so that the number of consecutive times becomes can reach the predetermined number of times. ..

With the configuration shown in this feature, for example, during the second high-probability gaming state, the game rotation operation by the first start ball entry unit may end (interruption of the game rotation related to the first start ball entry unit may occur). ), It is possible to suppress the end of the game rotation operation by the second start ball entry unit (interruption of the game rotation related to the second start ball entry unit) during the first high-probability game state. This is preferable in order to reflect the difference in advantage between the first starting ball entering portion and the second starting ball entering portion in the first / second high-probability gaming state.

Feature D9. The switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism is configured so that the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer in the second switching mode than in the first switching mode. Has been
A payout means (payout device 222) for paying out the game ball when the ball enters the ball entry portion provided in the game area.
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning devices 64, 65) and
It is provided with a control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing opening / closing processing by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the special gaming state is entered. ,
The ball entry section includes the variable ball entry section and the start ball entry section.
The number of game balls paid out with respect to the number of game balls launched by the game ball launching means between the transition to the first high-probability gaming state and the end of the first high-probability gaming state, and the second The number of game balls paid out with respect to the number of game balls launched by the game ball launching means from the transition to the high-probability gaming state to the end of the second high-probability gaming state is the first switching mode and the above. The number of game balls paid out is larger than the number of game balls fired by the game ball launching means between the transition to the low-probability game state corresponding to the low-probability mode and the end of the low-probability game state. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature D2 to the feature D8, which is configured as described above.

Since both the first high-probability gaming state and the second high-probability gaming state correspond to the high-probability mode, the probability of winning is higher than that of the low-probability gaming state, but the judgment corresponding to the second information. If the results are continuous, the possibility of accidental large fits cannot be ruled out. When such a fit occurs, a dilemma may arise in which the game cannot be completed because the player is in the high-probability mode although the investment is high. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if the number of payouts is larger in each of the 1st and 2nd high-probability gaming states than in the low-probability 1-game state, two loop-type high-probability gaming states are used. The above-mentioned adverse effects due to the combined use can be reduced.

Feature D10. A payout means (payout device 222) for paying out a game ball when a ball enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area is provided, and the variable entry portion and the start ball entry portion are provided in the entry portion. Is included,
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the receiving state. 71) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state are longer than those of the first switching mode. There is a second switching mode (high frequency support mode).
The second high-probability gaming state is a predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode and the high-probability mode, and the first high-probability gaming state is a predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode and the high-probability mode. Is in a state
As the special gaming state, a first special gaming state (a special gaming state corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second special gaming state in which the variable input portion is in the receiving state for a shorter period than the first special gaming state ( (Special game state for special hit results) is provided,
As the predetermined determination information, third information (random number group corresponding to the special hit result) is provided in addition to the first information and the second information.
The special game state transition means
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first information or the second information, the means for shifting to the first special gaming state and the means.
It has a means for shifting to the second special gaming state when the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the third information.
The determination based on the entry into the second starting ball entry section is configured so that the probability of the determination result corresponding to the third information is higher than the determination based on the entry into the first starting ball entry section. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature D2 to the feature D9.

According to the feature D10, in the first high-probability gaming state, the reduction of the number of balls held is suppressed by the benefit of the second switching mode, and in the second high-probability gaming state, the game progresses although it corresponds to the first switching mode. The reduction of the number of balls held is suppressed by facilitating the transition to the second special gaming state by entering the ball into the second starting ball entry portion, which is the main of the above. Then, in the first high-probability gaming state, the transition to the second special gaming state is not performed or is reduced by entering the ball into the first starting ball entry portion, which is the main game progress. Therefore, it is possible to avoid excessive payout of game balls in the first high-probability gaming state. With such a configuration, the harmful effects (see feature D9) caused by the combined use of the two loop-type high-probability gaming states can be alleviated.

Feature D11. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on a player's operation. It is a gaming machine equipped with
In the special information acquisition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry unit (actuated ball entry unit 62, 63) provided in the game area. (A function to execute the process of acquiring the pending information) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means (for lottery in MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to the jackpot result). (Function to execute the processing of) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the result of the determination is As a result of the notification corresponding to the above, the end of the game round operation is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The game times control means for controlling the predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the operation port), and
Based on the determination result by the determination means being the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means being completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). A special game state transition means (a function of executing the game state transition process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that shifts to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). Prepare,
As the determination mode (lottery mode) in which the determination is performed by the determination means, the low probability mode in which the probability of the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively low and the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information are obtained. There is a high probability mode with a relatively high probability,
As the predetermined determination information, first information (normal random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and second information (random number group corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result) are provided.
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result (normal jackpot result) corresponding to the first information, after the end of the special gaming state, the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode (for example, the first normal gaming state) is set. The first migration method to be migrated and
The determination result by the determination means is the determination result (probability variation jackpot result) corresponding to the second information, and the number of consecutive determinations corresponding to the second information has not reached a predetermined number (for example, 10 times). In this case, a second transition means for shifting to a predetermined gaming state (for example, a second normal gaming state or a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the high probability mode after the end of the special gaming state is provided.
As the start ball entry unit, the first start ball entry unit (first actuating ball entry unit 62) and the first start ball entry unit correspond to the determination result corresponding to the first information and the second information. A second starting ball entry section (second actuating ball entry section 63) having a different ratio of judgment results is provided.
As the predetermined notification means, a first notification means (display unit D1 for the first operation port) that performs a game rotation operation based on the ball entering the first start ball entry unit, and the second start ball entry unit. A second notification means (display unit D2 for the second operation port) that performs a game rotation operation based on the entry into the ball is provided.
The game rotation control means can execute the game rotation operation on one of the first notification means and the second notification means during the game rotation operation on the other.
The game rotation control means has an execution period determining means (a function of determining a variable display time by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining an execution period of the game rotation operation.
The first notification means has a determination mode (a function of specifying a variation display time table referred to in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 for each game state) for determining the execution period of the game rotation operation by the execution period determining means. The first determination mode (for example, the variable display time corresponding to the fourth normal game state) for determining the execution period so that the execution period of the game rotation operation is shorter than the execution period of the game rotation operation in the second notification means. The function of referring to the table) and the second determination to determine the execution period so that the execution period of the game rotation operation in the first notification means is longer than the execution period of the game rotation operation in the second notification means. A mode (for example, a function of referring to a variable display time table corresponding to the second normal game state) is provided.
As the predetermined gaming state, the first gaming state (first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode and the low probability mode and the second gaming state (second) corresponding to the first switching mode and the high probability mode. A normal game state) and a third game state (third normal game state) corresponding to the second switching mode and the high probability mode are provided.
The second transition means is
In the second gaming state, the number of consecutive times in which the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result (probability variation jackpot result) corresponding to the second information and the determination result corresponds to the second information is the predetermined number. When the number reaches a predetermined number, a means for shifting to a predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode (for example, a second normal gaming state or a fourth normal gaming state) after the end of the special gaming state, and
In the third gaming state, the number of consecutive times in which the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result (probability variation jackpot result) corresponding to the second information and the determination result corresponds to the second information is the predetermined number. 2 It has a means for shifting to a predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode (for example, a second normal gaming state or a fourth normal gaming state) after the end of the special gaming state when the number reaches a predetermined number.
The determination mode by the execution period determination means becomes the first determination mode in the first gaming state, the second determination mode in the second gaming state, and the first determination mode in the third gaming state. A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with a determination mode switching means for switching.

According to the feature D11, since the first game state and the third game state correspond to the first determination mode, the game proceeds mainly with the game rotation operation related to the first start ball entry portion. On the other hand, since the second game state corresponds to the second determination mode, the game proceeds mainly with the game rotation operation related to the second start ball entry portion. In the second gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode and the high probability mode, the second gaming state ends when the number of consecutive determination results corresponding to the second information becomes the first predetermined number, and the second switching mode and the high probability mode Regarding the corresponding third gaming state, the third gaming state ends when the number of consecutive determination results corresponding to the second information becomes the second predetermined number. Here, the first start ball entry section and the second start ball entry section have different proportions of determination results corresponding to the first and second information. Further, in the second gaming state and the third gaming state, the upper limit of the number of consecutive games is different between the first predetermined number and the second predetermined number. By providing a difference between the flow of the game in the second game state and the flow of the game in the third game state in this way, an unprecedented novel game is realized and the degree of attention to the game is improved. ing.

Feature D12. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on a player's operation. It is a gaming machine equipped with
In the special information acquisition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry unit (actuated ball entry unit 62, 63) provided in the game area. (A function to execute the process of acquiring the pending information) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means (for lottery in MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to the jackpot result). (Function to execute the processing of) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the result of the determination is As a result of the notification corresponding to the above, the end of the game round operation is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The game times control means for controlling the predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the operation port), and
Based on the determination result by the determination means being the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means being completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). A special game state transition means (a function of executing the game state transition process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that shifts to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). Prepare,
As the determination mode (lottery mode) in which the determination is performed by the determination means, the low probability mode in which the probability of the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively low and the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information are obtained. There is a high probability mode with a relatively high probability,
As the predetermined determination information, first information (normal random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and second information (random number group corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result) are provided.
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result (normal jackpot result) corresponding to the first information, after the end of the special gaming state, the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode (for example, the first normal gaming state) is set. The first migration method to be migrated and
The determination result by the determination means is the determination result (probability variation jackpot result) corresponding to the second information, and the number of consecutive determinations corresponding to the second information has not reached a predetermined number (for example, 10 times). In this case, a second transition means for shifting to a predetermined gaming state (for example, a second normal gaming state or a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the high probability mode after the end of the special gaming state is provided.
As the start ball entry unit, the first start ball entry unit (first actuating ball entry unit 62) and the first start ball entry unit correspond to the determination result corresponding to the first information and the second information. A second starting ball entry section (second actuating ball entry section 63) having a different ratio of judgment results is provided.
As the predetermined notification means, a first notification means (display unit D1 for the first operation port) that performs a game rotation operation based on the ball entering the first start ball entry unit, and the second start ball entry unit. A second notification means (display unit D2 for the second operation port) that performs a game rotation operation based on the entry into the ball is provided.
The game rotation control means can execute the game rotation operation on one of the first notification means and the second notification means during the game rotation operation on the other.
The game rotation control means has an execution period determining means (a function of determining a variable display time by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining an execution period of the game rotation operation.
The first notification means has a determination mode (a function of specifying a variation display time table referred to in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 for each game state) for determining the execution period of the game rotation operation by the execution period determining means. The first determination mode (for example, the variable display time corresponding to the fourth normal game state) for determining the execution period so that the execution period of the game rotation operation is shorter than the execution period of the game rotation operation in the second notification means. The function of referring to the table) and the second determination to determine the execution period so that the execution period of the game rotation operation in the first notification means is longer than the execution period of the game rotation operation in the second notification means. A mode (for example, a function of referring to a variable display time table corresponding to the second normal game state) is provided.
As the predetermined gaming state, the first gaming state (first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode and the low probability mode and the second gaming state (second) corresponding to the first switching mode and the high probability mode. A third gaming state (third normal gaming state) corresponding to the second switching mode and the low probability mode, and a third gaming state (fourth) corresponding to the second switching mode and the high probability mode. (Normal game state) is provided,
The second transition means is
In the second gaming state, the number of consecutive times in which the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result (probability variation jackpot result) corresponding to the second information and the determination result corresponds to the second information is the predetermined number. 1 Means for shifting to the second gaming state after the end of the special gaming state when the predetermined number has not been reached, and
In the fourth game state, the number of consecutive times in which the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result (probability variation jackpot result) corresponding to the second information and the determination result corresponds to the second information is the predetermined number. 2 It has a means for shifting to the fourth gaming state after the end of the special gaming state when the predetermined number has not been reached.
The first transition means is
In the second gaming state, the number of consecutive times in which the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result (probability variation jackpot result) corresponding to the second information and the determination result corresponds to the second information is the predetermined number. When the number reaches a predetermined number, means for shifting to the first gaming state after the end of the special gaming state, and
In the fourth game state, the number of consecutive times in which the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result (probability variation jackpot result) corresponding to the second information and the determination result corresponds to the second information is the predetermined number. 2 Provided with a means for shifting to the third gaming state after the end of the special gaming state when the number reaches a predetermined number.
The determination mode switching means for switching the determination mode by the execution period determination means to the second determination mode in the second gaming state and the first determination mode in the fourth gaming state is provided. A featured gaming machine.

According to the feature D12, since the second game state corresponds to the second determination mode, the game proceeds mainly with the game rotation operation related to the first start ball entry portion. On the other hand, since the fourth game state corresponds to the first determination mode, the game proceeds mainly with the game rotation operation related to the second start ball entry portion. In the second gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode and the high probability mode, the second gaming state ends when the number of consecutive determination results corresponding to the second information becomes the first predetermined number, and the second switching mode and the high probability mode Regarding the corresponding fourth gaming state, the fourth gaming state ends when the number of consecutive determination results corresponding to the second information becomes the second predetermined number. Here, the first start ball entry section and the second start ball entry section have different proportions of determination results corresponding to the first and second information. Further, in the second gaming state and the fourth gaming state, the upper limit of the number of consecutive games is different between the first predetermined number and the second predetermined number. By providing a difference between the flow of the game in the second game state and the flow of the game in the fourth game state in this way, an unprecedented novel game is realized and the degree of attention to the game is improved. ing.

Feature D13. The ratio of the determination result corresponding to the second information based on the ball entering the second starting ball entering portion corresponds to the second information based on the ball entering the first starting ball entering portion. It is configured to be smaller than the ratio that will be the judgment result.
The gaming machine according to feature D12, wherein the first predetermined number is a number larger than the second predetermined number.

According to the feature D13, since the ratio of the second information is higher in the first starting ball entry portion, the determination result corresponding to the second information is repeated in the second game state than in the fourth game state. The probability of being lost (probability of continuation) is low. On the other hand, the upper limit of the number of consecutive games is higher in the second game state than in the fourth game state. By reversing the relationship of advantage and disadvantage between the continuation probability and the upper limit in this way, it is possible to prevent the difference in advantage from becoming excessively large for the two loop-type high-probability gaming states.

Feature D14. The ratio of the determination result corresponding to the second information based on the ball entering the second starting ball entering portion corresponds to the second information based on the ball entering the first starting ball entering portion. It is configured to be smaller than the ratio that will be the judgment result.
The gaming machine according to feature D12, wherein the first predetermined number is smaller than the second predetermined number.

According to the feature D14, since the ratio of the second information is higher in the first starting ball entry portion, the determination result corresponding to the second information is repeated in the second game state than in the fourth game state. The probability of being lost (probability of continuation) is low. On the other hand, the upper limit of the number of consecutive games is lower in the second game state than in the fourth game state. By aligning the relationship of advantage and disadvantage with the continuation probability and the upper limit in this way, the difference in advantage between the two loop-type high-probability gaming states can be clarified, and the sharpness of the game can be strengthened.

Feature D15. A feature D12 to a feature D14, wherein the transition from one of the second gaming state and the fourth gaming state to the other is configured to pass through the first gaming state or the third gaming state. The gaming machine described in any one.

As shown in this feature, if a predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode is intervened in the transition between the second gaming state and the fourth gaming state (the determination result corresponding to the first information is intervened), the number of consecutive times is set. Is prevented from being inherited so as to straddle the second game state to the fourth game state, and the effect due to the difference in the predetermined number of times between the second game state and the fourth game state is not exhibited well. Can be suppressed.

Further, the technical ideas shown in the features D1 to D15 may be applied to the above-mentioned features A to C.

<Feature E group>
The following feature group E describes "a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed and a gaming ball launching means for launching a gaming ball into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry portion provided in a game area, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out and other benefits are given to the player. Regarding the background technology of "(for example, see Patent Document 1)", there is an invention that "in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the degree of attention to the game." It was made with the problem to be solved.

Feature E1. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on a player's operation. It is a gaming machine equipped with
In the special information acquisition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry unit (actuated ball entry unit 62, 63) provided in the game area. (A function to execute the process of acquiring the pending information) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means (for lottery in MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to the jackpot result). (Function to execute the processing of) and
The game rotation operation (display of variation in the pattern) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the game rotation is performed as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination. A predetermined notification means (operating port) so that the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with the end of the game round as one time. Game times control means (a function of executing display control of the operation port display units D1 and D2 by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the display units D1 and D2).
The determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, and the gaming state is set to the predetermined gaming state based on the execution of the game rotation operation related to the determination result by the game rotation control means. The game state transition process is executed by the special game state transition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for shifting to the special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state). Function to do) and
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the receiving state. 71) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the non-accepting state period are longer than those of the first switching mode. Two switching modes (high frequency support mode) are provided.
As the determination mode (lottery mode) in which the determination is performed by the determination means, the low probability mode in which the probability of the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively low and the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information are obtained. There is a high probability mode with a relatively high probability,
The first information (normal random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and the second information (random number group corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result) are provided as the predetermined determination information.
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result (normal jackpot result) corresponding to the first information, the first transition means for shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode after the end of the special gaming state, and
The determination result by the determination means is the determination result (probability variation jackpot result) corresponding to the second information, and the number of consecutive determinations corresponding to the second information has not reached a predetermined number (for example, 10 times). In this case, the second transition means for shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode after the end of the special gaming state, and
When the determination result by the determination means is the determination result (probability variation jackpot result) corresponding to the second information and the number of consecutive determination results corresponding to the second information reaches the predetermined number, the said. A third transition means for shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode after the end of the special gaming state is provided.
In the third transition means, in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the first switching mode, the determination result by the determination means is the determination result corresponding to the second information and the determination corresponding to the second information. The determination result by the determination means corresponds to the second information when the number of consecutive results reaches the predetermined number and in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode. Moreover, it is configured so that the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode, which is the transition destination, is different from the case where the number of consecutive times of the determination result corresponding to the second information reaches the predetermined number. A featured gaming machine.

In the gaming machine shown in feature E1, when the determination results (probability variation jackpot results) corresponding to the second information are continuous in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode, and the number of consecutive times reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 times). Is provided with a limiter function that shifts to a predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode. Here, as the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode, a predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the first switching mode and a predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode are provided. The predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode, which is the transition destination, differs depending on which of the two gaming states the limiter is activated. In this way, by making the transition destination after the end of the special gaming state different depending on the gaming state when the above-mentioned continuous number of times reaches a predetermined number, the monotonization of the game is suppressed and the degree of attention to the game is improved. Can contribute to.

Feature E2. In the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode, the number of consecutive times that the determination result by the determination means is the determination result corresponding to the second information and the determination result corresponding to the second information is obtained. In the predetermined gaming state in which the third transition means shifts when the predetermined number is reached, the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the second information in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the first switching mode. It is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the predetermined gaming state that shifts when the number of consecutive times that is the determination result and the determination result corresponding to the second information reaches the predetermined number. Characteristic The gaming machine according to feature E1.

According to the feature E2, when the gaming state when the number of consecutive determination results (probability variation jackpot results) corresponding to the second information reaches a predetermined number is the high probability mode and the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode. In the game, the game state when the number of consecutive determination results (probability variation jackpot results) corresponding to the second information reaches a predetermined number is higher than the case where the game state is the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the first switching mode. It is given preferential treatment to the advantage of the person. In this way, by giving preferential treatment to the transition destination when demoting from the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode (both the determination mode and the switching control mode are advantageous to the player), the predetermined gaming state It is possible to suppress that the end of is a factor that rapidly reduces the player's willingness to play.

Feature E3. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on a player's operation. It is a gaming machine equipped with
In the special information acquisition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry unit (actuated ball entry unit 62, 63) provided in the game area. (A function to execute the process of acquiring the pending information) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means (for lottery in MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to the jackpot result). (Function to execute the processing of) and
The game rotation operation (display of variation in the pattern) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the game rotation is performed as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination. A predetermined notification means (operating port) so that the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with the end of the game round as one time. Game times control means (a function of executing display control of the operation port display units D1 and D2 by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the display units D1 and D2).
The determination result by the determination means becomes a determination result (for example, a jackpot result) corresponding to the predetermined determination information, and the game state is determined based on the execution of the game rotation operation related to the determination result by the game rotation control means. Special game state transition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for shifting to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state). Function to execute migration process) and
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the receiving state. 71) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the non-accepting state period are longer than those of the first switching mode. Two switching modes (high frequency support mode) are provided.
As the determination mode (lottery mode) in which the determination is performed by the determination means, the low probability mode in which the probability of the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively low and the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information are obtained. There is a high probability mode with a relatively high probability,
The first information (normal random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and the second information (random number group corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result) are provided as the predetermined determination information.
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result (normal jackpot result) corresponding to the first information, the first transition means for shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode after the end of the special gaming state, and
The determination result by the determination means is the determination result (probability variation jackpot result) corresponding to the second information, and the number of consecutive determinations corresponding to the second information has not reached a predetermined number (for example, 10 times). In this case, the second transition means for shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode after the end of the special gaming state, and
When the determination result by the determination means is the determination result (probability variation jackpot result) corresponding to the second information and the number of consecutive determination results corresponding to the second information reaches the predetermined number, the said. A third transition means for shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode after the end of the special gaming state is provided.
In the third transition means, in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the first switching mode, the determination result by the determination means is the determination result corresponding to the second information and the determination corresponding to the second information. When the resulting continuous number of times reaches the predetermined number, the game shifts to the predetermined game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the first switching mode, while the predetermined game corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode. In the state, when the determination result by the determination means is the determination result corresponding to the second information and the number of consecutive times of the determination result corresponding to the second information reaches the predetermined number, the low probability mode and A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to shift to a predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode.

In the gaming machine shown in feature E3, when the determination result (probability variation jackpot result) corresponding to the second information is continuous in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode, and the number of consecutive times reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 times). Is provided with a limiter function that shifts to a predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode. Here, as the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode, a predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the first switching mode and a predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode are provided. The predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode, which is the transition destination, differs depending on which of the two gaming states the limiter is activated. In this way, by making the transition destination after the end of the special gaming state different depending on the gaming state when the above-mentioned continuous number of times reaches a predetermined number, the monotonization of the game is suppressed and the degree of attention to the game is improved. Can contribute to.

In addition, when the gaming state when the number of consecutive determination results (probability variation jackpot results) corresponding to the second information reaches a predetermined number is the high probability mode and the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode, the second It is more advantageous for the player than the case where the gaming state when the number of consecutive judgment results (probability variation jackpot results) corresponding to the two information reaches a predetermined number is the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the first switching mode. It will be given preferential treatment. In this way, by giving preferential treatment to the transition destination when demoting from the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode (both the determination mode and the switching control mode are advantageous to the player), the predetermined gaming state It is possible to suppress that the end of is a factor that rapidly reduces the player's willingness to play.

Feature E4. A gaming machine provided with a payout means (payout device 222) for paying out a game ball based on the ball entering the ball entry portion provided in the game area.
The ball entry section includes the start ball entry section.
As the ball entry unit that can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning devices 64, 65) and
It is provided with a control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing opening / closing processing by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the special gaming state is entered. ,
As the special gaming state, a first special gaming state (a special gaming state corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second special gaming state in which the variable input portion is in the receiving state for a shorter period than the first special gaming state. (Special game state corresponding to the special hit result) is provided,
Third information (random number group corresponding to the special hit result) is provided as the predetermined determination information.
The special game state transition means
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result (big hit result) corresponding to the first information or the second information, the means for shifting to the first special gaming state and the means.
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result (special hit result) corresponding to the third information (random number group corresponding to the special hit result), there is a means for shifting to the second special gaming state. And
In the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the first switching mode, from the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the first switching mode and the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature E1 to the feature E3, which is configured to increase the chances of obtaining a determination result corresponding to the third information.

In the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the first switching mode, the chance of the judgment result corresponding to the third information increases, so that the game ball is paid out based on the entry into the variable entry section. Will increase. As a result, the player can proceed with the game while suppressing the investment. On the other hand, in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode, the period during which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state becomes longer, and the chances of entering the starting ball entering portion increase. As a result, the player can proceed with the game while suppressing the investment. In other words, the two high-probability mode-compatible predetermined gaming states shown in this feature are similar in that the game can be advanced while suppressing investment, but the number of balls entering and paying out to the starting ball entry section There is a difference in the relationship between. In other words, a configuration is realized in which it is easy to make a difference in the progress speed of the game for the predetermined game states corresponding to the two high probability modes. Here, regarding the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode, when the number of consecutive times reaches a predetermined number, the ball enters the ball by shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the second switching mode. Can suppress changes in. This is preferable in order to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play. Further, regarding the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the first switching mode, when the number of consecutive times reaches a predetermined number, the variable ball entry is performed by shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the first switching mode. The benefits of support from the department can be emphasized. This is preferable in order to diversify the game by using the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the first switching mode.

Feature E5. In the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the first switching mode, the determination result corresponding to the third information is obtained, so that the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the first switching mode is compared. The ratio of the number of game balls paid out to the number of game balls fired between the end of the first special game state and the start of the next first special game state becomes high, and the above-mentioned high probability The number of game balls fired between the end of the first special game state and the start of the next first special game state as compared with the predetermined game state corresponding to the mode and the second switching mode is paid out. The gaming machine according to feature E4, characterized in that the ratio of the number of gaming balls is low.

In the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the first switching mode, the determination result corresponding to the third information → the second special gaming state, and the ball enters the variable ball entry section. Since the game ball is paid out by the entry ball, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of shots becomes higher than the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the first switching mode. As a result, in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the first switching mode, it is possible to proceed with the game while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held as compared with the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the first switching mode. .. That is, it becomes a situation in which the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is likely to be obtained by shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode, and the investment when the determination result corresponding to the second information is continuous is eased. The degree of this relaxation is even higher in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode. By making the transition destination at the time of limiter operation different according to such a difference in advantage, it is possible to suitably suppress the monotonization of the game.

Feature E6. Probability that the number of consecutive times that the determination result corresponding to the second information reaches the predetermined number in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the first switching mode and shifts to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode. Then, in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode, the number of consecutive times in which the determination result corresponding to the second information is obtained reaches the predetermined number and shifts to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode. The gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E5, characterized in that the probability of playing is different.

As shown in feature E6, the monotonization of the game is suppressed by substantially different the probability that the determination result corresponding to the second information is repeated until the above-mentioned limiter is activated depending on the predetermined game state in which the player is staying. The effect can be made more suitable.

Feature E7. The starting ball entry section includes a first starting ball entry section (first actuating ball entry section 62) and a second start ball entry section (second actuating ball entry section 63), and these first start ball entry section and second start ball entry section. The starting ball entry portion is arranged in a predetermined flow path (right route) in the game area.
The determination means is configured so that the determination based on the entry into the first start entry portion is more advantageous to the player than the determination based on the entry into the second start entry portion. And
As the predetermined notification means, a first notification means (display unit D1 for the first operation port) that performs a game rotation operation based on the ball entering the first start ball entry unit, and the second start ball entry unit. It has a second notifying means (display unit D2 for the second operating port) that performs a game rotation operation based on entering the ball into the ball.
The game rotation control means can execute the game rotation operation on one of the first notification means and the second notification means during the game rotation operation on the other.
The game rotation control means
An execution period determining means (a function of determining the variation display time in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining the execution period of the game rotation operation, and
A determination mode switching means (a function of switching the variable display time table referred to in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for switching the determination mode for determining the execution period of the game rotation operation by the execution period determination means according to the game state. Have and
When the number of consecutive determination results corresponding to the second information reaches the predetermined number in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the first switching mode, the determination mode switching means is in the low probability mode. While changing the determination mode with the transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode, the continuous determination result corresponding to the second information in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode. When the number of times reaches the predetermined number, the determination mode in the high probability mode and the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode even after the transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the second switching mode. The gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E6, characterized in that the switching is performed so as to take over.

As shown in this feature, the limiter operates in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the first switching mode, and the determination table is changed when shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the first replacement mode. This can change the rhythm of the game. On the other hand, when the limiter operates in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode and shifts to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the second switching mode, the determination table is taken over, and the game Rhythm changes are suppressed. In the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode that shifts by the operation of the limiter in this way, the difference in behavior when the limiter is activated can be reduced by configuring the configuration so that the change / takeover of the determination mode differs depending on the game state of the shift source. It can be made larger and the sharpness in the progress of the game can be strengthened.

The main notification means of the game progress is switched between the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the first switching mode and the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode. With such a configuration, for example, the probability of the determination result corresponding to the third information shown in the feature E5 can be different, and the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the first switching mode and the high probability mode can be used. The ratio of the number of payouts to the number of shots can be different from that of the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode.

Feature E8. The starting ball entry section has a first starting ball entry section (first actuating ball entry section 62) and a second start ball entry section (second actuating ball entry section 63), and the first start ball entry section and the first 2 The starting ball entry portion is arranged in a predetermined flow path (right route) in the game area.
The determination means is that the determination based on the entry into the second start entry portion corresponds to the determination result corresponding to the first information than the determination based on the entry into the second start entry portion. It is configured to have a high probability of becoming
As the predetermined notification means, a first notification means (display unit D1 for the first operation port) that performs a game rotation operation based on the ball entering the first start ball entry unit, and the second start ball entry unit. It has a second notifying means (display unit D2 for the second operating port) that performs a game rotation operation based on entering the ball into the ball.
The game rotation control means can execute the game rotation operation on one of the first notification means and the second notification means during the game rotation operation on the other.
The game rotation control means has an execution period determining means (a function of determining a variation display time in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining an execution period of the game rotation operation.
As a determination mode for determining the execution period of the game rotation operation by the execution period determining means, the execution period of the game rotation operation in the first notification means is larger than the execution period of the game rotation operation in the second notification means. The first determination mode (a function of referring to the variation display time table for the first, third, and fourth normal game states) and the execution period of the game rotation operation in the second notification means are shortened by the first notification means. A second determination mode (a function of referring to a variable display time table for the second normal game state) is provided, which is shorter than the execution period of the game rotation operation in.
The game turn control means includes a decision mode switching means (a function of switching a variable display time table referred to in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for switching between the first decision mode and the second decision mode according to the game state.
The determination mode switching means
A means for setting the determination mode in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the first switching mode as the second determination mode.
The determination in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode, which shifts when the number of consecutive determination results corresponding to the second information reaches the predetermined number in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the first switching mode. Means for setting the mode to the first determination mode and
A means for setting the determination mode in a predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode as the first determination mode.
The determination in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode, which shifts when the number of consecutive determination results corresponding to the second information reaches the predetermined number in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode. The gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E7, which comprises means for setting the mode to the first determination mode.

According to the feature E8, the limiter operates in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the first switching mode, and the determination mode is the second determination when shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the first switching mode. The rhythm of the game can be changed by changing from the mode to the first determination mode. On the other hand, when the limiter operates in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode and shifts to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the second switching mode, the determination table is changed from the first determination table to the first. It becomes a decision table and changes in the rhythm of the game are suppressed. In the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode that shifts by the operation of the limiter in this way, the difference in behavior when the limiter is activated can be reduced by configuring the configuration so that the change / takeover of the determination mode differs depending on the game state of the shift source. It can be made larger and the sharpness in the progress of the game can be strengthened.

Feature E9. The first in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode, which shifts when the number of consecutive determination results corresponding to the second information reaches the predetermined number in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the first switching mode. A predetermined game corresponding to a low probability mode that shifts when the number of consecutive determination results corresponding to the second information reaches the predetermined number in the determination mode and the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode. The means for which the first determination mode is set in the state is configured so that the degree of bias between the execution period of the game rotation operation by the first notification means and the execution period of the game rotation operation by the second notification means is different. The gaming machine according to feature E8, which is characterized in that it is used.

According to the feature E9, when the limiter is operated, the operation period of the game rotation operation related to the first start ball entry portion is short and the operation period of the game rotation operation related to the second start ball entry portion is long. Although it is common, there is a difference in the bias of the operation period depending on the game state when the limiter is operated. With such a configuration, it is possible to change the intervention frequency of the game rotation operation related to the second starting ball entry portion, and it is possible to contribute to the differentiation of the rhythm of the game.

Further, the technical ideas shown in the features E1 to E9 may be applied to the above-mentioned features A to D.

<Characteristic F group>
The following feature F group is described in that "a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board in which a game area is formed and a game ball launching means for launching a game ball into the game area based on a launch operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry portion provided in a game area, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out and other benefits are given to the player. Regarding the background technology of "(for example, see Patent Document 1)", there is an invention that "in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the degree of attention to the game." It was made with the problem to be solved.

Features F1. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on a player's operation. It is a gaming machine equipped with
In the special information acquisition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry unit (actuated ball entry unit 62, 63) provided in the game area. (A function to execute the process of acquiring the pending information) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means (for lottery in MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to the jackpot result). (Function to execute the processing of) and
The game rotation operation (display of variation in the pattern) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the game rotation is performed as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination. A predetermined notification means (operating port) so that the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with the end of the game round as one time. Game times control means (a function of executing display control of the operation port display units D1 and D2 by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the display units D1 and D2).
The determination result by the determination means becomes a determination result (for example, a jackpot result) corresponding to the predetermined determination information, and the game state is determined based on the execution of the game rotation operation related to the determination result by the game rotation control means. Special game state transition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for shifting to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state). Function to execute migration process) and
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the receiving state. 71) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the non-accepting state period are longer than those of the first switching mode. Two switching modes (high frequency support mode) are provided.
As the determination mode (lottery mode) in which the determination is performed by the determination means, the low probability mode in which the probability of the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively low and the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information are obtained. There is a high probability mode with a relatively high probability,
When a predetermined transition condition is satisfied in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the first switching mode, the first transition means for shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the second switching mode.
When a predetermined transition condition is satisfied in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode, the second transition means for shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the second switching mode is provided. Prepare,
The high probability mode and the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode and the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode, and the high probability by the second transition means. The mode and the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode and the low probability mode shifted from the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode are configured so that the player's advantage is different. A game machine to be.

In the configuration shown in the feature F1, the monotonization of the game can be suppressed by changing the game state in various ways by combining the switching control mode and the determination mode. Here, there is a transition from a predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the first switching mode to a predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the second switching mode, and from the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode. The advantage is different between the case of shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the second switching mode, and the case of shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the same low probability mode and the second switching mode. That is, the advantage of the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the second switching mode differs depending on the gaming state that is the transition source. With such a configuration, the effect of suppressing the monotony of the game can be suitably exhibited.

In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is "a game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and a game ball launch capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on a player's operation. Special information when a gaming machine provided with means (game ball launching mechanism 110) and a ball enters the starting ball entry section (actuating ball entry section 62, 63) provided in the game area. Special information acquisition means for acquiring (holding information) (a function of executing a process for acquiring hold information in MPU 602 of the main control device 162) and acquisition information capable of storing special information acquired by the special information acquisition means. Whether the storage means (holding ball storage area 632 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) and the special information stored in the acquired information storage means correspond to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to the jackpot result). Based on the determination means for determining whether or not (a function of executing the lottery process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) and the determination made prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means. The acquisition information storage means stores the start of the game rotation operation (variation display of the pattern) and the end of the game rotation operation as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination as one game rotation. The game turn control means (in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that controls predetermined notification means (operation port display units D1 and D2) so that the game turn operation of each game turn is performed according to the special information. The function of executing the display control of the operation port display units D1 and D2) and the determination result by the determination means become the determination result (for example, the jackpot result) corresponding to the predetermined determination information, and the determination result is obtained by the game turn control means. Based on the execution of the game rotation operation according to the above, the game state is changed to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state). It is equipped with a special game state transition means (a function of executing the game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) to be shifted, and a reception state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry portion and the relevant state. A variable mechanism (electric accessory 71) capable of switching to a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state, and a variable mechanism control means (main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism. The first switching mode (support mode) is provided as a switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism. A low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the non-accepting state is longer than the first switching mode are provided, and the determination is made by the determination means. As modes (lottery mode), a low probability mode in which the probability of a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information is relatively low and a high probability mode in which the probability of a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information is relatively high are relatively high. The high-probability mode and the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode and the high-probability mode and the first game state shifted from the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high-probability mode and the second switching mode. A gaming machine characterized in that the advantage of the player is different from the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the second switching mode, which is shifted from the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the switching mode. It is also possible to say.

Feature F2. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on a player's operation. It is a gaming machine equipped with
In the special information acquisition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry unit (actuated ball entry unit 62, 63) provided in the game area. (A function to execute the process of acquiring the pending information) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means (for lottery in MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to the jackpot result). (Function to execute the processing of) and
The game rotation operation (display of variation in the pattern) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the game rotation is performed as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination. A predetermined notification means (operating port) so that the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with the end of the game round as one time. Game times control means (a function of executing display control of the operation port display units D1 and D2 by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the display units D1 and D2).
The determination result by the determination means becomes a determination result (for example, a jackpot result) corresponding to the predetermined determination information, and the game state is determined based on the execution of the game rotation operation related to the determination result by the game rotation control means. Special game state transition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for shifting to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state). Function to execute migration process) and
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the receiving state. 71) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the non-accepting state period are longer than those of the first switching mode. Two switching modes (high frequency support mode) are provided.
As the determination mode (lottery mode) in which the determination is performed by the determination means, the low probability mode in which the probability of the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively low and the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information are obtained. There is a high probability mode with a relatively high probability,
The first information (normal random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and the second information (random number group corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result) are provided as the predetermined determination information.
The determination result by the determination means is the determination result (probability variation jackpot result) corresponding to the second information, and the number of consecutive determinations corresponding to the second information has not reached a predetermined number (for example, 10 times). In this case, the first transition means for shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode after the end of the special gaming state, and
When the determination result by the determination means is the determination result (probability variation jackpot result) corresponding to the second information and the number of consecutive determination results corresponding to the second information reaches the predetermined number, the said. A second transition means for transitioning to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode after the end of the special gaming state is provided.
The second transition means is
In the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the first switching mode, the number of consecutive times that the determination result by the determination means is the determination result corresponding to the second information and the determination result corresponding to the second information is obtained. When the predetermined number is reached, the means for shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the second switching mode, and
In the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode, the number of consecutive times that the determination result by the determination means is the determination result corresponding to the second information and the determination result corresponding to the second information is obtained. It has a means for shifting to a predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the second switching mode when the predetermined number is reached.
The low-probability mode and the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode, which are shifted from the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high-probability mode and the second switching mode by the second transition means, and the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode, and the first transition means. The player is configured so that the advantage of the player is different from the high-probability mode and the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode and the low-probability mode and the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode. A gaming machine featuring.

In the configuration shown in the feature F2, the monotonization of the game is suppressed by making the configuration that changes the game state in various ways. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, when the number of consecutive times of determination results corresponding to the second information reaches a predetermined number (upper limit) in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the first switching mode (that is, the limiter). The number of consecutive times that the determination result corresponding to the second information is obtained in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the second switching mode and the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode. In the low probability mode and the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, which shifts to the case where the number reaches a predetermined number (upper limit) (that is, when the limiter is activated), the same low probability mode and the predetermined game corresponding to the second switching mode Even in the state, the advantage is different. That is, the advantage of the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the second switching mode differs depending on the gaming state in which the limiter is operated. With such a configuration, the effect of suppressing the monotony of the game can be suitably exhibited.

Feature F3. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on a player's operation. It is a gaming machine equipped with
In the special information acquisition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry unit (actuated ball entry unit 62, 63) provided in the game area. (A function to execute the process of acquiring the pending information) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means (for lottery in MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to the jackpot result). (Function to execute the processing of) and
The game rotation operation (display of variation in the pattern) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the game rotation is performed as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination. A predetermined notification means (operating port) so that the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with the end of the game round as one time. Game times control means (a function of executing display control of the operation port display units D1 and D2 by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the display units D1 and D2).
The determination result by the determination means becomes a determination result (for example, a jackpot result) corresponding to the predetermined determination information, and the game state is determined based on the execution of the game rotation operation related to the determination result by the game rotation control means. Special game state transition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for shifting to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state). Function to execute migration process) and
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the receiving state. 71) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the non-accepting state period are longer than those of the first switching mode. Two switching modes (high frequency support mode) are provided.
As the determination mode (lottery mode) in which the determination is performed by the determination means, the low probability mode in which the probability of the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively low and the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information are obtained. There is a high probability mode with a relatively high probability,
The first information (normal random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and the second information (random number group corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result) are provided as the predetermined determination information.
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result (normal jackpot result) corresponding to the first information, the first transition means for shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode after the end of the special gaming state, and
The determination result by the determination means is the determination result (probability variation jackpot result) corresponding to the second information, and the number of consecutive determinations corresponding to the second information has not reached a predetermined number (for example, 10 times). In this case, the second transition means for shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode after the end of the special gaming state, and
When the determination result by the determination means is the determination result (probability variation jackpot result) corresponding to the second information and the number of consecutive determination results corresponding to the second information reaches the predetermined number, the said. A third transition means for shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode after the end of the special gaming state is provided.
The third transition means is
In the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the first switching mode, the number of consecutive times that the determination result by the determination means is the determination result corresponding to the second information and the determination result corresponding to the second information is obtained. When the predetermined number is reached, the means for shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the second switching mode, and
In the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode, the number of consecutive times that the determination result by the determination means is the determination result corresponding to the second information and the determination result corresponding to the second information is obtained. It has a means for shifting to a predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the second switching mode when the predetermined number is reached.
The high probability mode and the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode and the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode, and the high probability by the third transition means. The mode and the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode and the low probability mode shifted from the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode are configured so that the player's advantage is different. A game machine to be.

In the configuration shown in the feature F3, the monotonization of the game is suppressed by the configuration in which the game state is variously changed. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, when the number of consecutive times of determination results corresponding to the second information reaches a predetermined number (upper limit) in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the first switching mode (that is, the limiter). The number of consecutive times that the determination result corresponding to the second information is obtained in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the second switching mode and the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode. In the low probability mode and the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode, which shifts to the case where the number reaches a predetermined number (upper limit) (that is, when the limiter is activated), the same low probability mode and the predetermined game corresponding to the second switching mode Even in the state, the advantage is different. That is, the advantage of the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the second switching mode differs depending on the gaming state in which the limiter is operated. With such a configuration, the effect of suppressing the monotony of the game can be suitably exhibited.

Feature F4. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on a player's operation. It is a gaming machine equipped with
In the special information acquisition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry unit (actuated ball entry unit 62, 63) provided in the game area. (A function to execute the process of acquiring the pending information) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means (for lottery in MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to the jackpot result). (Function to execute the processing of) and
The game rotation operation (display of variation in the pattern) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the game rotation is performed as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination. A predetermined notification means (operating port) so that the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with the end of the game round as one time. Game times control means (a function of executing display control of the operation port display units D1 and D2 by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the display units D1 and D2).
The determination result by the determination means becomes a determination result (for example, a jackpot result) corresponding to the predetermined determination information, and the game state is determined based on the execution of the game rotation operation related to the determination result by the game rotation control means. Special game state transition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for shifting to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state). Function to execute migration process) and
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the receiving state. 71) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the non-accepting state period are longer than those of the first switching mode. Two switching modes (high frequency support mode) are provided.
As the determination mode (lottery mode) in which the determination is performed by the determination means, the low probability mode in which the probability of the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively low and the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information are obtained. There is a high probability mode with a relatively high probability,
The first information (normal random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and the second information (random number group corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result) are provided as the predetermined determination information.
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result (normal jackpot result) corresponding to the first information, the first transition means for shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode after the end of the special gaming state, and
The determination result by the determination means is the determination result (probability variation jackpot result) corresponding to the second information, and the number of consecutive determinations corresponding to the second information has not reached a predetermined number (for example, 10 times). In this case, the second transition means for shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode after the end of the special gaming state, and
When the determination result by the determination means is the determination result (probability variation jackpot result) corresponding to the second information and the number of consecutive determination results corresponding to the second information reaches the predetermined number, the said. A third transition means for shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode after the end of the special gaming state is provided.
The third transition means is
In the predetermined gaming state (second normal gaming state) corresponding to the high probability mode and the first switching mode, the determination result by the determination means is the determination result corresponding to the second information and the determination corresponding to the second information. When the resulting continuous number of times reaches the predetermined number, the means for shifting to the predetermined gaming state (third gaming state, time saving) corresponding to the low probability mode and the second switching mode (in the second normal gaming state). Limiter function) and
In the predetermined gaming state (fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode, the determination result by the determination means is the determination result corresponding to the second information and the determination corresponding to the second information. It has a means (limiter function in the fourth normal gaming state) for shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the second switching mode when the resulting continuous number of times reaches the predetermined number. ,
In the predetermined gaming state shifted from the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the first switching mode by the third transition means, the determination result corresponding to the first information and the determination result corresponding to the second information When the number of games executed without becoming a game reaches a preset upper limit, a fourth transition means for shifting to a predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the first switching mode, and
In the predetermined gaming state shifted from the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode by the third transition means, the determination result corresponding to the first information and the determination result corresponding to the second information It is provided with a fifth transition means for shifting to a predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the second switching mode when the number of games executed without becoming a game reaches a preset upper limit.
The predetermined gaming state shifted from the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode by the third transition means, and the predetermined game corresponding to the high probability mode and the first switching mode by the third transition means. A gaming machine characterized in that the player is configured to have a different advantage from the predetermined gaming state shifted from the state.

When the gaming machine shown in feature F4 has a series of determination results (probability variation jackpot results) corresponding to the second information in a predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode, and the number of consecutive times reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 times). Is provided with a limiter function that shifts to a predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode. Here, as the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode, a predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the first switching mode and a predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode are provided. The predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode, which is the transition destination, differs depending on which of the two gaming states the limiter is activated. In this way, by making the transition destination after the end of the special gaming state different depending on the gaming state when the above-mentioned continuous number of times reaches a predetermined number, the monotonization of the game is suppressed and the degree of attention to the game is improved. Can contribute to.

Feature F5. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on a player's operation. It is a gaming machine equipped with
In the special information acquisition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry unit (actuated ball entry unit 62, 63) provided in the game area. (A function to execute the process of acquiring the pending information) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means (for lottery in MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to the jackpot result). (Function to execute the processing of) and
The game rotation operation (display of variation in the pattern) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the game rotation is performed as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination. A predetermined notification means (operating port) so that the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with the end of the game round as one time. Game times control means (a function of executing display control of the operation port display units D1 and D2 by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the display units D1 and D2).
The determination result by the determination means becomes a determination result (for example, a jackpot result) corresponding to the predetermined determination information, and the game state is determined based on the execution of the game rotation operation related to the determination result by the game rotation control means. Special game state transition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for shifting to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state). Function to execute migration process) and
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the receiving state. 71) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the non-accepting state period are longer than those of the first switching mode. Two switching modes (high frequency support mode) are provided.
As the determination mode (lottery mode) in which the determination is performed by the determination means, the low probability mode in which the probability of the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively low and the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information are obtained. There is a high probability mode with a relatively high probability,
The first information (normal random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and the second information (random number group corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result) are provided as the predetermined determination information.
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result (normal jackpot result) corresponding to the first information, the first transition means for shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode after the end of the special gaming state, and
The determination result by the determination means is the determination result (probability variation jackpot result) corresponding to the second information, and the number of consecutive determinations corresponding to the second information has not reached a predetermined number (for example, 10 times). In this case, the second transition means for shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode after the end of the special gaming state, and
When the determination result by the determination means is the determination result (probability variation jackpot result) corresponding to the second information and the number of consecutive determinations corresponding to the second information reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 times). A third transition means for shifting to a predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode after the end of the special gaming state is provided.
The third transition means is
In the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the first switching mode, the number of consecutive times that the determination result by the determination means is the determination result corresponding to the second information and the determination result corresponding to the second information is obtained. When the predetermined number is reached, a means for shifting to the first predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the second switching mode after the end of the special gaming state (limiter function in the second normal gaming state).
In the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode, the number of consecutive times that the determination result by the determination means is the determination result corresponding to the second information and the determination result corresponding to the second information is obtained. It has a means (limiter function in the fourth normal gaming state) for shifting to the second predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the second switching mode after the end of the special gaming state when the predetermined number is reached. ,
When the number of games executed without the determination result corresponding to the first information and the determination result corresponding to the second information in the predetermined gaming state transferred by the third transition means reaches a preset upper limit. In addition, a fourth transition means (a function of shifting to the first normal gaming state based on the time saving digestion by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the first switching mode is provided.
The high probability mode and the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode and the high probability state shifted from the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode by the third transition means, and the high by the third transition means. The player is configured to have a different advantage from the low probability mode and the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode, which is shifted from the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the probability mode and the first switching mode. A gaming machine featuring.

In the gaming machine shown in feature F5, when the determination result (probability variation jackpot result) corresponding to the second information is continuous in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode, and the number of consecutive times reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 times). Is provided with a limiter function that shifts to a predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode. Here, as the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode, a predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the first switching mode and a predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode are provided. The predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode, which is the transition destination, differs depending on which of the two gaming states the limiter is activated. In this way, by making the transition destination after the end of the special gaming state different depending on the gaming state when the above-mentioned continuous number of times reaches a predetermined number, the monotonization of the game is suppressed and the degree of attention to the game is improved. Can contribute to.

Feature F6. The low-probability mode and the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode, which are shifted from the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high-probability mode and the second switching mode by the third transition means, are said to be high by the third transition means. It is characterized in that it is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the second switching mode, which is shifted from the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the probability mode and the first switching mode. Features The gaming machine described in F5.

According to the feature F6, when the limiter is operated in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode, the limiter is operated in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the first switching mode. Is also advantageous to the player. With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the sharpness of the game and preferably suppress the monotony of the game.

Feature F7. The low-probability mode and the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode, which are shifted from the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high-probability mode and the first switching mode by the third transition means, are said to be high by the third transition means. It is characterized in that it is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the second switching mode, which is shifted from the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the probability mode and the second switching mode. Features The gaming machine described in F5.

According to the feature F7, when the limiter is operated in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the first switching mode, the limiter is operated in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode. Is also advantageous to the player. With such a configuration, it is possible to alleviate the bias of the advantage and improve the soundness of the game.

Feature F8. The starting ball entry section has a first starting ball entry section (first actuating ball entry section 62) and a second start ball entry section (second actuating ball entry section 63), and the first start ball entry section and the first 2 The starting ball entry portion is arranged in a predetermined flow path (right route) in the game area.
The determination means has a probability that the determination based on the entry into the first start ball entry portion results in a determination result corresponding to the second information, and the determination based on the entry into the second start entry ball portion. The probability of the determination result corresponding to the second information is different from that of the second information.
As the predetermined notification means, a first notification means (display unit D1 for the first operation port) that performs a game rotation operation based on the ball entering the first start ball entry unit, and the second start ball entry unit. It has a second notifying means (display unit D2 for the second operating port) that performs a game rotation operation based on entering the ball into the ball.
The game rotation control means can execute the game rotation operation on one of the first notification means and the second notification means during the game rotation operation on the other.
The game rotation control means
An execution period determining means (a function of determining the variation display time in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining the execution period of the game rotation operation, and
A determination mode switching means (a function of switching the variable display time table referred to in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for switching the determination mode for determining the execution period of the game rotation operation by the execution period determination means according to the game state. Have and
The determination mode switching means is the determination in the low probability mode and the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode, which is shifted from the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode by the third transition means. The mode is different from the determination mode in the low probability mode and the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode, which is shifted from the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the first switching mode by the third transition means. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature F5 to the feature F7, which is configured to make the player's advantage different by making the player perform the game.

According to the feature F8, the probability that the determination result corresponding to the second information is obtained is different between the first start ball entry section and the second start ball entry section. Here, since the execution period of the game rotation operation related to the first start ball entry section and the execution period of the game rotation operation related to the second start ball entry section differ depending on the determination mode, there is a substantial advantage. It depends on the decision mode. When the limiter is activated to shift to a predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the second switching mode, the determination mode is different depending on the gaming state from which the transition is made, thereby causing a difference in the advantage in the predetermined gaming state. Therefore, the configuration shown in the above-mentioned feature F5 or the like can be preferably realized.

Feature F9. The starting ball entry section has a first starting ball entry section (first actuating ball entry section 62) and a second start ball entry section (second actuating ball entry section 63), and the first start ball entry section and the first 2 The starting ball entry portion is arranged in a predetermined flow path (right route) in the game area.
The determination means is that the determination based on the entry into the first start entry portion corresponds to the determination result corresponding to the second information than the determination based on the entry into the second start entry portion. It is configured to have a high probability of becoming
As the predetermined notification means, a first notification means (display unit D1 for the first operation port) that performs a game rotation operation based on the ball entering the first start ball entry unit, and the second start ball entry unit. It has a second notifying means (display unit D2 for the second operating port) that performs a game rotation operation based on entering the ball into the ball.
The game rotation control means can execute the game rotation operation on one of the first notification means and the second notification means during the game rotation operation on the other.
The game rotation control means
An execution period determining means (a function of determining the variation display time in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining the execution period of the game rotation operation, and
A determination mode switching means (a function of switching the variable display time table referred to in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for switching the determination mode for determining the execution period of the game rotation operation by the execution period determination means according to the game state. Have and
As a determination mode for determining the execution period of the game rotation operation by the execution period determining means, the execution period of the game rotation operation in the first notification means is larger than the execution period of the game rotation operation in the second notification means. The difference between the shortened first determination mode and the execution period of the game rotation operation in the first notification means and the execution period of the game rotation operation in the second notification means is smaller than that in the first determination mode. There is a decision mode for
The game turn control means provides a decision mode switching means (a function of switching the variable display time table referred to in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for switching between the first decision mode and the second decision mode according to the game state. Prepare,
The determination mode switching means is the determination in the low probability mode and the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode, which is shifted from the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the first switching mode by the third transition means. The mode is set to the second determination mode, and the low probability mode and the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode are shifted from the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode by the third transition means. The gaming machine according to feature F5, wherein the determination mode in the above is set to the first determination mode.

According to the feature F9, when the limiter is operated in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode, the limiter is operated in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the first switching mode. Is also advantageous to the player. With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the sharpness of the game and preferably suppress the monotony of the game.

Feature F10. The starting ball entry section has a first starting ball entry section (first actuating ball entry section 62) and a second start ball entry section (second actuating ball entry section 63), and the first start ball entry section and the first 2 The starting ball entry portion is arranged in a predetermined flow path (right route) in the game area.
The determination means is that the determination based on the entry into the first start entry portion corresponds to the determination result corresponding to the second information than the determination based on the entry into the second start entry portion. It is configured to have a high probability of becoming
As the predetermined notification means, a first notification means (display unit D1 for the first operation port) that performs a game rotation operation based on the ball entering the first start ball entry unit, and the second start ball entry unit. It has a second notifying means (display unit D2 for the second operating port) that performs a game rotation operation based on entering the ball into the ball.
The game rotation control means can execute the game rotation operation on one of the first notification means and the second notification means during the game rotation operation on the other.
The game rotation control means
An execution period determining means (a function of determining the variation display time in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining the execution period of the game rotation operation, and
A determination mode switching means (a function of switching the variable display time table referred to in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for switching the determination mode for determining the execution period of the game rotation operation by the execution period determination means according to the game state. Have and
As a determination mode for determining the execution period of the game rotation operation by the execution period determining means, the execution period of the game rotation operation in the first notification means is larger than the execution period of the game rotation operation in the second notification means. The difference between the shortened first determination mode and the execution period of the game rotation operation in the first notification means and the execution period of the game rotation operation in the second notification means is smaller than that in the first determination mode. There is a decision mode for
The game turn control means provides a decision mode switching means (a function of switching the variable display time table referred to in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for switching between the first decision mode and the second decision mode according to the game state. Prepare,
The determination mode switching means is the determination in the low probability mode and the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode, which is shifted from the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the first switching mode by the third transition means. The mode is set to the first determination mode, and the low probability mode and the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode are shifted from the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode by the third transition means. The gaming machine according to feature F5, wherein the determination mode in the above is set to the second determination mode.

According to the feature F10, when the limiter is operated in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the first switching mode, the limiter is operated in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode. Is also advantageous to the player. With such a configuration, it is possible to alleviate the bias of the advantage and improve the soundness of the game.

Features F11. The starting ball entry section has a first starting ball entry section (first actuating ball entry section 62) and a second start ball entry section (second actuating ball entry section 63), and the first start ball entry section and the first 2 The starting ball entry portion is arranged in a predetermined flow path (right route) in the game area.
The determination means is that the determination based on the entry into the first start entry portion corresponds to the determination result corresponding to the second information than the determination based on the entry into the second start entry portion. It is configured to have a high probability of becoming
As the predetermined notification means, a first notification means (display unit D1 for the first operation port) that performs a game rotation operation based on the ball entering the first start ball entry unit, and the second start ball entry unit. It has a second notifying means (display unit D2 for the second operating port) that performs a game rotation operation based on entering the ball into the ball.
The game rotation control means can execute the game rotation operation on one of the first notification means and the second notification means during the game rotation operation on the other.
The game rotation control means
An execution period determining means (a function of determining the variation display time in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining the execution period of the game rotation operation, and
A determination mode switching means (a function of switching the variable display time table referred to in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for switching the determination mode for determining the execution period of the game rotation operation by the execution period determination means according to the game state. Have and
As a determination mode for determining the execution period of the game rotation operation by the execution period determining means, the execution period of the game rotation operation in the first notification means is larger than the execution period of the game rotation operation in the second notification means. A first determination mode that is shortened and a second determination mode in which the execution period of the game rotation operation in the second notification means is shorter than the execution period of the game rotation operation in the first notification means are provided. Ori,
The game turn control means provides a decision mode switching means (a function of switching the variable display time table referred to in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for switching between the first decision mode and the second decision mode according to the game state. Prepare,
The determination mode switching means is the determination in the low probability mode and the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode, which is shifted from the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the first switching mode by the third transition means. The mode is set to the second determination mode, and the low probability mode and the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode are shifted from the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode by the third transition means. The gaming machine according to feature F5, wherein the determination mode in the above is set to the first determination mode.

According to the feature F11, when the limiter is operated in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode, the limiter is operated in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the first switching mode. Is also advantageous to the player. With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the sharpness of the game and preferably suppress the monotony of the game.

Feature F12. The starting ball entry section has a first starting ball entry section (first actuating ball entry section 62) and a second start ball entry section (second actuating ball entry section 63), and the first start ball entry section and the first 2 The starting ball entry portion is arranged in a predetermined flow path (right route) in the game area.
The determination means is that the determination based on the entry into the first start entry portion corresponds to the determination result corresponding to the second information than the determination based on the entry into the second start entry portion. It is configured to have a high probability of becoming
As the predetermined notification means, a first notification means (display unit D1 for the first operation port) that performs a game rotation operation based on the ball entering the first start ball entry unit, and the second start ball entry unit. It has a second notifying means (display unit D2 for the second operating port) that performs a game rotation operation based on entering the ball into the ball.
The game rotation control means can execute the game rotation operation on one of the first notification means and the second notification means during the game rotation operation on the other.
The game rotation control means
An execution period determining means (a function of determining the variation display time in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining the execution period of the game rotation operation, and
A determination mode switching means (a function of switching the variable display time table referred to in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for switching the determination mode for determining the execution period of the game rotation operation by the execution period determination means according to the game state. Have and
As a determination mode for determining the execution period of the game rotation operation by the execution period determining means, the execution period of the game rotation operation in the first notification means is larger than the execution period of the game rotation operation in the second notification means. A first determination mode that is shortened and a second determination mode in which the execution period of the game rotation operation in the second notification means is shorter than the execution period of the game rotation operation in the first notification means are provided. Ori,
The game turn control means provides a decision mode switching means (a function of switching the variable display time table referred to in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for switching between the first decision mode and the second decision mode according to the game state. Prepare,
The determination mode switching means is the determination in the low probability mode and the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode, which is shifted from the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the first switching mode by the third transition means. The mode is set to the second determination mode, and the low probability mode and the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode are shifted from the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode by the third transition means. The gaming machine according to feature F5, wherein the determination mode in the above is set to the first determination mode.

According to the feature F12, when the limiter is operated in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the first switching mode, the limiter is operated in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode. Is also advantageous to the player. With such a configuration, it is possible to alleviate the bias of the advantage and improve the soundness of the game.

Feature F13. As the upper limit, a first upper limit and a second upper limit smaller than the first upper limit are provided.
The upper limit in the low-probability mode and the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode, and the third transition means, which are shifted from the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high-probability mode and the first switching mode by the third transition means. One of the upper limit in the low probability mode and the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode, which is shifted from the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode, is set as the first upper limit, and the other is set as the first upper limit. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature F5 to the feature F12, which is characterized by having the second upper limit.

According to the feature F13, the hurdle of the limiter operation in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode is different from the hurdle of the limiter operation in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the first switching mode. , It is possible to preferably suppress that the transition pattern to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the second switching mode becomes monotonous.

In addition, each technical idea shown in feature F5 to feature F13 may be applied to the said feature F1 to feature F4.

Further, each technical idea shown in the features F1 to F13 may be applied to the above-mentioned features A to E.

<Characteristic G group>
The following feature G group is described in that "a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board in which a game area is formed and a game ball launching means for launching a game ball into the game area based on a launch operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry portion provided in a game area, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out and other benefits are given to the player. Regarding the background technology of "(for example, see Patent Document 1)", there is an invention that "in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the degree of attention to the game." It was made with the problem to be solved.

Features G1. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launch mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on the operation of the player, and
With a payout means (pain device 222) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry unit (actuated ball entry units 62, 63 and variable winning devices 64, 65) provided in the game area. It is a game machine equipped with
Special information acquisition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry unit (actuated ball entry units 62, 63) as the ball entry unit. A function to execute the process of acquiring pending information) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means (for lottery in MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to the jackpot result). (Function to execute the processing of) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the result of the determination is As a result of the notification corresponding to the above, the end of the game round operation is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The game time control means (a function of executing the game time control process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that controls the predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the operation port), and
Based on the determination result by the determination means being the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means being completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). A special game state transition means (a function of executing the game state transition process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that shifts to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). Prepare,
As the starting ball entry section, a first starting ball entry section (first actuating ball entry section 62) and a second start ball entry section (second actuating ball entry section 63) are provided.
The first start ball entry portion includes a first flow path side first start ball entry portion (lower actuated ball entry portion 62L) arranged in the first flow path (left route) in the game area.
The second starting ball entry portion is arranged in the second flow path (right route) in the game area.
The probability that a game ball will enter the second starting ball entry portion when the game ball is launched into the second flow path is the first on the first flow path side when the game ball is launched into the first flow path. It is higher than the probability that a ball will enter the starting ball entry section,
As the predetermined gaming state, there are a first gaming state (first normal gaming state) and a second gaming state (for example, a second normal gaming state or a fourth normal gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. It is provided,
As the predetermined determination information, first information (random number group corresponding to the normal jackpot result) that does not correspond to the transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, and the second gaming state from the first gaming state. Includes the second information (random number group corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result) corresponding to the transition to
A suggestion means for suggesting to the player to launch the game ball toward the first flow path in the first gaming state is provided.
In the determination based on the entry into the first start ball entry portion on the first flow path side, the determination result corresponding to the second information is more likely to be obtained than the determination based on the entry into the second start entry ball portion. A gaming machine characterized by being.

In a gaming machine in which a game progresses based on the entry of a ball into the starting ball entry section, the player's interest tends to be directed to the presence or absence of entry into the starting ball entry section. Here, as shown in this feature, when the ball entering the second starting ball entering portion is easier than entering the ball into the first starting ball entering portion on the first flow path side, the starting ball entering portion A player who expects to enter the ball is more likely to launch the game ball into the second flow path, ignoring the suggestion of launching the game ball toward the first flow path. This is not preferable in that the starting ball entry portion is arranged in the first flow path / the second flow path to encourage the player to change the launch destination of the game ball according to the game state and suppress the monotony of the game. .. In this regard, as shown in this feature, the determination relating to the first starting ball entry portion on the first flow path side is configured to be more likely to result in a determination result corresponding to the second information than the determination relating to the second starting ball entry portion. Therefore, it is preferable that the player who expects to be promoted from the first gaming state to the second gaming state is urged to launch the gaming ball into the first flow path during the first gaming state to suppress the above-mentioned monotonicization. Can be demonstrated. This is preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the game by suppressing the monotonization.

Feature G2. In the first gaming state, the value obtained by dividing the number of gaming balls paid out by the payout means by the number of launches to the first flow path when the game balls are launched into the first flow path is the value. When a game ball is launched into the second flow path, the number of game balls paid out by the payout means is divided by the number of launches into the second flow path so as to be larger than the value. Characteristic The gaming machine according to the feature G1.

As shown in the feature G1, regarding the judgment result corresponding to the second information, the entry into the first start entry section on the first flow path side is given preferential treatment over the entry into the second start entry section. There is. Therefore, in aiming at promotion from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, it is preferable to aim at the first starting ball entry portion. However, while such preferential treatment of the first starting ball entry portion on the first flow path side can be experienced by actually obtaining the determination result corresponding to the second information, it cannot be experienced in the state where the first gaming state continues. Therefore, in the configuration shown in this feature, the value (base) obtained by dividing the number of payouts of the game balls by the number of shots becomes larger when the game balls are fired to the first flow path during the first game state, and the number of balls held is large. You can feel that the first flow path is given preferential treatment in a visible form of increase or decrease. As a result, it is possible to promote the launch of the game ball toward the first flow path in the first game state and suppress the launch of the game ball into a flow path different from the assumption. This is preferable in order to exert the effect of suppressing the monotony of the game by changing the launch destination.

Feature G3. A pattern display means (design display device 75) having a display screen (display screen 75a) and capable of variably displaying a pattern on the display screen, and
It is provided with display control means (notification / effect control device 143 and display control device 710) that controls the display of the pattern display means.
When the display control means is in the first gaming state, the display control means is configured to variably display a pattern in the pattern display means based on the entry of a ball into the first start ball entry portion on the first flow path side. The gaming machine according to feature G1 or feature G2.

In the first game state, variable display (game effect) of the pattern on the display screen is executed based on the ball entering the first start ball entry portion on the first flow path side. In this way, in the first game state, the game effect is executed on the premise that the ball enters the first start ball entry section on the first flow path side, but the second start ball entry section is aimed at. When the game ball is launched, there is a concern that the effect of increasing the attention to the game by the game production will not be exhibited well. By applying the technical idea shown in the feature G1 and the like to such a configuration and encouraging the game ball to be launched aiming at the first ball entry portion on the first flow path side in the first game state, the above concern is raised. Can be wiped favorably.

Feature G4. A pattern display means (design display device 75) having a display screen (display screen 75a) and capable of variably displaying a pattern on the display screen, and
It is provided with display control means (notification / effect control device 143 and display control device 710) that controls the display of the pattern display means.
When the display control means is in the first gaming state, the display control means displays a variable pattern in a predetermined area of the display screen based on the ball entering the first start ball entry portion on the first flow path side. The gaming machine according to the feature G1 or the feature G2, characterized in that the pattern is not variably displayed based on the ball entering the second starting ball entering portion in the predetermined area.

In the first game state, variable display (game effect) of a pattern in a predetermined area of the display screen is executed based on the ball entering the first start ball entry portion on the first flow path side. On the other hand, even if the ball enters the second starting ball entry portion in the first game state, the variable display of the pattern in the predetermined area is not executed. In this way, in the first game state, the game effect is executed on the premise that the ball enters the first start ball entry section on the first flow path side, but the second start ball entry section is aimed at. When the game ball is launched, there is a concern that the effect of increasing the attention to the game by the game production will not be exhibited well. By applying the technical idea shown in the feature G1 and the like to such a configuration and encouraging the game ball to be launched aiming at the first ball entry portion on the first flow path side in the first game state, the above concern is raised. Can be wiped favorably.

Feature G5. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launch mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on the operation of the player, and
With a payout means (pain device 222) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry unit (actuated ball entry units 62, 63 and variable winning devices 64, 65) provided in the game area. It is a game machine equipped with
Special information acquisition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry unit (actuated ball entry units 62, 63) as the ball entry unit. A function to execute the process of acquiring pending information) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means (for lottery in MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to the jackpot result). (Function to execute the processing of) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the result of the determination is As a result of the notification corresponding to the above, the end of the game round operation is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The game time control means (a function of executing the game time control process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that controls the predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the operation port), and
Based on the determination result by the determination means being the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means being completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). A special game state transition means (a function of executing the game state transition process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that shifts to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state).
A variable ball entry unit (variable) that can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Winning devices 64,65) and
It is provided with a control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing opening / closing processing by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the special gaming state is entered. ,
As the special gaming state, a first special gaming state (a special gaming state corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second special gaming state in which the variable input portion is in the receiving state for a shorter period than the first special gaming state ( (Special game state for special hit results) is provided,
The first judgment information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and the second judgment information (random number group corresponding to the special hit result) are provided as the predetermined judgment information.
The special game state transition means
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the first determination result (big hit result) corresponding to the first determination information, the means for shifting to the first special gaming state and
It has a means for shifting to the second special gaming state when the determination result by the determination means becomes the second determination result (special hit result) corresponding to the second determination information.
As the starting ball entry section, a first starting ball entry section (first actuating ball entry section 62) and a second start ball entry section (second actuating ball entry section 63) are provided.
The first determination is based on the probability that the determination based on the entry into the first start entry section will result in the first determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the determination based on the entry into the second start entry section. While the probability of the first determination result corresponding to the information is the same, the determination based on the entry into the second start entry section is based on the entry into the first start entry section. It is configured so that the probability of a second judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is higher than that of the judgment.
The first start ball entry portion includes a first flow path side first start ball entry portion (lower actuated ball entry portion 62L) arranged in the first flow path (left route) in the game area.
The second starting ball entry portion is arranged in the second flow path (right route).
The probability that a game ball will enter the second starting ball entry portion when the game ball is launched into the second flow path is the first on the first flow path side when the game ball is launched into the first flow path. It is higher than the probability that a ball will enter the starting ball entry section,
As a determination mode (lottery mode) in which the determination is performed by the determination means, a low probability mode in which the probability of the first determination result corresponding to the first determination information is relatively low and the determination mode corresponding to the first determination information are supported. There is a high probability mode in which the probability of becoming the first judgment result is relatively high.
As the first determination result, the high-probability mode correspondence result (probability variation jackpot result) corresponding to the transition to the high-probability mode and the low-probability mode correspondence result (normal jackpot result) corresponding to the transition to the low-probability mode are It is provided,
As the predetermined gaming state, a first gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode (first normal gaming state) and a second gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state ( The second normal game state and the fourth normal game state) are provided.
A means for shifting to the second gaming state when the high probability mode correspondence result is obtained during the first gaming state, and
It is provided with a suggestion means for suggesting to the player that the game ball is launched toward the first flow path when the first game state is set.
In the determination based on the entry into the first start ball entry portion on the first flow path side, the high probability mode correspondence result and the low probability mode correspondence result are higher than the determination based on the entry into the second start entry ball portion. A gaming machine characterized in that the ratio of the results corresponding to the high probability mode is large.

In a gaming machine in which a game progresses based on the entry of a ball into the starting ball entry section, the player's interest tends to be directed to the presence or absence of entry into the starting ball entry section. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, during the second gaming state, it is easy to shift to the second special gaming state based on the entry into the second starting ball entry section, and the second starting ball entry section is entered. Ball entry is easier than entry into the first start ball entry portion on the first flow path side. This is a device that makes it possible to advance the game while reducing the number of balls held in the second game state by increasing the frequency of transition to the special game state to some extent. Although such a device is effective in realizing the diversification of the game, as described above, the player who expects the ball to enter the starting ball entry portion is directed toward the first flow path even during the first game state. There is a high possibility that the game ball will be launched into the second flow path, ignoring the suggestion of launching the game ball. This is not preferable in that the starting ball entry portion is arranged in the first flow path / the second flow path to encourage the player to change the launch destination of the game ball according to the game state and suppress the monotony of the game. .. In this respect, as shown in this feature, the determination relating to the first starting ball entry portion on the first flow path side is configured to be more likely to result in a high probability mode correspondence than the determination relating to the second starting ball entry portion. 1 The player who expects to be promoted from the game state to the second game state is urged to launch the game ball into the first flow path during the first game state, and the above-mentioned effect of suppressing monotonization is preferably exerted. be able to. This is preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the game by suppressing the monotonization.

Feature G6. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launch mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on the operation of the player, and
With a payout means (pain device 222) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry unit (actuated ball entry units 62, 63 and variable winning devices 64, 65) provided in the game area. It is a game machine equipped with
Special information acquisition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry unit (actuated ball entry units 62, 63) as the ball entry unit. A function to execute the process of acquiring pending information) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means (for lottery in MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to the jackpot result). (Function to execute the processing of) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the result of the determination is As a result of the notification corresponding to the above, the end of the game round operation is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The game time control means (a function of executing the game time control process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that controls the predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the operation port), and
Based on the determination result by the determination means being the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means being completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). A special game state transition means (a function of executing the game state transition process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that shifts to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state).
A variable ball entry unit (variable) that can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Winning devices 64,65) and
It is provided with a control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing opening / closing processing by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the special gaming state is entered. ,
As the special gaming state, a first special gaming state (a special gaming state corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second special gaming state in which the variable input portion is in the receiving state for a shorter period than the first special gaming state ( (Special game state for special hit results) is provided,
The first judgment information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and the second judgment information (random number group corresponding to the special hit result) are provided as the predetermined judgment information.
The special game state transition means
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the first determination result (big hit result) corresponding to the first determination information, the means for shifting to the first special gaming state and
It has a means for shifting to the second special gaming state when the determination result by the determination means becomes the second determination result (special hit result) corresponding to the second determination information.
As the starting ball entry section, a first starting ball entry section (first actuating ball entry section 62) and a second start ball entry section (second actuating ball entry section 63) are provided.
The first determination is based on the probability that the determination based on the entry into the first start entry section will result in the first determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the determination based on the entry into the second start entry section. While the probability of the first determination result corresponding to the information is the same, the determination based on the entry into the second start entry section is based on the entry into the first start entry section. It is configured so that the probability of a second judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is higher than that of the judgment.
The first start ball entry section is a first flow path side first start ball entry section (lower actuated ball entry section 62L) arranged in a first flow path (left route) in the game area, and the game area. Including the second flow path side first starting ball entry section (right side actuating ball entry section 62R) arranged in the second flow path (right route) in
The second starting ball entry portion is arranged in the second flow path (right route).
It is possible to switch between a receiving state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the first starting ball entering portion on the second flow path side and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the accepted state. Variable mechanism (electric accessory 71) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the non-accepting state period are longer than those of the first switching mode. Two switching modes (high frequency support mode) are provided.
As a determination mode (lottery mode) in which the determination is performed by the determination means, a low probability mode in which the probability of the first determination result corresponding to the first determination information is relatively low and the determination mode corresponding to the first determination information are supported. There is a high probability mode in which the probability of becoming the first judgment result is relatively high.
As the first determination result, the high-probability mode correspondence result (probability variation jackpot result) corresponding to the transition to the high-probability mode and the low-probability mode correspondence result (normal jackpot result) corresponding to the transition to the low-probability mode are It is provided,
The predetermined gaming states include a first gaming state (first normal gaming state) corresponding to the low probability mode and the first switching mode, and a second gaming state (second) corresponding to the high probability mode and the first switching mode. (Normal game state) is provided,
A means for shifting to the second gaming state when the high probability mode correspondence result is obtained during the first gaming state, and
It is provided with a suggestion means for suggesting to the player that the game ball is launched toward the first flow path when the first game state is set.
The determination based on the entry into the first start ball entry section on the first flow path side and the first start entry section on the second flow path side is more than the determination based on the entry into the second start entry section. A gaming machine characterized in that the ratio of the high-probability mode correspondence result and the low-probability mode correspondence result to the high-probability mode correspondence result is large.

In a gaming machine in which a game progresses based on the entry of a ball into the starting ball entry section, the player's interest tends to be directed to the presence or absence of entry into the starting ball entry section. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, it is easy to shift to the second special gaming state based on the entry into the second start entry section, and the entry into the second start entry section is the first flow. It is easier than entering the ball into the roadside first starting ball entry section. This is a device that makes it possible to advance the game while reducing the number of balls held in the second game state by increasing the frequency of transition to the special game state to some extent. Although such a device is effective in realizing the diversification of the game, as described above, the player who expects the ball to enter the starting ball entry portion is directed toward the first flow path even during the first game state. There is a high possibility that the game ball will be launched into the second flow path, ignoring the suggestion of launching the game ball. This is not preferable in that the starting ball entry portion is arranged in the first flow path / the second flow path to encourage the player to change the launch destination of the game ball according to the game state and suppress the monotony of the game. .. In this respect, as shown in this feature, the determination relating to the first starting ball entry portion on the first flow path side is configured to be more likely to result in a high probability mode correspondence than the determination relating to the second starting ball entry portion. 1 The player who expects to be promoted from the game state to the second game state is urged to launch the game ball into the first flow path during the first game state, and the above-mentioned effect of suppressing monotonization is preferably exerted. be able to. This is preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the game by suppressing the monotonization.

Feature G7. The predetermined notification means are a first notification means (display unit D1 for the first operation port) that performs a game rotation operation based on the ball entering the first start ball entry unit, and the second start ball entry unit. It has a second notifying means (display unit D2 for the second operating port) that performs a game rotation operation based on entering the ball into the ball.
The game rotation control means can execute the game rotation operation on one of the first notification means and the second notification means during the game rotation operation on the other.
The game rotation control means has an execution period determining means for determining an execution period of the game rotation operation.
The first notification means has a determination mode (a function of specifying a variation display time table referred to in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 for each game state) for determining the execution period of the game rotation operation by the execution period determining means. The first determination mode (for example, the variable display time corresponding to the fourth normal game state) for determining the execution period so that the execution period of the game rotation operation is shorter than the execution period of the game rotation operation in the second notification means. The function of referring to the table) and the second determination to determine the execution period so that the execution period of the game rotation operation in the first notification means is longer than the execution period of the game rotation operation in the second notification means. A mode (for example, a function of referring to a variable display time table corresponding to the second normal game state) is provided.
The gaming machine according to feature G6, wherein in the first gaming state, the determination mode for determining the execution period is configured to be the first determination mode.

In the first gaming state, the execution period of the game rotation operation related to the first start ball entry unit is shorter than the execution period of the game rotation operation related to the second start ball entry unit. As a result, even if the game ball is launched aiming at the second start ball entry portion during the first game state and the ball enters the second start ball entry portion, the second determination result is obtained and the second special It is possible to reduce the frequency of transition to the gaming state. That is, in combination with the feature G5 or the like, the second starting ball entering portion is given preferential treatment over the first starting ball entering portion on the first flow path side, but the ratio of which the high probability mode correspondence result is obtained. Is low and the execution span of the game rotation operation is long, and even if the player dares to aim at the second starting ball entry portion during the first game state, it is difficult to advance the game advantageously. Thereby, the effect shown in the feature G6 can be more preferably exhibited.

Feature G8. As the predetermined gaming state, a third gaming state (fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode is provided.
The gaming machine according to feature G7, wherein in the third gaming state, the determination mode for determining the execution period is configured to be the first determination mode.

In the third gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode, the variable mechanism is in the receiving state, and the ball can be easily entered into the first starting ball entering portion on the second flow path side. Here, in the configuration in which the game progresses centering on the game times related to the second starting ball entry portion on the disadvantage side even though the state is extremely advantageous to the player in this way, the advantage in the third game state is achieved. It is assumed that the sexuality is lowered and the satisfaction level of the player in the third gaming state is lowered. In this respect, as shown in this feature, in the third gaming state, the ball enters the first starting ball entering portion on the second flow path side frequently and is related to the first starting ball entering portion on the second flow path side, which is advantageous. As the game progresses around the game times, the above-mentioned inconvenience can be preferably eliminated.

In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is "as the predetermined gaming state, a third gaming state (third normal gaming state) corresponding to the low probability mode and the second switching mode is provided, and the third gaming state is provided. The gaming machine according to the feature G7, wherein the determination mode for determining the execution period is configured to be the first determination mode. ”

Feature G9. When the determination in the second gaming state results in the low probability mode correspondence result, other predetermined gaming states (for example, the third normal gaming state and the fourth gaming state) that are more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state are obtained. The gaming machine according to any one of feature G5 to feature G8, which is characterized in that it is configured to shift to a special gaming state configured by a normal gaming state).

The low-probability mode correspondence result, which was the disadvantageous side in the first game state, functions as the advantageous side in the second game state. With such a configuration, the configuration for suppressing the firing of the game ball into the second flow path during the first gaming state becomes a factor that reduces the superiority of the second gaming state over the first gaming state. This can be preferably avoided.

Feature G10. In the first gaming state, the value obtained by dividing the number of gaming balls paid out by the payout means by the number of launches to the first flow path when the game balls are launched into the first flow path is the value. When the game balls are launched into the second flow path, the number of game balls paid out by the payout means is divided by the number of launches into the second flow path so as to be larger than the value. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature G5 to the feature G9.

As shown in the feature G5 etc., regarding the ratio of the result corresponding to the high probability mode, the entry into the first start entry section on the first flow path side is more favorable than the entry into the second start entry section. Has been done. Therefore, in aiming at promotion from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, it is preferable to aim at the first starting ball entry portion. However, while such preferential treatment of the first starting ball entry portion on the first flow path side can be experienced by actually achieving the high probability mode correspondence result, it cannot be experienced in the state where the first gaming state continues. Therefore, in the configuration shown in this feature, the value (base) obtained by dividing the number of payouts of the game balls by the number of shots becomes larger when the game balls are fired to the first flow path during the first game state, and the number of balls held is large. You can feel that the first flow path is given preferential treatment in a visible form of increase or decrease. As a result, it is possible to promote the launch of the game ball toward the first flow path in the first game state and suppress the launch of the game ball into a flow path different from the assumption. This is preferable in order to exert the effect of suppressing the monotony of the game by changing the launch destination.

Feature G11. A pattern display means (design display device 75) having a display screen (display screen 75a) and capable of variably displaying a pattern on the display screen, and
It is provided with display control means (notification / effect control device 143 and display control device 710) that controls the display of the pattern display means.
When the display control means is in the first gaming state, the display control means is configured to variably display a pattern in the pattern display means based on the entry of a ball into the first start ball entry portion on the first flow path side. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature G5 to the feature G10.

In the first game state, variable display (game effect) of the pattern on the display screen is executed based on the ball entering the first start ball entry portion on the first flow path side. In this way, in the first game state, the game effect is executed on the premise that the ball enters the first start ball entry section on the first flow path side, but the second start ball entry section is aimed at. When the game ball is launched, there is a concern that the effect of increasing the attention to the game by the game production will not be exhibited well. By applying the technical idea shown in the feature G5 etc. to such a configuration and encouraging the game ball to be launched aiming at the first ball entry portion on the first flow path side in the first game state, the above concern is raised. Can be wiped favorably.

Feature G12. A pattern display means (design display device 75) having a display screen (display screen 75a) and capable of variably displaying a pattern on the display screen, and
It is provided with display control means (notification / effect control device 143 and display control device 710) that controls the display of the pattern display means.
When the display control means is in the first gaming state, the display control means displays a variable pattern in a predetermined area of the display screen based on the ball entering the first start ball entry portion on the first flow path side. The description of any one of the feature G5 to the feature G10, which is characterized in that the variable display of the pattern based on the ball entering the second starting ball entry portion is not performed in the predetermined area. Gaming machine.

In the first game state, variable display (game effect) of a pattern in a predetermined area of the display screen is executed based on the ball entering the first start ball entry portion on the first flow path side. On the other hand, even if the ball enters the second starting ball entry portion in the first game state, the variable display of the pattern in the predetermined area is not executed. In this way, in the first game state, the game effect is executed on the premise that the ball enters the first start ball entry section on the first flow path side, but the second start ball entry section is aimed at. When the game ball is launched, there is a concern that the effect of increasing the attention to the game by the game production will not be exhibited well. By applying the technical idea shown in the feature G5 etc. to such a configuration and encouraging the game ball to be launched aiming at the first ball entry portion on the first flow path side in the first game state, the above concern is raised. Can be wiped favorably.

In addition, each technical idea shown in feature G5 to feature G12 may be applied to the said feature G1 to feature G4.

Further, the technical ideas shown in the features G1 to G12 may be applied to the above-mentioned features A to F groups.

<Characteristic H group>
The following feature H group is described in that "a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board in which a game area is formed and a game ball launching means for launching a game ball into the game area based on a launch operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry portion provided in a game area, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out and other benefits are given to the player. (For example, see Patent Document 1). ”, The invention that“ in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to improve the reliability of the game ”is solved. It was made with the task to be tried.

Features H1. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launch mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on the operation of the player, and
In the special information acquisition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry unit (actuated ball entry unit 62, 63) provided in the game area. (A function to execute the process of acquiring the pending information) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means (for lottery in MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to the jackpot result). (Function to execute the processing of) and
The game rotation operation (display of variation in the pattern) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the game rotation is performed as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination. A predetermined notification means (operating port) so that the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with the end of the game round as one time. Game times control means (a function of executing display control of the operation port display units D1 and D2 by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the display units D1 and D2).
The determination result by the determination means becomes a determination result (for example, a jackpot result) corresponding to the predetermined determination information, and the game state is determined based on the execution of the game rotation operation related to the determination result by the game rotation control means. Special game state transition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for shifting to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state). Function to execute migration process) and
A variable ball entry unit (variable) that can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Winning devices 64,65) and
It is provided with a control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing opening / closing processing by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the special gaming state is entered. ,
The predetermined determination information includes first information (for example, a random number group corresponding to the normal jackpot result B) and second information (for example, a random number group corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result A).
The control means for the variable ball entry portion is
When the determination results in a determination result corresponding to the second information and the state shifts to the special gaming state, the game ball that has flowed into the variable entry section places a predetermined location (advantageous entry section 314) in the variable entry section. A means for controlling the variable ball entry portion so as to pass through,
When the determination results in the determination result corresponding to the first information and the game shifts to the special gaming state, the gaming ball that has flowed into the variable entry portion cannot or is difficult to pass through the predetermined portion in the variable entry portion. It has a means for controlling the variable ball entry portion in this way.
As the predetermined gaming state, a first predetermined gaming state (second normal gaming state) and a second predetermined gaming state (third normal gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first predetermined gaming state are provided. Ori
When the determination in the first predetermined gaming state results in a determination result corresponding to the first information and the game ball does not pass through the predetermined location, the second predetermined gaming state is entered after the end of the special gaming state. The first migration method to be migrated and
When the determination in the first predetermined gaming state results in a determination result corresponding to the second information and the gaming ball does not pass through the predetermined location, the second predetermined gaming state is determined after the end of the special gaming state. Is a gaming machine comprising a second transition means for transitioning to another predetermined gaming state (for example, a first normal gaming state).

According to the configuration shown in the feature H1, when the determination result corresponding to the first information is obtained in the first predetermined gaming state, the process shifts to the second predetermined gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the first predetermined gaming state. To do. On the other hand, when the determination result corresponding to the second information is obtained in the first predetermined gaming state, the variable entry portion is controlled so that the game ball passes through the predetermined portion in the variable entry portion. Here, if the determination result corresponding to the second information is obtained during the first predetermined game state, but the game ball is intentionally refrained from firing and the predetermined place is not passed, the special game is played. After the end of the state, the state shifts to another predetermined gaming state different from the second predetermined gaming state, and the transition to the second predetermined gaming state is avoided. If the configuration is such that the transition to the second predetermined gaming state is avoided in this way, it is possible to prevent the fairness between the players from being impaired and the gaming hall from suffering an unexpected disadvantage, and to have confidence in the gaming machine. The property can be suitably improved.

Feature H2. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launch mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on the operation of the player, and
In the special information acquisition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry unit (actuated ball entry unit 62, 63) provided in the game area. (A function to execute the process of acquiring the pending information) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means (for lottery in MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to the jackpot result). (Function to execute the processing of) and
The game rotation operation (display of variation in the pattern) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the game rotation is performed as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination. A predetermined notification means (operating port) so that the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with the end of the game round as one time. Game times control means (a function of executing display control of the operation port display units D1 and D2 by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the display units D1 and D2).
The determination result by the determination means becomes a determination result (for example, a jackpot result) corresponding to the predetermined determination information, and the game state is determined based on the execution of the game rotation operation related to the determination result by the game rotation control means. Special game state transition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for shifting to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state). Function to execute migration process) and
A variable ball entry unit (variable) that can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Winning devices 64,65) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing the opening / closing process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the game shifts to the special gaming state.
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the receiving state. 71) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the non-accepting state period are longer than those of the first switching mode. Two switching modes (high frequency support mode) are provided.
As the determination mode (lottery mode) in which the determination is performed by the determination means, the low probability mode in which the probability of the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively low and the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information are obtained. There is a high probability mode with a relatively high probability,
As the predetermined gaming state, the first predetermined gaming state (second normal gaming state) corresponding to the high probability mode and the first switching mode, and the first predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the second switching mode are supported. A second predetermined gaming state (third normal gaming state), which is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined gaming state, is provided.
The predetermined determination information includes first information (for example, a random number group corresponding to the normal jackpot result B) and second information (for example, a random number group corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result A).
The control means for the variable ball entry portion is
When the determination results in a determination result corresponding to the second information and the state shifts to the special gaming state, the game ball that has flowed into the variable entry section places a predetermined location (advantageous entry section 314) in the variable entry section. A means for controlling the variable ball entry portion so as to pass through,
When the determination results in the determination result corresponding to the first information and the game shifts to the special gaming state, the gaming ball that has flowed into the variable entry portion cannot or is difficult to pass through the predetermined portion in the variable entry portion. It has a means for controlling the variable ball entry portion in this way.
When the determination in the first predetermined gaming state results in a determination result corresponding to the first information and the game ball does not pass through the predetermined location, the second predetermined gaming state is entered after the end of the special gaming state. The first migration method to be migrated and
When the determination in the first predetermined gaming state results in a determination result corresponding to the second information and the gaming ball does not pass through the predetermined location, the second predetermined gaming state is determined after the end of the special gaming state. Is a gaming machine comprising a second transition means for transitioning to another predetermined gaming state (for example, a first normal gaming state).

According to the configuration shown in the feature H2, when the determination result corresponding to the first information is obtained in the first predetermined gaming state, the process shifts to the second predetermined gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the first predetermined gaming state. To do. On the other hand, when the determination result corresponding to the second information is obtained in the first predetermined gaming state, the variable entry portion is controlled so that the game ball passes through the predetermined portion in the variable entry portion. Here, if the determination result corresponding to the second information is obtained during the first predetermined game state, but the game ball is intentionally refrained from firing and the predetermined place is not passed, the special game is played. After the end of the state, the state shifts to another predetermined gaming state different from the second predetermined gaming state, and the transition to the second predetermined gaming state is avoided. If the configuration is such that the transition to the second predetermined gaming state is avoided in this way, it is possible to prevent the fairness between the players from being impaired and the gaming hall from suffering an unexpected disadvantage, and to have confidence in the gaming machine. The property can be suitably improved.

Further, the configuration shown in this feature is defined as "a game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and a game ball launch capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on a player's operation. Special information for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the means (game ball launching mechanism 110) and the starting ball entry unit (actuated ball entry unit 62, 63) provided in the game area. An acquisition means (a function of executing a process of acquiring hold information in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means and the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means are predetermined. For determination means (a function of executing lottery processing in MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not it corresponds to determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result) and determination by the determination means. The game rotation operation (display of variation in the pattern) is started prior to or based on the determination being made by the determination means, and the game rotation operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination. This is regarded as one game time, and predetermined notification means (operation port display units D1, D2) are performed so that the game time operation of each game time is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. ) (A function of executing display control of the operation port display units D1 and D2 by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) and a determination that the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the predetermined determination information. A result (for example, a jackpot result) is obtained, and the game state is set to a predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state) based on the execution of the game turn operation related to the determination result by the game turn control means. ) And a special game state transition means (a function of executing the game state transition process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) and the game area to shift to the special game state (open / close execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player. Variable entry unit (variable winning devices 64, 65) that can be switched between the accepted state (open state) in which the game ball can enter and the non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. And the control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing the opening / closing process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that switches the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the game shifts to the special gaming state. , A variable mechanism (electric combination) that can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the receiving state. The object 71) and a variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) are provided, and the variable mechanism is switched by the variable mechanism control means. As the control mode (support mode), the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the non-accepting state period are longer than those of the first switching mode. A second switching mode (high frequency support mode) is provided, and as a determination mode (lottery mode) in which the determination is performed by the determination means, the probability that a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information will be obtained is relatively high. A low-probability mode and a high-probability mode in which the probability of a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively high are provided, and the high-probability mode and the first switching mode are supported as the predetermined gaming state. A first predetermined gaming state (second normal gaming state) corresponding to the above, and a second predetermined gaming state (third normal gaming state) corresponding to the low probability mode and the second switching mode are provided. The control means for the variable ball entry unit includes first information (for example, a random number group corresponding to the normal jackpot result B) and second information (for example, a random number group corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result A) as the predetermined determination information. When the determination result corresponds to the second information, the variable ball entry unit is controlled so that the game ball flowing into the variable ball entry unit passes through a predetermined position in the variable ball entry unit. And when the determination results in the determination corresponding to the first information, the game ball that has flowed into the variable ball entry section cannot pass or becomes difficult to pass through a predetermined position in the variable ball entry section. When the determination result in the first predetermined gaming state results in a determination result corresponding to the first information and the gaming ball does not pass through the predetermined location. The first transition means for shifting to the second predetermined gaming state after the end of the special gaming state, and the determination in the first predetermined gaming state result in a determination result corresponding to the second information, and the predetermined location is played. A gaming machine comprising a second transition means for shifting to another predetermined gaming state different from the second predetermined gaming state after the end of the special gaming state when the ball does not pass. It is also possible to say.

Feature H3. After the end of the special gaming state, the second transition means results in a determination result corresponding to the second information in the determination in the first predetermined gaming state and when the gaming ball does not pass through the predetermined location. The gaming machine according to feature H1 or feature H2, which is configured to shift to the other predetermined gaming state, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the second predetermined gaming state.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, even though the determination result corresponding to the second information is obtained during the first predetermined game state, the game ball is intentionally refrained from launching to avoid passing through the predetermined place. In that case, the player shifts to another predetermined gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second predetermined gaming state. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably suppress an act of intentionally avoiding passing through a predetermined place and illegally acquiring a privilege (transition to an advantageous state).

Feature H4. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launch mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on the operation of the player, and
In the special information acquisition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry unit (actuated ball entry unit 62, 63) provided in the game area. (A function to execute the process of acquiring the pending information) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means (for lottery in MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to the jackpot result). (Function to execute the processing of) and
The game rotation operation (display of variation in the pattern) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the game rotation is performed as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination. A predetermined notification means (operating port) so that the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with the end of the game round as one time. Game times control means (a function of executing display control of the operation port display units D1 and D2 by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the display units D1 and D2).
The determination result by the determination means becomes a determination result (for example, a jackpot result) corresponding to the predetermined determination information, and the game state is determined based on the execution of the game rotation operation related to the determination result by the game rotation control means. Special game state transition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for shifting to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state). Function to execute migration process) and
A variable ball entry unit (variable) that can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Winning devices 64,65) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing the opening / closing process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the game shifts to the special gaming state.
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the receiving state. 71) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the non-accepting state period are longer than those of the first switching mode. Two switching modes (high frequency support mode) are provided.
As the determination mode (lottery mode) in which the determination is performed by the determination means, the low probability mode in which the probability of the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively low and the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information are obtained. There is a high probability mode with a relatively high probability,
As the predetermined gaming state, the first predetermined gaming state (second normal gaming state) corresponding to the high probability mode and the first switching mode, and the first predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the second switching mode. The second predetermined gaming state (third normal gaming state), which is more advantageous to the player than the gaming state, and the third predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state) corresponding to the low probability mode and the first switching mode are It is provided,
The predetermined determination information includes first information (for example, a random number group corresponding to the normal jackpot result B) and second information (for example, a random number group corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result A).
The control means for the variable ball entry portion is
When the determination results in a determination result corresponding to the second information and the state shifts to the special gaming state, the game ball that has flowed into the variable entry section places a predetermined location (advantageous entry section 314) in the variable entry section. A means for controlling the variable ball entry portion so as to pass through,
When the determination results in the determination result corresponding to the first information and the game shifts to the special gaming state, the gaming ball that has flowed into the variable entry portion cannot or is difficult to pass through the predetermined portion in the variable entry portion. It has a means for controlling the variable ball entry portion in this way.
When the determination in the first predetermined gaming state results in a determination result corresponding to the first information and the game ball does not pass through the predetermined location, the second predetermined gaming state is entered after the end of the special gaming state. The first migration method to be migrated and
When the determination in the first predetermined gaming state results in a determination result corresponding to the second information and the gaming ball does not pass through the predetermined location, the third predetermined gaming state is entered after the end of the special gaming state. A gaming machine characterized by having a second transition means for migration.

According to the configuration shown in the feature H4, when the determination result corresponding to the first information is obtained in the first predetermined gaming state, the process shifts to the second predetermined gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the first predetermined gaming state. To do. On the other hand, when the determination result corresponding to the second information is obtained in the first predetermined gaming state, the variable entry portion is controlled so that the game ball passes through the predetermined portion in the variable entry portion. Here, if the game ball does not pass through the predetermined place by intentionally refraining from launching the game ball even though the determination result corresponding to the second information is obtained during the first predetermined game state. After the end of the special gaming state, the transition to the third predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the first switching mode is performed, and the transition to the second predetermined gaming state is avoided. If the configuration is such that the transition to the second predetermined gaming state is avoided in this way, it is possible to prevent the fairness between the players from being impaired and the gaming hall from suffering an unexpected disadvantage, and to have confidence in the gaming machine. The property can be suitably improved.

Feature H5. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launch mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on the operation of the player, and
In the special information acquisition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry unit (actuated ball entry unit 62, 63) provided in the game area. (A function to execute the process of acquiring the pending information) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means (for lottery in MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to the jackpot result). (Function to execute the processing of) and
The game rotation operation (display of variation in the pattern) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the game rotation is performed as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination. A predetermined notification means (operating port) so that the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with the end of the game round as one time. Game times control means (a function of executing display control of the operation port display units D1 and D2 by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the display units D1 and D2).
The determination result by the determination means becomes a determination result (for example, a jackpot result) corresponding to the predetermined determination information, and the game state is determined based on the execution of the game rotation operation related to the determination result by the game rotation control means. Special game state transition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for shifting to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state). Function to execute migration process) and
A variable ball entry unit (variable) that can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Winning devices 64,65) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing the opening / closing process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the game shifts to the special gaming state.
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the receiving state. 71) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the non-accepting state period are longer than those of the first switching mode. Two switching modes (high frequency support mode) are provided.
As the determination mode (lottery mode) in which the determination is performed by the determination means, the low probability mode in which the probability of the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively low and the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information are obtained. There is a high probability mode with a relatively high probability,
As the predetermined game state, the first predetermined game state (second normal game state) corresponding to the high probability mode and the first switching mode, and the second predetermined game corresponding to the low probability mode and the second switching mode. Corresponds to the state (third normal gaming state), the third predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state) corresponding to the low probability mode and the first switching mode, and the high probability mode and the second switching mode. A fourth predetermined gaming state (fourth normal gaming state) is provided.
The second predetermined gaming state is a predetermined gaming state in which it is easier to shift to the fourth predetermined gaming state as compared with the first predetermined gaming state and the third predetermined gaming state.
The predetermined determination information includes first information (for example, a random number group corresponding to the normal jackpot result B) and second information (for example, a random number group corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result A).
The control means for the variable ball entry portion is
When the determination results in a determination result corresponding to the second information and the state shifts to the special gaming state, the game ball that has flowed into the variable entry section places a predetermined location (advantageous entry section 314) in the variable entry section. A means for controlling the variable ball entry portion so as to pass through,
When the determination results in the determination result corresponding to the first information and the game shifts to the special gaming state, the gaming ball that has flowed into the variable entry portion cannot or is difficult to pass through the predetermined portion in the variable entry portion. It has a means for controlling the variable ball entry portion in this way.
When the determination in the first predetermined gaming state results in a determination result corresponding to the first information and the game ball does not pass through the predetermined location, the second predetermined gaming state is entered after the end of the special gaming state. The first migration method to be migrated and
When the determination in the first predetermined gaming state results in a determination result corresponding to the second information and the gaming ball does not pass through the predetermined location, the third predetermined gaming state is entered after the end of the special gaming state. A gaming machine characterized by having a second transition means for migration.

According to the configuration shown in the feature H5, when the determination result corresponding to the first information is obtained in the first predetermined gaming state, the process shifts to the second predetermined gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the first predetermined gaming state. To do. On the other hand, when the determination result corresponding to the second information is obtained in the first predetermined gaming state, the variable entry portion is controlled so that the game ball passes through the predetermined portion in the variable entry portion. Here, if the game ball does not pass through the predetermined place due to intentional refraining from launching the game ball, a third predetermined game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the first switching mode is performed after the end of the special game state. The transition to the second predetermined gaming state is avoided. If the configuration is such that the transition to the second predetermined gaming state is avoided in this way, it is possible to prevent the fairness between the players from being impaired and the gaming hall from suffering an unexpected disadvantage, and to have confidence in the gaming machine. The property can be suitably improved.

Feature H6. The determination in the first predetermined gaming state results in a determination result corresponding to the second information, and when the gaming ball passes through the predetermined location, the transition to the first predetermined gaming state is performed after the end of the special gaming state. 3. The gaming machine according to feature H4 or feature H5, which comprises a transition means.

If the determination result corresponding to the first information is obtained during the first predetermined gaming state, the transition to the second predetermined gaming state that can be expected to shift to the fourth predetermined gaming state is performed. That is, it is promoted to the second predetermined gaming state when the determination result corresponding to the first information is obtained. On the other hand, when the determination result corresponding to the second information is obtained during the first predetermined gaming state and the gaming ball passes the predetermined location in the variable entry portion, the game returns to the first predetermined gaming state after the end of the special gaming state. However, promotion does not occur. In such a configuration, when a player who is dissatisfied with the determination result corresponding to the second information shifts to the special gaming state according to the determination result, the game ball is intentionally refrained from launching the game ball at a predetermined location. There is concern that it will not pass. If the technical idea shown in the feature H5 is applied to such a configuration, the effect of improving the reliability can be more preferably exhibited.

Feature H7. The predetermined gaming state includes the fourth predetermined gaming state (fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode.
The predetermined determination information referred to in the first predetermined gaming state is characterized in that it does not include information corresponding to the transition to the fourth predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature H4 to the feature H6.

As shown in this feature, if the high probability mode and the determination result corresponding to the second switching mode are not obtained during the first predetermined gaming state, only whether or not to set the high probability mode based on the passing situation of the predetermined location is used. It is enough to decide. That is, even if the game ball at a predetermined position does not pass through the variable ball entry portion when the determination result corresponding to the second information is obtained, it is not necessary to forcibly change the switching mode accordingly. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the behavior of the gaming machine from becoming unstable due to complicated control related to switching of gaming states. This is preferable in order to improve the reliability of the gaming machine.

In addition, if the game ball cannot pass through a predetermined location due to an accidental factor such as a player's operation error, it is harsh for the player to switch both the lottery mode and the switching mode to a mode that is disadvantageous to the player. .. In this respect, such a concern can be suitably dispelled by setting the configuration so that the mode does not shift to the second switching mode when the determination result corresponding to the second information is obtained during the first predetermined gaming state.

Feature H8. In the variable ball-entry control means, the gaming ball passes through a passing portion (for example, a through gate 66) provided in the gaming area after shifting from the predetermined gaming state to the special gaming state by the special gaming state transition means. The gaming machine according to any one of the features H4 to H7, characterized in that the variable ball-entry portion is switched between the accepted state and the non-accepted state based on the above.

Feature As shown in H4, etc., when the judgment result corresponding to the second information is obtained and the game shifts to the special game state, if the game ball does not pass through the predetermined position in the variable entry section, the cause is the game. It cannot be denied that there is a possibility that the person has an unintended accidental reason (for example, forgetting to operate). Therefore, if the variable input portion is switched to the accepted state / the non-accepted state based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing portion as shown in this feature, the above concern can be suitably resolved.

Feature H9. The variable ball entry portion and the passage portion are arranged in a predetermined flow path (right route) provided in the game area.
The passing portion is located on the upstream side of the predetermined flow path with respect to the variable entry portion.
The control means for the variable ball entry section enables the game ball to pass through the predetermined position in the variable ball entry section before the game ball that has passed through the passing section reaches the variable ball entry section. The gaming machine according to feature H8, which is configured to control the variable ball entry portion in this way.

As shown in feature H9, the variable entry ball is made so that the game ball can pass through a predetermined position in the variable entry portion before the game ball that has passed through the passing portion reaches the variable entry portion. If the unit is controlled, the effects shown in the feature H4, the feature H5, the feature H8, and the like can be suitably exhibited.

Feature H10. The predetermined gaming state includes the fourth predetermined gaming state (fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode.
A pattern display means (design display device 75) having a display screen (display screen 75a) and capable of displaying a pattern on the display screen, and
A picture control means (notification / effect) that controls the picture display means by executing variable display of a picture on the display screen and stopping and displaying a picture combination corresponding to the judgment result by the determination means on the display screen. It is equipped with a control device 143 and a display control device 710).
In the first predetermined gaming state, the determination result by the determination means can be a determination result corresponding to the third information.
When the determination in the first predetermined gaming state results in a determination result corresponding to the third information and the game ball passes through the predetermined location, the process shifts to the fourth predetermined gaming state after the end of the special gaming state. Means and
When the determination in the first predetermined gaming state results in a determination result corresponding to the third information and the game ball does not pass through the predetermined location, the third predetermined gaming state is entered after the end of the special gaming state. With the means to make the transition
The pattern control means is
A means for stopping and displaying a specific pattern combination on the display screen when a determination result corresponding to the second information is obtained in the first predetermined gaming state.
A feature H5 to a feature H5 to have a means for stopping and displaying the specific pattern combination on the display screen when a determination result corresponding to the third information is obtained in the first predetermined gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of the features H9.

As shown in this feature, the pattern combination that is stopped and displayed on the display screen is the same pattern combination (specific) after the configuration is such that the first predetermined gaming state can be shifted to the second predetermined gaming state and the fourth predetermined gaming state. If it is a combination of patterns), there is a possibility of suffering a disadvantage due to the act of intentionally avoiding the passage of a predetermined place. As a result, it is possible to suppress the action and preferably exert the effect shown in the feature H5.

In addition, each technical idea shown in feature H6 to feature H10 may be applied to the said feature H1 to feature H5.

Further, each technical idea shown in the features H1 to H10 may be applied to the above-mentioned features A to G.

<Feature I group>
The following feature group I describes "a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed and a gaming ball launching means for launching a gaming ball into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry portion provided in a game area, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out and other benefits are given to the player. Regarding the background technology of "(for example, see Patent Document 1)", there is an invention that "in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the degree of attention to the game." It was made with the problem to be solved.

Feature I1. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launch mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (pain device 222) for paying out the game ball based on the ball entering the ball entry units (actuated ball entry units 62, 63 and variable winning devices 64, 65) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry unit (actuated ball entry units 62, 63) as the ball entry unit. A function to execute the process of acquiring pending information) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) that can store the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means up to a predetermined number (for example, four) set in advance, and
A determination means (for lottery in MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group for a jackpot result). Function to execute processing) and
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, the game rotation operation (variation display of the pattern on the operation port display units D1 and D2) is started, and the result of the determination is As a result of the notification corresponding to, the end of the game round operation is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game rotation control means (a function of executing display control of the operation port display units D1 and D2 by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the predetermined notification means (operation port display units D1 and D2).
The determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, and the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state ~) based on the execution of the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means. It is equipped with a special game state transition means (a function of executing the game state transition process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that shifts to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
The starting ball entry section has a first starting ball entry section (first actuating ball entry section 62) and a second start ball entry section (second actuating ball entry section 63), and the first start ball entry section and the first 2 The starting ball entry portion is arranged in a predetermined flow path (right route) in the game area.
The predetermined notification means includes a first notification means (display unit D1 for the first operation port) that performs a game rotation operation based on the ball entering the first start ball entry unit, and the second start ball entry unit. It has a second notifying means (display unit D2 for the second operating port) that performs a game rotation operation based on the ball entering the ball.
The game rotation control means can execute the game rotation operation on one of the first notification means and the second notification means during the game rotation operation on the other.
A variable mechanism (electric) that can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the first starting ball entering portion and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the accepted state. Character 71) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the non-accepting state period are longer than those of the first switching mode. Two switching modes (high frequency support mode) are provided.
The game rotation control means has an execution period determining means for determining an execution period of the game rotation operation.
The first notification means has a determination mode (a function of specifying a variation display time table referred to in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 for each game state) for determining the execution period of the game rotation operation by the execution period determining means. The first determination mode (for example, the variable display time corresponding to the fourth normal game state) for determining the execution period so that the execution period of the game rotation operation is shorter than the execution period of the game rotation operation in the second notification means. The function of referring to the table) and the second determination to determine the execution period so that the execution period of the game rotation operation in the first notification means is longer than the execution period of the game rotation operation in the second notification means. A mode (for example, a function of referring to a variable display time table corresponding to the second normal game state) is provided.
As the predetermined gaming state, a first predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode and the first determination mode and a second predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode and the second determination mode are provided. A gaming machine characterized by being.

According to the feature I1, both the first predetermined gaming state and the second predetermined gaming state correspond to the second switching mode, and the entry into the first start entry section is given preferential treatment. However, in the first predetermined gaming state, the execution period of the game rotation operation related to the first start ball entry unit is shorter than the execution period of the game rotation operation related to the second start ball entry unit, whereas the second In the predetermined gaming state, the execution period of the game rotation operation related to the first start ball entry unit is longer than the execution period of the game rotation operation related to the second start ball entry unit. That is, in the first predetermined game state, the game progresses mainly on the game rotation operation based on the ball entering the first start ball entry portion (high-speed digestion on the first start ball entry portion side), and in the second predetermined game state. The game progresses mainly on the game rotation operation based on the ball entering the second start ball entry section (high-speed digestion on the second start ball entry section side). Therefore, according to the second switching mode in the first predetermined gaming state, (1) the chance of paying out based on the entry into the first starting ball entry section increases, and (2) the entry into the first starting ball entry section. The chances of the lottery being executed based on the ball will increase. On the other hand, according to the second switching mode in the second predetermined game state, the game progresses mainly by the game rotation operation related to the second start ball entry section, and the player enters the first start ball entry section. The gap between the ball opportunity and the lottery opportunity related to the entry into the first starting ball entry section becomes large. That is, the benefit of increasing the number of balls entering the first starting ball entry section is mainly the above (1). In this way, by making a difference in the flow of the game between the first predetermined game state and the second predetermined game state, it is possible to suppress the monotonization of the game and contribute to the improvement of the degree of attention to the game.

Feature I2. In the first switching mode, the variable mechanism control means makes it easier for the gaming ball flowing down the predetermined flow path to enter the second starting ball entry section than the first starting ball entry section. In the second switching mode, the variable mechanism is controlled so that the gaming ball flowing down the predetermined flow path is easier to enter the first starting ball entry section than the second starting entry section. The gaming machine according to feature I1, which is characterized in that it is used.

As shown in Feature I2, when the ball entry destination is in the second switching mode, which is mainly the first start ball entry section, there are two benefits, that is, an increase in payout opportunities and an increase in lottery opportunities. The effect shown in the feature I1 can be suitably exerted by the configuration in which the benefits are divided into the state in which the payout opportunity is limited to the increase.

Feature I3. As the determination mode (lottery mode) in which the determination is performed by the determination means, the low probability mode in which the probability of the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively low and the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information are obtained. There is a high probability mode with a relatively high probability,
The determination based on the entry into the first start entry section has a higher probability of producing the determination result corresponding to the high probability mode than the determination based on the entry into the second start entry section. The gaming machine according to the feature I1 or the feature I2, which is set as follows.

According to the configuration shown in the feature I3, in the first predetermined gaming state in which the game progresses mainly with the game turning operation related to the first starting ball entering portion, the game turning operation related to the second starting ball entering portion is mainly used. Compared to the second predetermined gaming state in which the game progresses, the probability that the determination result corresponding to the high probability mode will be higher is higher. As a result, it is possible to enhance the superiority of the first predetermined gaming state over the second predetermined gaming state and enhance the sharpness of the game.

Feature I4. It is possible to switch between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area is provided in the game area and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning devices 64, 65) as the ball entry section,
It is provided with a control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing opening / closing processing by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the special gaming state is entered. ,
As the special gaming state, a first special gaming state (a special gaming state corresponding to a jackpot result) and a second special gaming state in which the variable input portion is in the receiving state for a shorter period than the first special gaming state ( (Special game state for special hit results) is provided,
The first judgment information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and the second judgment information (random number group corresponding to the special hit result) are provided as the predetermined judgment information.
The special game state transition means
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the first determination result (big hit result) corresponding to the first determination information, the means for shifting to the first special gaming state and
It has a means for shifting to the second special gaming state when the determination result by the determination means becomes the second determination result (special hit result) corresponding to the second determination information.
When the second determination result is obtained in the first predetermined gaming state, a means for shifting to the first predetermined gaming state after the end of the second special gaming state, and
When the second determination result is obtained in the second predetermined gaming state, the means for shifting to the second predetermined gaming state after the end of the second special gaming state is provided.
The determination based on the entry into the second starting ball entry portion is more likely to result in the second determination result corresponding to the second determination information than the determination based on the entry into the first start entry section. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature I1 to the feature I3, which is characterized in that.

As shown in the feature I1 and the like, the first predetermined game state in which the game progresses mainly by the game rotation operation related to the first start ball entry portion and the game rotation operation related to the second start ball entry portion are the main. In order to diversify the game by providing the second predetermined game state in which the game progresses, the second determination result is compared with the first predetermined game state in the second predetermined game state in which the substantial benefit is small. By increasing the chances of becoming a player, it becomes possible to proceed with the game while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held. Thereby, it is possible to clarify the difference in behavior in the two predetermined gaming states while suppressing an excessive bias of the advantage. This is a preferable configuration for exerting the effect shown in the feature I1.

Feature I5. As the predetermined gaming state, a first gaming state (third normal gaming state) including the first predetermined gaming state and the second predetermined gaming state, and a second game state which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first gaming state. A game state (second normal game state) and a third game state (fourth normal game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state are provided.
A means for shifting to the second predetermined gaming state when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied in the second gaming state, and
The game according to any one of the features I1 to I4, which comprises means for shifting to the first predetermined gaming state when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied in the third gaming state. Machine.

When the first game state to the third game state are provided as the predetermined game states, there is a concern that the player's motivation to play will rapidly decrease due to the end of the most advantageous third game state. Will be done. In this respect, as shown in this feature, when the player is demoted from the third gaming state on the advantageous side, the game shifts to the first predetermined gaming state, which has a relatively large benefit, and is promoted from the second gaming state on the disadvantaged side. The occurrence of such inconvenience can be suitably suppressed by configuring the configuration to shift to the second predetermined gaming state in which the benefit is relatively small.

Further, as shown in the above feature I1, in realizing the diversification of the game by using the first predetermined gaming state and the second predetermined gaming state together, the benefit is relatively small from the second gaming state. (2) By configuring the device to shift to the predetermined gaming state, the hurdle for shifting to the second predetermined gaming state can be lowered, and the frequency of shifting to the second predetermined gaming state can be increased. By increasing the frequency of transition to the second predetermined gaming state in this way, the effect of improving the degree of attention to the game due to the diversification of the game can be suitably exhibited.

Feature I6. In the second predetermined gaming state, the first starting ball entering portion is in a situation where the gaming ball is continuously launched into the predetermined flow path during the execution period of the game turning operation related to the first starting ball entering portion. The second game ball is continuously launched into the predetermined flow path, which is longer than the average of the interval period of the ball entering the ball and the execution period of the game rotation operation related to the second start ball entry unit is continuous. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I5, characterized in that the interval period of entry into the starting ball entry portion is longer than the average.

According to the configuration shown in the feature I1 or the like, the game progresses so that the game rotation operation related to the second start ball entry portion becomes the main during the second predetermined game state. Since the second predetermined gaming state corresponds to the second switching mode, the ball enters the first start ball entry section frequently, but even if the ball enters the first start ball entry section, the ball enters the first start ball entry section. It is easy for the ball to enter the ball to be virtually excluded from the judgment target. If such behavior is conspicuous, it is feared that it will be a factor that greatly reduces the satisfaction of the player. Specifically, when the number of special information based on the entry into the second start entry section becomes 0 and the game rotation operation related to the second start entry section is interrupted, the above behavior becomes conspicuous. is assumed. Here, according to the configuration shown in this feature, the average of the interval period of the ball entering the second starting ball entering portion is set to be shorter than the execution period of the game rounding operation. As a result, it is possible to suppress the interruption of the game rotation operation related to the second start ball entry portion during the second predetermined game state, and to suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

Feature I7. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launch mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (pain device 222) for paying out the game ball based on the ball entering the ball entry units (actuated ball entry units 62, 63 and variable winning devices 64, 65) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry unit (actuated ball entry units 62, 63) as the ball entry unit. A function to execute the process of acquiring pending information) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) that can store the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means up to a predetermined number set in advance, and
A determination means (for lottery in MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group for a jackpot result). Function to execute processing) and
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, the game rotation operation (variation display of the pattern on the operation port display units D1 and D2) is started, and the result of the determination is As a result of the notification corresponding to, the end of the game round operation is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game rotation control means (a function of executing display control of the operation port display units D1 and D2 by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the predetermined notification means (operation port display units D1 and D2).
The determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, and the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state ~) based on the execution of the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means. It is equipped with a special game state transition means (a function of executing the game state transition process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that shifts to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
The starting ball entry section has a first starting ball entry section (first actuating ball entry section 62) and a second start ball entry section (second actuating ball entry section 63), and the first start ball entry section and the first 2 The starting ball entry portion is arranged in a predetermined flow path (right route) in the game area.
The predetermined notification means are a first notification means (display unit D1 for the first operation port) that performs a game rotation operation based on the ball entering the first start ball entry unit, and the second start ball entry unit. It has a second notifying means (display unit D2 for the second operating port) that performs a game rotation operation based on entering the ball into the ball.
The game rotation control means can execute the game rotation operation on one of the first notification means and the second notification means during the game rotation operation on the other.
A variable mechanism (electric) that can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the first starting ball entering portion and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the accepted state. Character 71) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the non-accepting state period are longer than those of the first switching mode. Two switching modes (high frequency support mode) are provided.
As the determination mode (lottery mode) in which the determination is performed by the determination means, the low probability mode in which the probability of the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively low and the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information are obtained. There is a high probability mode with a relatively high probability,
As the predetermined gaming state, the first predetermined gaming state (third normal gaming state) corresponding to the second switching mode and the low probability mode and the second predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode and the low probability mode are also provided. A game state (third normal game state) is provided.
The game rotation control means has an execution period determining means for determining an execution period of the game rotation operation.
The first notification means has a determination mode (a function of specifying a variation display time table referred to in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 for each game state) for determining the execution period of the game rotation operation by the execution period determining means. The first determination mode (for example, the variable display time corresponding to the fourth normal game state) for determining the execution period so that the execution period of the game rotation operation is shorter than the execution period of the game rotation operation in the second notification means. The function of referring to the table) and the second determination to determine the execution period so that the execution period of the game rotation operation in the first notification means is longer than the execution period of the game rotation operation in the second notification means. A mode (for example, a function of referring to a variable display time table corresponding to the second normal game state) is provided.
It is characterized by providing means for switching the determination mode so that the determination mode in the first predetermined gaming state becomes the first determination mode and the determination mode in the second predetermined gaming state becomes the second determination mode. A gaming machine.

According to the feature I7, both the first predetermined gaming state and the second predetermined gaming state correspond to the low probability mode and the second switching mode (so-called time-saving gaming state), and the ball enters the first starting ball entry section. Is given preferential treatment. However, in the first predetermined gaming state, the execution period of the game rotation operation related to the first start ball entry unit is shorter than the execution period of the game rotation operation related to the second start ball entry unit, whereas the second In the predetermined gaming state, the execution period of the game rotation operation related to the first start ball entry unit is longer than the execution period of the game rotation operation related to the second start ball entry unit. That is, in the first predetermined game state, the game progresses mainly on the game rotation operation based on the ball entering the first start ball entry portion (high-speed digestion on the first start ball entry portion side), and in the second predetermined game state. The game progresses mainly on the game rotation operation based on the ball entering the second start ball entry section (high-speed digestion on the second start ball entry section side). Therefore, according to the second switching mode in the first predetermined gaming state, (1) the chance of paying out based on the entry into the first starting ball entry section increases, and (2) the entry into the first starting ball entry section. The chances of the lottery being executed based on the ball will increase. On the other hand, according to the second switching mode in the second predetermined game state, the game progresses mainly by the game rotation operation related to the second start ball entry section, and the player enters the first start ball entry section. The gap between the ball opportunity and the lottery opportunity related to the entry into the first starting ball entry section becomes large. That is, the benefit of increasing the number of balls entering the first starting ball entry section is mainly the above (1). In this way, by making a difference in the flow of the game between the first predetermined game state and the second predetermined game state (so-called time-saving game state), the monotonization of the game is suppressed and the degree of attention to the game is improved. Can contribute to.

Feature I8. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launch mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (pain device 222) for paying out the game ball based on the ball entering the ball entry units (actuated ball entry units 62, 63 and variable winning devices 64, 65) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry unit (actuated ball entry units 62, 63) as the ball entry unit. A function to execute the process of acquiring pending information) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) that can store the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means up to a predetermined number set in advance, and
A determination means (for lottery in MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group for a jackpot result). Function to execute processing) and
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, the game rotation operation (variation display of the pattern on the operation port display units D1 and D2) is started, and the result of the determination is As a result of the notification corresponding to, the end of the game round operation is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game rotation control means (a function of executing display control of the operation port display units D1 and D2 by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the predetermined notification means (operation port display units D1 and D2).
The determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, and the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state ~) based on the execution of the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means. It is equipped with a special game state transition means (a function of executing the game state transition process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that shifts to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
The starting ball entry section has a first starting ball entry section (first actuating ball entry section 62) and a second start ball entry section (second actuating ball entry section 63), and the first start ball entry section and the first 2 The starting ball entry portion is arranged in a predetermined flow path (right route) in the game area.
The predetermined notification means are a first notification means (display unit D1 for the first operation port) that performs a game rotation operation based on the ball entering the first start ball entry unit, and the second start ball entry unit. It has a second notifying means (display unit D2 for the second operating port) that performs a game rotation operation based on entering the ball into the ball.
The game rotation control means can execute the game rotation operation on one of the first notification means and the second notification means during the game rotation operation on the other.
A variable mechanism (electric) that can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the first starting ball entering portion and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the accepted state. Character 71) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the non-accepting state period are longer than those of the first switching mode. Two switching modes (high frequency support mode) are provided.
As the determination mode (lottery mode) in which the determination is performed by the determination means, the low probability mode in which the probability of the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively low and the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information are obtained. There is a high probability mode with a relatively high probability,
As the predetermined gaming state, the first predetermined gaming state (fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the second switching mode and the high probability mode and the second predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode and the high probability mode are also provided. A game state (fourth normal game state) is provided.
The game rotation control means has an execution period determining means for determining an execution period of the game rotation operation.
The first notification means has a determination mode (a function of specifying a variation display time table referred to in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 for each game state) for determining the execution period of the game rotation operation by the execution period determining means. The first determination mode (for example, the variable display time corresponding to the fourth normal game state) for determining the execution period so that the execution period of the game rotation operation is shorter than the execution period of the game rotation operation in the second notification means. The function of referring to the table) and the second determination to determine the execution period so that the execution period of the game rotation operation in the first notification means is longer than the execution period of the game rotation operation in the second notification means. A mode (for example, a function of referring to a variable display time table corresponding to the second normal game state) is provided.
It is characterized by providing means for switching the determination mode so that the determination mode in the first predetermined gaming state becomes the first determination mode and the determination mode in the second predetermined gaming state becomes the second determination mode. A gaming machine.

According to the feature I8, both the first predetermined gaming state and the second predetermined gaming state correspond to the high probability mode and the second switching mode (so-called probabilistic gaming state), and the ball enters the first starting ball entry section. Is given preferential treatment. However, in the first predetermined gaming state, the execution period of the game rotation operation related to the first start ball entry unit is shorter than the execution period of the game rotation operation related to the second start ball entry unit, whereas the second In the predetermined gaming state, the execution period of the game rotation operation related to the first start ball entry unit is longer than the execution period of the game rotation operation related to the second start ball entry unit. That is, in the first predetermined game state, the game progresses mainly on the game rotation operation based on the ball entering the first start ball entry portion (high-speed digestion on the first start ball entry portion side), and in the second predetermined game state. The game progresses mainly on the game rotation operation based on the ball entering the second start ball entry section (high-speed digestion on the second start ball entry section side). Therefore, according to the second switching mode in the first predetermined gaming state, (1) the chance of paying out based on the entry into the first starting ball entry section increases, and (2) the entry into the first starting ball entry section. The chances of the lottery being executed based on the ball will increase. On the other hand, according to the second switching mode in the second predetermined game state, the game progresses mainly by the game rotation operation related to the second start ball entry section, and the player enters the first start ball entry section. The gap between the ball opportunity and the lottery opportunity related to the entry into the first starting ball entry section becomes large. That is, the benefit of increasing the number of balls entering the first starting ball entry section is mainly the above (1). In this way, by making a difference in the flow of the game between the first predetermined game state and the second predetermined game state (so-called probabilistic game state), the monotonization of the game is suppressed and the degree of attention to the game is improved. Can contribute to.

Further, the technical ideas shown in the features I1 to I8 may be applied to the above-mentioned features A to H.

<Characteristic J group>
The following feature J group is described as "a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed and a gaming ball launching means for launching a gaming ball into the gaming area based on a firing operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry portion provided in a game area, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out and other benefits are given to the player. Regarding the background technology of "(for example, see Patent Document 1)", there is an invention that "in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the degree of attention to the game." It was made with the problem to be solved.

Features J1. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launch mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (pain device 222) for paying out the game ball based on the ball entering the ball entry units (actuated ball entry units 62, 63 and variable winning devices 64, 65) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry unit (actuated ball entry units 62, 63) as the ball entry unit. A function to execute the process of acquiring pending information) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means (mainly) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result or random number group corresponding to the special hit result). The function of executing the lottery process in the MPU 602 of the control device 162) and
The game rotation operation is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the game rotation operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination. With this as one game time, a game time control means that controls a predetermined notification means so that a game time operation of each game time is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The determination result by the determination means becomes a determination result (big hit result or special hit result) corresponding to the predetermined determination information, and the game state is determined based on the execution of the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means. Special game state transition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162 to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state)) With the ability to execute)
As the predetermined gaming state, a value obtained by dividing the number of game balls paid out by the first gaming state (first normal gaming state) and the payout means by the number of shots to a predetermined flow path (right route) in the gaming area. The number of the second gaming state (second normal gaming state) set to be higher than the first gaming state and the number of gaming balls paid out by the payout means are set to a predetermined flow path (right) in the gaming area. The third gaming state (third normal gaming state or fourth normal gaming state) is provided so that the value divided by the number of shots to the root) is set to be higher than the first gaming state. A gaming machine featuring.

In a type of gaming machine in which the decrease (investment) in the number of balls held as the game progresses is alleviated by the transition of the game state, the diversification of the game can contribute to the improvement of the degree of attention to the game. In this type of gaming machine, the impact of the mitigation function can be strengthened by increasing the gap between the case where the reduction of the number of balls held is mitigated and the case where the reduction is not mitigated, while increasing the gap is the mitigation function. It is feared that it will hinder the increase of opportunities to demonstrate. In other words, even if it has a mitigation function, the strengthening of the restriction on its activation may hinder the enhancement of the above-mentioned effect of improving the degree of attention. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, the value (base) obtained by dividing the number of payouts by the number of shots increases in the order of the first game state <second game state <third game state, and goes to a higher game state. By shifting, the decrease in the number of balls (investment) will be eased. In this way, by providing the medium base between the low base and the high base, it is possible to increase the chances of alleviating the decrease in the number of balls held as compared with the case where the medium base is not provided. Therefore, it is possible to preferably exert the effect of increasing the opportunity to raise the base and increasing the degree of attention to the game by diversifying the game.

Feature J2. As the special gaming state, a first special gaming state and a second special gaming state in which the variable input portion is in the receiving state for a longer period than the first special gaming state are provided.
The first judgment information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and the second judgment information (random number group corresponding to the special hit result) are provided as the predetermined judgment information.
The variable ball entry section includes a first variable ball entry section (variable winning device 64) and a second variable ball entry section (variable winning device 65), which are arranged in the predetermined flow path together with the starting ball entry section. Including
The special game state transition means
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the first determination result (big hit result) corresponding to the first determination information, the first variable entry portion is shifted to the first special gaming state to be switched. Means and
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the second determination result (special hit result) corresponding to the second determination information, the state shifts to the second special gaming state in which the second variable ball entry portion is the switching target. Have a means to make
In the second game state, the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout means is calculated by the number of shots to the predetermined flow path because the chances of the second determination result are increased as compared with the first game state. The divided value becomes higher than the first game state,
A variable mechanism (electric function) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (non-accepting state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the receiving state. Thing 71) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the non-accepting state period are longer than those of the first switching mode. Two switching modes (high frequency support mode) are provided.
The switching control mode of the variable mechanism in the first gaming state and the second gaming state becomes the first switching mode, and the switching control mode of the variable mechanism in the third gaming state becomes the second switching mode. It is composed and
In the third gaming state, the switching control mode of the variable mechanism becomes the second switching mode, so that the number of gaming balls paid out by the payout means is divided by the number of shots to the predetermined flow path. The gaming machine according to feature J1, wherein is configured to be higher than the second gaming state and the first gaming state.

According to the feature J2, the chance of getting the second judgment result increases by shifting from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, and the chance of winning the prize ball based on the entry into the second variable entry section increases. .. On the other hand, in the third game state, the variable mechanism increases the chances of entering the starting ball and the chances of winning a prize ball based on the entry into the starting ball. In the third game state, in particular, by increasing the chances of entering the starting ball, the chances of acquiring special information (opportunities for executing the judgment) also increase, and the game (playing operation) is promptly performed. Can be advanced to. In this way, by giving benefits from the two aspects of the base and the game progress, ensuring the superiority of the third game state over the first game state and the second game state is to realize the diversification of the game. Is preferable. In the second game state, the base is raised by increasing the chances of entering the starting ball, and in the third game state, the base is raised by increasing the chances of the second judgment result. It becomes difficult to increase the progress speed of the game in the third game state, which is the higher rank. That is, in order to enhance the exhilaration in the third gaming state, it is technically significant to have the configuration shown in this feature.

Further, although the second gaming state and the third gaming state are common in that the base is pulled up from the first gaming state, the methods are completely different. For example, when the base of the second game state and the third game state is raised by increasing the operation frequency of the variable mechanism, the frequency of winning balls to the starting ball entry portion and the progress speed of the game The correlation becomes stronger, and the benefits of one are more likely to be influenced by the benefits of the other. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if the raising of the base in the second gaming state and the raising of the base in the third gaming state are realized by different methods, the occurrence of such inconvenience can be suppressed and various games can be played. Can be suitably realized.

Features J3. The starting ball entry section includes a first starting ball entry section (right side actuating ball entry section 62R) to which the variable mechanism is attached and a second starting ball entry section (second actuating ball entry section 63) to which the variable mechanism is not attached. Including and
The first start ball entry portion and the second start ball entry portion are arranged in the predetermined flow path in the game area.
The determination means has a higher probability of producing the second determination result in the determination based on the entry into the second start entry portion than in the determination based on the entry into the first start entry portion. It is configured to be
The game rotation control means
An execution period determining means for determining the execution period of the game rotation operation, and
It has a determination mode switching means (a function of switching the variable display time table referred to by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 according to the game state) for switching the determination mode of the execution period of the game rotation operation by the execution period determination means. And
As a mode for determining the execution period of the game rotation operation by the execution period determining means, the execution period of the game rotation operation based on the entry into the first start entry section is entered into the second start entry section. The second mode is a determination mode in which the execution period is determined so as to be shorter than the execution period of the game rotation operation based on the ball, and the execution period of the game rotation operation based on the ball entering the first start ball entry portion. It has a determination mode in which the execution period is determined so as to be longer than the execution period of the game rotation operation based on the entry into the starting ball entry section.
When shifting from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, the determination mode of the execution period is switched to the second determination mode, so that the first special gaming state is reached and then the first special The value obtained by dividing the number of gaming balls paid out during the period until the gaming state is reached by the number of gaming balls launched into the predetermined flow path during the period is the second value as compared with the first gaming state. When the gaming state is higher and the transition from the second gaming state to the third gaming state is performed, the determination mode of the execution period is switched to the first determination mode, while the switching control mode of the variable mechanism. The number of gaming balls paid out during the period from the first special gaming state to the next first special gaming state by switching from the first switching mode to the second switching mode. Is divided by the number of gaming balls launched into the predetermined flow path during the period, so that the value obtained in the third gaming state is higher than that in the second gaming state. Features The gaming machine described in J2.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, the determination relating to the entry into the second starting ball entry portion to which the variable mechanism is not attached is second than the determination relating to the entry into the first starting ball entry portion to which the variable mechanism is attached. A difference is provided so that the judgment result can be easily obtained, and in the first game state, the game progresses mainly by the game rotation operation based on the ball entering the first starting ball entry portion, and the second game progresses. In the game state, the game progresses mainly by the game rotation operation based on the entry into the second start ball entry section, and in the third game state, the game rotation based on the entry into the first start ball entry section. The game progresses mainly for the movement. With such a configuration, the transition to the second gaming state increases the chances of a second judgment result and the above base is raised, and the transition to the third gaming state leads to the first starting ball entry section. By increasing the chances of entering the ball, it is possible to preferably realize an increase in the progress speed of the base and the game.

Features J4. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launch mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (pain device 222) for paying out the game ball based on the ball entering the ball entry units (actuated ball entry units 62, 63 and variable winning devices 64, 65) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry unit (actuated ball entry units 62, 63) as the ball entry unit. A function to execute the process of acquiring pending information) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means (mainly) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result or random number group corresponding to the special hit result). The function of executing the lottery process in the MPU 602 of the control device 162) and
The game rotation operation is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the game rotation operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination. With this as one game time, a game time control means that controls a predetermined notification means so that a game time operation of each game time is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The determination result by the determination means becomes a determination result (big hit result or special hit result) corresponding to the predetermined determination information, and the game state is determined based on the execution of the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means. Special game state transition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162 to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state)) (Function to execute) and the accepted state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and the non-accepted state (non-accepted state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the accepted state. Variable mechanism (electric accessory 71) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the special gaming state, a first special gaming state and a second special gaming state in which the variable input portion is in the receiving state for a longer period than the first special gaming state are provided.
The first judgment information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and the second judgment information (random number group corresponding to the special hit result) are provided as the predetermined judgment information.
The special game state transition means
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the first determination result (big hit result) corresponding to the first determination information, the means for shifting to the first special gaming state and
It has a means for shifting to the second special gaming state when the determination result by the determination means becomes the second determination result (special hit result) corresponding to the second determination information.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the non-accepting state period are longer than those of the first switching mode. Two switching modes (high frequency support mode) are provided.
As a determination mode (lottery mode) in which the determination is performed by the determination means, a low probability mode in which the probability of the first determination result corresponding to the first determination information is relatively low and the determination mode corresponding to the first determination information are supported. There is a high probability mode in which the probability of becoming the first judgment result is relatively high.
The predetermined gaming states include a first gaming state (first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode and the low probability mode, and a second gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode and the high probability mode (the first switching mode and the high probability mode). A second normal game state) and a third game state (third normal game state or fourth normal game state) corresponding to the second switching mode are provided.
The starting ball entry section includes a first starting ball entry section (right side actuating ball entry section 62R) to which the variable mechanism is attached and a second starting ball entry section (second actuating ball entry section 63) to which the variable mechanism is not attached. Including and
The first start ball entry section and the second start ball entry section are arranged in a predetermined flow path (right route) in the game area.
The determination means has a higher probability of producing the second determination result in the determination based on the entry into the second start entry portion than in the determination based on the entry into the first start entry portion. It is configured to be
The game rotation control means
An execution period determining means for determining the execution period of the game rotation operation, and
It has a determination mode switching means (a function of switching the variable display time table referred to by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 according to the game state) for switching the determination mode of the execution period of the game rotation operation by the execution period determination means. And
As a mode for determining the execution period of the game rotation operation by the execution period determining means, the execution period of the game rotation operation based on the entry into the first start entry section is entered into the second start entry section. The second mode is a determination mode in which the execution period is determined so as to be shorter than the execution period of the game rotation operation based on the ball, and the execution period of the game rotation operation based on the ball entering the first start ball entry portion. It has a determination mode in which the execution period is determined so as to be longer than the execution period of the game rotation operation based on the entry into the starting ball entry section.
When shifting from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, the determination mode of the execution period is switched to the second determination mode, so that the first special gaming state is reached and then the first special The value obtained by dividing the number of gaming balls paid out during the period until the gaming state is reached by the number of gaming balls launched into the predetermined flow path during the period is the second value as compared with the first gaming state. When the gaming state is higher and the transition from the second gaming state to the third gaming state is performed, the determination mode of the execution period is switched to the first determination mode, while the switching control mode of the variable mechanism. The number of gaming balls paid out during the period from the first special gaming state to the next first special gaming state by switching from the first switching mode to the second switching mode. Is divided by the number of gaming balls launched into the predetermined flow path during the period, so that the value obtained in the third gaming state is higher than that in the second gaming state. Pachinko machine.

In a type of gaming machine in which the decrease (investment) in the number of balls held as the game progresses is alleviated by the transition of the game state, the diversification of the game can contribute to the improvement of the degree of attention to the game. In this type of gaming machine, the impact of the mitigation function can be strengthened by increasing the gap between the case where the reduction of the number of balls held is mitigated and the case where the reduction is not mitigated, while increasing the gap is the mitigation function. It is feared that it will hinder the increase of opportunities to demonstrate. In other words, even if it has a mitigation function, the strengthening of the restriction on its activation may hinder the enhancement of the above-mentioned effect of improving the degree of attention. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, the value (base) obtained by dividing the number of payouts by the number of shots increases in the order of the first game state <second game state <third game state, and goes to a higher game state. By shifting, the decrease in the number of balls (investment) will be eased. In this way, by providing the medium base between the so-called low base and the high base, it is possible to increase the chances that the decrease in the number of balls held can be alleviated as compared with the case where the medium base is not provided. Therefore, it is possible to preferably exert the effect of increasing the opportunity to raise the base and increasing the degree of attention to the game by diversifying the game.

By shifting from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, the chances of getting the second judgment result increase, and the chances of winning the prize ball based on the entry into the second variable entry section increase. On the other hand, in the third game state, the variable mechanism increases the chances of entering the starting ball and the chances of winning a prize ball based on the entry into the starting ball. In the third game state, in particular, by increasing the chances of entering the starting ball, the chances of acquiring special information (opportunities for executing the judgment) also increase, and the game (playing operation) is promptly performed. Can be advanced to. In this way, by giving benefits from the two aspects of the base and the game progress, ensuring the superiority of the third game state over the first game state and the second game state is to realize the diversification of the game. Is preferable. In the second game state, the base is raised by increasing the chances of entering the starting ball, and in the third game state, the base is raised by increasing the chances of the second judgment result. It becomes difficult to increase the progress speed of the game in the third game state, which is the higher rank. That is, in order to enhance the exhilaration in the third gaming state, it is technically significant to have the configuration shown in this feature.

Further, although the second gaming state and the third gaming state are common in that the base is pulled up from the first gaming state, the methods are completely different. For example, when the base of the second game state and the third game state is raised by increasing the operation frequency of the variable mechanism, the frequency of winning balls to the starting ball entry portion and the progress speed of the game The correlation becomes stronger, and the benefits of one are more likely to be influenced by the benefits of the other. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if the raising of the base in the second gaming state and the raising of the base in the third gaming state are realized by different methods, the occurrence of such inconvenience can be suppressed and various games can be played. Can be suitably realized.

As described above, the judgment relating to the entry into the second starting ball entry portion to which the variable mechanism is not attached is more likely to be the second determination result than the determination relating to the entry into the first starting ball entry portion to which the variable mechanism is attached. In the first game state, the game progresses mainly by the game rotation operation based on the ball entering the first starting ball entry portion, and in the second game state, the second game progresses. The game progresses mainly based on the ball entering the starting ball entry section, and in the third game state, the game turning action based on the entry into the first starting ball entry section is the main activity. The game progresses. With such a configuration, the transition to the second gaming state increases the chances of a second judgment result and the above base is raised, and the transition to the third gaming state leads to the first starting ball entry section. By increasing the chances of entering the ball, it is possible to preferably realize an increase in the progress speed of the base and the game.

In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is "a game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and a game ball launch capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on a player's operation. A payout means for paying out a game ball based on a means (game ball launching mechanism 110) and a ball entering a ball entry unit (actuated ball entry units 62, 63 and variable winning devices 64, 65) provided in the game area. Special information (holding information) in a gaming machine equipped with (payout device 222) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (acting ball entry section 62, 63) as the ball entry section. Special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process of acquiring hold information in MPU 602 of the main control device 162) and acquisition information storage means (main) capable of storing special information acquired by the special information acquisition means. The reserved ball storage area 632) in the RAM 604 of the control device 162) and the special information stored in the acquired information storage means are predetermined determination information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result and random number group corresponding to the special hit result). The determination means (a function of executing the lottery process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the correspondence is supported, and the determination is performed prior to the determination by the determination means or by the determination means. Based on this, the game rounding operation is started, and the end of the game rounding operation as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination is stored in the acquired information storage means as one game round. A game turn control means that controls a predetermined notification means so that a game turn operation of each game turn is performed according to special information, and a judgment result (big hit result) in which the judgment result by the judgment means corresponds to the predetermined judgment information. Or a special hit result), and the game state is changed from the predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state) to the player based on the execution of the game turn operation by the game turn control means. A special game state transition means (a function of executing the game state transition process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for shifting to an advantageous special game state (open / close execution mode) and a game ball can enter the starting ball entry portion. A variable mechanism (electric accessory 71) that can be switched between an open state (open state) and a non-accepted state (non-accepted state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state, and a variable that controls the variable mechanism. It is equipped with a mechanical control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162), and as the special gaming state, the first special gaming state and the first special gaming state can be described. A second special gaming state is provided in which the changing ball portion is in the receiving state for a long period of time, and the first judgment information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and the second judgment information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) are provided as the predetermined judgment information. A random number group corresponding to the special hit result) is provided, and in the special game state transition means, when the judgment result by the judgment means becomes the first judgment result (big hit result) corresponding to the first judgment information. In addition, when the means for shifting to the first special gaming state and the determination result by the determination means become the second determination result (special hit result) corresponding to the second determination information, the second special gaming state As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the non-switching mode than the first switching mode are provided. A second switching mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the acceptance state is extended is provided, and as a determination mode (lottery mode) in which the determination is performed by the determination means, a first determination corresponding to the first determination information is provided. A low-probability mode in which the probability of one determination result is relatively low and a high-probability mode in which the probability of a first determination result corresponding to the first determination information is relatively high are provided. , The first gaming state (first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode and the low probability mode, and the second gaming state (second normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode and the high probability mode. ) And a third gaming state (third normal gaming state or fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the second switching mode, and the starting ball entry portion is the first to which the variable mechanism is attached. The first starting ball entry section and the second starting ball entry section include the starting ball entry section (right side actuating ball entry section 62R) and the second starting ball entry section (second actuating ball entry section 63) to which the variable mechanism is not attached. The starting ball entry portion is arranged in a predetermined flow path (right route) in the game area, and the determination means is the second determination based on the entry into the first starting ball entry portion. The determination based on the entry into the starting ball entry portion is configured to have a higher probability of the second determination result, and the game rotation control means determines the execution period of the game rotation operation. Determining mode switching means for switching between the execution period determining means to be executed and the determining mode of the executing period of the game rotation operation by the execution period determining means (variable display time table referred to by MPU 602 of the main control device 162 according to the gaming state Has a function to switch) As a mode for determining the execution period of the game rotation operation by the line period determining means, the execution period of the game rotation operation based on the entry into the first start ball entry unit is the entry period into the second start ball entry unit. The determination mode in which the execution period is determined so as to be shorter than the execution period of the game rotation operation based on the first start, and the execution period of the game rotation operation based on the entry into the first start ball entry portion are the second start. It has a determination mode in which the execution period is determined so as to be longer than the execution period of the game rotation operation based on the ball entering the ball entry portion, and the determination mode switching means includes the first gaming state and the first game state. The execution period determination mode in the third gaming state is set to the first determination mode, and the execution period determination mode in the second gaming state is set to the second determination mode. In the state, the number of gaming balls paid out during the period from the first special gaming state to the next first special gaming state is launched into the predetermined flow path during the period. The value divided by the number of gaming balls is higher than that in the first gaming state, and in the third gaming state, the first special gaming state is reached and then the first special gaming state is reached. The value obtained by dividing the number of gaming balls paid out during the period until the number of gaming balls is divided by the number of gaming balls launched into the predetermined flow path during the period is configured to be higher than that of the second gaming state. A gaming machine characterized by being played. It is also possible to say.

Feature J5. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launch mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (pain device 222) for paying out the game ball based on the ball entering the ball entry units (actuated ball entry units 62, 63 and variable winning devices 64, 65) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry unit (actuated ball entry units 62, 63) as the ball entry unit. A function to execute the process of acquiring pending information) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means (mainly) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result or random number group corresponding to the special hit result). The function of executing the lottery process in the MPU 602 of the control device 162) and
The game rotation operation is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the game rotation operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination. With this as one game time, a game time control means that controls a predetermined notification means so that a game time operation of each game time is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The determination result by the determination means becomes a determination result (big hit result or special hit result) corresponding to the predetermined determination information, and the game state is determined based on the execution of the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means. Special game state transition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162 to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state)) (Function to execute) and the accepted state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and the non-accepted state (non-accepted state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the accepted state. Variable mechanism (electric accessory 71) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the special gaming state, a first special gaming state and a second special gaming state in which the variable input portion is in the receiving state for a longer period than the first special gaming state are provided.
The first judgment information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and the second judgment information (random number group corresponding to the special hit result) are provided as the predetermined judgment information.
The variable ball-entry unit includes a first variable ball-entry unit (variable winning device 64) and a second variable ball-entry unit (variable winning device 65).
The special game state transition means
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the first determination result (big hit result) corresponding to the first determination information, the first variable entry portion is shifted to the first special gaming state to be switched. Means and
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the second determination result (special hit result) corresponding to the second determination information, the state shifts to the second special gaming state in which the second variable ball entry portion is the switching target. Have a means to make
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the non-accepting state period are longer than those of the first switching mode. Two switching modes (high frequency support mode) are provided.
As a determination mode (lottery mode) in which the determination is performed by the determination means, a low probability mode in which the probability of the first determination result corresponding to the first determination information is relatively low and the determination mode corresponding to the first determination information are supported. There is a high probability mode in which the probability of becoming the first judgment result is relatively high.
The predetermined gaming states include a first gaming state (first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode and the low probability mode, and a second gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode and the high probability mode (the first switching mode and the high probability mode). A second normal game state) and a third game state (third normal game state or fourth normal game state) corresponding to the second switching mode are provided.
The starting ball entry section includes a first starting ball entry section (right side actuating ball entry section 62R) to which the variable mechanism is attached and a second starting ball entry section (second actuating ball entry section 63) to which the variable mechanism is not attached. Including and
The first start ball entry section and the second start ball entry section are arranged in a predetermined flow path (right route) in the game area.
The determination means has a higher probability of producing the second determination result in the determination based on the entry into the second start entry portion than in the determination based on the entry into the first start entry portion. It is configured to be
The game rotation control means
An execution period determining means for determining the execution period of the game rotation operation, and
It has a determination mode switching means (a function of switching the variable display time table referred to by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 according to the game state) for switching the determination mode of the execution period of the game rotation operation by the execution period determination means. And
As a mode for determining the execution period of the game rotation operation by the execution period determining means, the execution period of the game rotation operation based on the entry into the first start entry section is entered into the second start entry section. The second mode is a determination mode in which the execution period is determined so as to be shorter than the execution period of the game rotation operation based on the ball, and the execution period of the game rotation operation based on the ball entering the first start ball entry portion. It has a determination mode in which the execution period is determined so as to be longer than the execution period of the game rotation operation based on the entry into the starting ball entry section.
When shifting from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, the determination mode of the execution period is switched to the second determination mode, so that the first special gaming state is reached and then the first special The value obtained by dividing the number of gaming balls paid out during the period until the gaming state is reached by the number of gaming balls launched into the predetermined flow path during the period is the second value as compared with the first gaming state. When the gaming state is higher and the transition from the second gaming state to the third gaming state is performed, the determination mode of the execution period is switched to the first determination mode, while the switching control mode of the variable mechanism. The number of gaming balls paid out during the period from the first special gaming state to the next first special gaming state by switching from the first switching mode to the second switching mode. Is divided by the number of gaming balls launched into the predetermined flow path during the period, so that the value obtained in the third gaming state is higher than that in the second gaming state. Pachinko machine.

In a type of gaming machine in which the decrease (investment) in the number of balls held as the game progresses is alleviated by the transition of the game state, the diversification of the game can contribute to the improvement of the degree of attention to the game. In this type of gaming machine, the impact of the mitigation function can be strengthened by increasing the gap between the case where the reduction of the number of balls held is mitigated and the case where the reduction is not mitigated, while increasing the gap is the mitigation function. It is feared that it will hinder the increase of opportunities to demonstrate. In other words, even if it has a mitigation function, the strengthening of the restriction on its activation may hinder the enhancement of the above-mentioned effect of improving the degree of attention. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, the value (base) obtained by dividing the number of payouts by the number of shots increases in the order of the first game state <second game state <third game state, and goes to a higher game state. By shifting, the decrease in the number of balls (investment) will be eased. In this way, by providing the medium base between the so-called low base and the high base, it is possible to increase the chances that the decrease in the number of balls held can be alleviated as compared with the case where the medium base is not provided. Therefore, it is possible to preferably exert the effect of increasing the opportunity to raise the base and increasing the degree of attention to the game by diversifying the game.

By shifting from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, the chances of getting the second judgment result increase, and the chances of winning the prize ball based on the entry into the second variable entry section increase. On the other hand, in the third game state, the variable mechanism increases the chances of entering the starting ball and the chances of winning a prize ball based on the entry into the starting ball. In the third game state, in particular, by increasing the chances of entering the starting ball, the chances of acquiring special information (opportunities for executing the judgment) also increase, and the game (playing operation) is promptly performed. Can be advanced to. In this way, by giving benefits from the two aspects of the base and the game progress, ensuring the superiority of the third game state over the first game state and the second game state is to realize the diversification of the game. Is preferable. In the second game state, the base is raised by increasing the chances of entering the starting ball, and in the third game state, the base is raised by increasing the chances of the second judgment result. It becomes difficult to increase the progress speed of the game in the third game state, which is the higher rank. That is, in order to enhance the exhilaration in the third gaming state, it is technically significant to have the configuration shown in this feature.

Further, although the second gaming state and the third gaming state are common in that the base is pulled up from the first gaming state, the methods are completely different. For example, when the base of the second game state and the third game state is raised by increasing the operation frequency of the variable mechanism, the frequency of winning balls to the starting ball entry portion and the progress speed of the game The correlation becomes stronger, and the benefits of one are more likely to be influenced by the benefits of the other. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if the raising of the base in the second gaming state and the raising of the base in the third gaming state are realized by different methods, the occurrence of such inconvenience can be suppressed and various games can be played. Can be suitably realized.

As described above, the judgment relating to the entry into the second starting ball entry portion to which the variable mechanism is not attached is more likely to be the second determination result than the determination relating to the entry into the first starting ball entry portion to which the variable mechanism is attached. In the first game state, the game progresses mainly by the game rotation operation based on the ball entering the first starting ball entry portion, and in the second game state, the second game progresses. The game progresses mainly based on the ball entering the starting ball entry section, and in the third game state, the game turning action based on the entry into the first starting ball entry section is the main activity. The game progresses. With such a configuration, the transition to the second gaming state increases the chances of a second judgment result and the above base is raised, and the transition to the third gaming state leads to the first starting ball entry section. By increasing the chances of entering the ball, it is possible to preferably realize an increase in the progress speed of the base and the game.

Features J6. The value obtained by dividing the number of game balls paid out by the payout means in the second gaming state by the number of shots to the predetermined flow path and the number of game balls paid out by the payout means in the third game state are determined. The difference between the value divided by the number of shots to the flow path is the value obtained by dividing the number of game balls paid out by the payout means in the second gaming state by the number of shots to the predetermined flow path and the first. Any one of feature J1 to feature J5, characterized in that the number of game balls paid out by the payout means in the game state is smaller than the difference from the value obtained by dividing by the number of shots to the predetermined flow path. The gaming machine described in one.

According to the feature J6, the base in the second gaming state is set to be closer to the latter of the base in the first gaming state and the base in the third gaming state. That is, the base is provided with a difference so that the first gaming state << the second gaming state <the third gaming state. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from giving the impression that the existence of the second gaming state, which has a smaller benefit than the third gaming state, is troublesome.

In particular, in combination with the configuration in which the third game state is given benefits from the two aspects of the base and the game progress as shown in the feature J2, even if the base is brought closer to the third game state, the second game The difference between the state and the third game state becomes clear. As a result, it is possible to preferably suppress that bringing the base in the second gaming state closer to the base in the third gaming state becomes a factor that reduces the presence of the second gaming state.

The technical ideas shown in the features J1 to J6 may be applied to the features A to I.

The following feature K group is described as "a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed and a gaming ball launching means for launching a gaming ball into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry portion provided in a game area, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out and other benefits are given to the player. Regarding the background technology of "(for example, see Patent Document 1)", there is an invention that "in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the degree of attention to the game." It was made with the problem to be solved.

Features K1. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
In the special information acquisition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry unit (actuated ball entry unit 62, 63) provided in the game area. (A function to execute the process of acquiring the pending information) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means (for lottery in MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to the jackpot result). (Function to execute the processing of) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the result of the determination is As a result of the notification corresponding to the above, the end of the game round operation is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The game time control means (a function of executing the game time control process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that controls the predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the operation port), and
Based on the determination result by the determination means being the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means being completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (for example, the second normal game). With a special game state transition means (a function of executing the game state transition process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the state to the fourth normal game state). With
As the predetermined game state, a first predetermined game state (second normal game state), a second predetermined game state (third normal game state), a game more than the first predetermined game state and the second predetermined game state. A third predetermined gaming state (fourth normal gaming state) that is advantageous to the person is provided.
A predetermined game state transition means for shifting the game state to any predetermined game state after the end of the special game state is provided.
As the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, a first determination result (probability variation jackpot result) and a second determination result (normal jackpot result) are provided.
When the first determination result and the second determination result are obtained in a predetermined order, the predetermined gaming state transition means changes from the first predetermined gaming state to the third predetermined gaming state through the second predetermined gaming state. A gaming machine characterized by being configured to be migrated.

According to the feature K1, in order to shift to the third predetermined gaming state with high advantage, it is necessary to win the first determination result (winning result) and the second determination result (winning result) in a predetermined order. In this way, by configuring the configuration in which a plurality of different winning results are passed through when transitioning to the third predetermined gaming state, it is possible to prevent the flow of the game from becoming monotonous until the transition to the third predetermined gaming state. In particular, when the target third predetermined gaming state is reached, the impression is strong and tends to remain. Therefore, if a configuration is configured in which different types of winning results are passed through in the process of reaching the third predetermined game state, the effect of improving the degree of attention due to the diversification of the game by combining the plurality of types of winning results is suitably exhibited. be able to.

Feature K2. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
In the special information acquisition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry unit (actuated ball entry unit 62, 63) provided in the game area. (A function to execute the process of acquiring the pending information) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means (for lottery in MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to the jackpot result). (Function to execute the processing of) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the result of the determination is As a result of the notification corresponding to the above, the end of the game round operation is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The game time control means (a function of executing the game time control process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that controls the predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the operation port), and
Based on the determination result by the determination means being the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means being completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (for example, the second normal game). With a special game state transition means (a function of executing the game state transition process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the state to the fourth normal game state). With
As the determination mode (lottery mode) in which the determination is performed by the determination means, the low probability mode in which the probability of the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively low and the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information are obtained. There is a high probability mode with a relatively high probability,
As the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, the judgment result corresponding to the high probability mode corresponding to the transition to the high probability mode (probability variation jackpot result) and the judgment result corresponding to the low probability mode corresponding to the transition to the low probability mode are supported. Judgment result (normal jackpot result) is provided,
As the predetermined game state, a first predetermined game state (second normal game state), a second predetermined game state (third normal game state), a game more than the first predetermined game state and the second predetermined game state. A third predetermined gaming state (fourth normal gaming state) that is advantageous to the person is provided.
A predetermined game state transition means for shifting the game state to any predetermined game state after the end of the special game state is provided.
When the result of the high probability mode correspondence and the result of the low probability mode correspondence are obtained in a predetermined order, the predetermined gaming state transition means goes from the first predetermined gaming state to the second predetermined gaming state and then to the third. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to shift to a predetermined gaming state.

According to the feature K2, in order to shift to the third predetermined gaming state with high advantage, the judgment result corresponding to the high probability mode (winning result) and the judgment result corresponding to the low probability mode (winning result) are won in a predetermined order. I need to let you. In this way, by configuring the configuration in which a plurality of different winning results are passed through when transitioning to the third predetermined gaming state, it is possible to prevent the flow of the game from becoming monotonous until the transition to the third predetermined gaming state. In particular, when the target third predetermined gaming state is reached, the impression is strong and tends to remain. Therefore, if a configuration is configured in which different types of winning results are passed through in the process of reaching the third predetermined game state, the effect of improving the degree of attention due to the diversification of the game by combining the plurality of types of winning results is suitably exhibited. be able to.

Feature K3. The predetermined order is the determination mode corresponding to the determination result that triggers the transition from the first predetermined gaming state to the second predetermined gaming state, and the second predetermined gaming state to the third predetermined gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature K2, wherein the determination result that triggers the transition is defined to have an opposite relationship to the corresponding determination mode.

According to the feature K3, the winning result that triggers the transition from the first predetermined gaming state to the second predetermined gaming state corresponds to the winning result that triggers the transition from the second predetermined gaming state to the third predetermined gaming state. The judgment mode is reversed. That is, it is necessary to go through both the winning result corresponding to the high probability mode and the winning result corresponding to the low probability mode in order to shift to the third predetermined gaming state. With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably suppress the monotonization of the game until the transition to the third predetermined game state.

Features K4. When the predetermined gaming state transition means has a determination result corresponding to the same determination mode as the previous determination result in the first predetermined gaming state, the end of the special gaming state triggered by the later determination result. The gaming machine according to feature K2 or feature K3, wherein the subsequent gaming state is configured to be a predetermined gaming state other than the third predetermined gaming state.

When the judgment results corresponding to the same judgment mode are continuous (when repeated), the transition to the third predetermined gaming state is avoided. As such a configuration, the judgment modes corresponding to the previous and next judgment results are reversed. By differentiating from the case where the above is the case, the effect shown in the feature K3 can be suitably exhibited.

Feature K5. The second predetermined gaming state is configured such that the determination mode in the second predetermined gaming state is opposite to the determination mode in the first predetermined gaming state.
The third predetermined gaming state is configured such that the determination mode in the third predetermined gaming state is opposite to the determination mode in the second predetermined gaming state.
In the predetermined order, the determination result by the determination means in the first predetermined gaming state becomes the determination result corresponding to the determination mode opposite to the determination mode in the first predetermined gaming state, and the second predetermined gaming state After shifting to, the order is defined so that the determination result by the determination means in the second predetermined gaming state becomes the determination result corresponding to the determination mode opposite to the determination mode in the second predetermined gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature K2 to the feature K4, which is characterized by being present.

According to the feature K5, when the winning result corresponding to the determination mode opposite to the determination mode in the first predetermined gaming state is obtained in the first predetermined gaming state, the process shifts to the second predetermined gaming state, and the second predetermined gaming state is established. When the winning result corresponding to the determination mode opposite to the determination mode in the second predetermined gaming state is obtained in the gaming state, the process shifts to the third predetermined gaming state. With such a configuration, the flow of the game can be significantly changed in the process of reaching the third predetermined game state, and the effect of suppressing the monotony of the game can be suitably exhibited.

Feature K6. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
In the special information acquisition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry unit (actuated ball entry unit 62, 63) provided in the game area. (A function to execute the process of acquiring the pending information) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means (for lottery in MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to the jackpot result). (Function to execute the processing of) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the result of the determination is As a result of the notification corresponding to the above, the end of the game round operation is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The game time control means (a function of executing the game time control process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that controls the predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the operation port), and
Based on the determination result by the determination means being the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means being completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (for example, the second normal game). With a special game state transition means (a function of executing the game state transition process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the state to the fourth normal game state). With
As the determination mode (lottery mode) in which the determination is performed by the determination means, the low probability mode in which the probability of the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively low and the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information are obtained. There is a high probability mode with a relatively high probability,
As the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, the high probability mode correspondence result corresponding to the transition to the high probability mode (probability variation jackpot result) and the low probability mode correspondence result corresponding to the transition to the low probability mode (normally). The jackpot result) is provided,
The predetermined gaming state includes a first predetermined gaming state (second normal gaming state) and a second predetermined gaming state (third normal gaming state) in which the determination mode corresponding to the first predetermined gaming state is opposite. , The third predetermined gaming state (fourth normal gaming state), which is more advantageous to the player than the first predetermined gaming state and the second predetermined gaming state, and the determination mode corresponding to the second predetermined gaming state is opposite. ) And are provided,
A predetermined game state transition means for shifting the game state to any predetermined game state after the end of the special game state is provided.
The predetermined game state transition means is
When the determination result by the determination means in the first predetermined gaming state becomes the determination result corresponding to the determination mode opposite to the determination mode in the first predetermined gaming state, the process shifts to the second predetermined gaming state. Means and
When the determination result by the determination means in the second predetermined gaming state becomes the determination result corresponding to the determination mode opposite to the determination mode in the second predetermined gaming state, the state shifts to the third predetermined gaming state. A gaming machine characterized by having means.

According to the feature K6, in order to shift to the third predetermined gaming state with high advantage, the judgment result corresponding to the high probability mode (winning result) and the judgment result corresponding to the low probability mode (winning result) are won in a predetermined order. I need to let you. In this way, by configuring the configuration in which a plurality of different winning results are passed through when transitioning to the third predetermined gaming state, it is possible to prevent the flow of the game from becoming monotonous until the transition to the third predetermined gaming state. In particular, when the target third predetermined gaming state is reached, the impression is strong and tends to remain. Therefore, if a configuration is configured in which different types of winning results are passed through in the process of reaching the third predetermined game state, the effect of improving the degree of attention due to the diversification of the game by combining the plurality of types of winning results is suitably exhibited. be able to.

Feature K7. When the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the same determination mode as the determination mode corresponding to the first predetermined gaming state in the first predetermined gaming state, the special determination result is triggered by the determination result. The gaming machine according to feature K5 or feature K6, wherein the gaming state after the end of the gaming state is configured to be a predetermined gaming state other than the third predetermined gaming state.

According to the feature K7, in the first predetermined gaming state, even if the determination result (winning result) corresponding to the same determination mode as the determination mode corresponding to the first predetermined gaming state is obtained, the process does not shift to the third predetermined gaming state. .. With such a configuration, by limiting the trigger for transition to the second predetermined gaming state, the effects shown in the feature K5 and the like can be suitably exhibited.

Feature K8. When the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the same determination mode as the determination mode corresponding to the second predetermined gaming state in the second predetermined gaming state, the special determination result is triggered by the determination result. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature K5 to the feature K7, wherein the gaming state after the end of the gaming state is configured to be a predetermined gaming state other than the third predetermined gaming state. ..

According to the feature K8, in the second predetermined gaming state, even if the determination result (winning result) corresponding to the same determination mode as the determination mode corresponding to the second predetermined gaming state is obtained, the process does not shift to the third predetermined gaming state. .. With such a configuration, by limiting the trigger for transition to the third predetermined gaming state, the effects shown in the feature K5 and the like can be suitably exhibited.

Feature K9. The first predetermined gaming state and the third predetermined gaming state are both predetermined gaming states corresponding to the high probability mode, and the second predetermined gaming state is a predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature K2 to the feature K8.

According to the feature K9, the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode is set in the process of reaching the third predetermined gaming state while ensuring the superiority of the player by making the third predetermined gaming state correspond to the high probability mode. By making the configuration intervening, the flow of the game can be suitably changed. This is preferable in order to prevent the game from becoming monotonous when aiming for the third predetermined game state.

Feature K10. A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the receiving state. 71) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state are longer than those of the first switching mode. There is a second switching mode (high frequency support mode).
The first predetermined gaming state is the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the first switching mode, and the third predetermined gaming state is the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode. The gaming machine according to the feature K9.

When shifting from the first predetermined gaming state (high probability mode) to the second predetermined gaming state (low probability mode) to the third predetermined gaming state (high probability mode), the first predetermined gaming state is changed to the first switching mode and the first. By making each of the three predetermined gaming states correspond to the second switching mode, the rhythm of the game when the transition from the first predetermined gaming state to the third predetermined gaming state can be significantly changed.

Features K11. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
In the special information acquisition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry unit (actuated ball entry unit 62, 63) provided in the game area. (A function to execute the process of acquiring the pending information) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means (for lottery in MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to the jackpot result). (Function to execute the processing of) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the result of the determination is As a result of the notification corresponding to the above, the end of the game round operation is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The game time control means (a function of executing the game time control process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that controls the predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the operation port), and
Based on the determination result by the determination means being the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means being completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (for example, the second normal game). With a special game state transition means (a function of executing the game state transition process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the state to the fourth normal game state). With
As the determination mode (lottery mode) in which the determination is performed by the determination means, the low probability mode in which the probability of the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively low and the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information are obtained. There is a high probability mode with a relatively high probability,
As the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, the judgment result corresponding to the high probability mode corresponding to the transition to the high probability mode (probability variation jackpot result) and the judgment result corresponding to the low probability mode corresponding to the transition to the low probability mode are supported. Judgment result (normal jackpot result) is provided,
As the predetermined gaming state, the first predetermined gaming state (second normal gaming state), the second predetermined gaming state (third normal gaming state), and the player rather than the first predetermined gaming state and the second predetermined gaming state. A third predetermined gaming state (fourth normal gaming state), which is advantageous to the user, is provided.
A predetermined game state transition means for shifting the game state to each predetermined game state via the special game state is provided.
The predetermined game state transition means is
When the determination result by the determination means becomes a winning result in the first predetermined gaming state, the first transition means for shifting from the first predetermined gaming state to the second predetermined gaming state via the special gaming state.
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the winning result in the second predetermined gaming state transferred by the first transition means, the second predetermined gaming state is changed to the third predetermined gaming state through the special gaming state. It has a second migration means to migrate,
The determination result that triggers the transition from the first predetermined gaming state to the second predetermined gaming state by the first transition means, and the transition from the second predetermined gaming state to the first predetermined gaming state by the second transition means. A gaming machine characterized in that the determination mode corresponding to the determination result that triggers the game is configured to be opposite.

According to the feature K11, in order to shift to the third predetermined gaming state having a high advantage, it is necessary to sequentially win the determination result (winning result) in which the corresponding determination modes are opposite. In this way, by configuring the configuration in which a plurality of different winning results are passed through when transitioning to the third predetermined gaming state, it is possible to prevent the flow of the game from becoming monotonous until the transition to the third predetermined gaming state. In particular, when the target third predetermined gaming state is reached, the impression is strong and tends to remain. Therefore, if a configuration is configured in which different types of winning results are passed through in the process of reaching the third predetermined game state, the effect of improving the degree of attention due to the diversification of the game by combining the plurality of types of winning results is suitably exhibited. be able to.

Feature K12. The first predetermined gaming state and the third predetermined gaming state are predetermined gaming states corresponding to the high probability mode.
The second predetermined gaming state is a predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode.
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the low probability mode in the first predetermined gaming state, the first transition means goes through the special gaming state from the first predetermined gaming state and then the second. It is configured to shift to the predetermined game state,
The second transition means starts from the second predetermined gaming state when the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the high probability mode in the second predetermined gaming state transferred by the first transition means. The gaming machine according to feature K11, which is configured to shift to the third predetermined gaming state through the special gaming state.

According to the feature K12, when the determination result (winning result) corresponding to the low probability mode is obtained in the first predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode, the process shifts to the second predetermined gaming state, and the second predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode is obtained. When the judgment result (winning result) corresponding to the high probability mode is obtained in the gaming state, the process shifts to the third predetermined gaming state having a high advantage. In this way, if the winning result corresponding to the low-probability mode is obtained during the high-probability mode and then the winning result corresponding to the high-probability mode is obtained during the low-probability mode, the third predetermined gaming state is reached. It is possible to realize a novel game that has never been seen before.

Incidentally, it is also possible to change the description of "predetermined skill state" shown in the above-mentioned feature A group to feature K group to the description of "normal game state".

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: An operating means operated by a player (game ball launching handle 41), a game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means (game ball launching mechanism 110), and the launching thereof. It is provided with a ball passage (guide passage 103 of the guide rail 100, etc.) that guides the game ball to a predetermined game area (game area PE), and each game part (nails, etc.) arranged in the game area, and each of these game parts. A gaming machine that gives a privilege to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion (general winning opening 61, etc.).

Revolving gaming machine such as a slot machine: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a variable display of a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the final stop display of the symbol sequence, and the symbol changes start due to the operation of the starting operation means. A special game that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the stopping operation means or the predetermined time elapses, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A gaming machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-using belt-type gaming machine: Equipped with a variable display means that displays the symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then displays the symbol sequence in the final stop, and the symbol variation is started and stopped due to the operation of the starting operation means. A special gaming state (bonus) that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operation means or the predetermined time elapses, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. (Game, etc.) is generated, and further, a throwing device provided with a ball saucer and a throwing device for taking in a game ball from the ball saucer and a payout device for paying out the game ball to the ball saucer is provided. A gaming machine configured so that the operation of the starting operation means becomes effective when the gaming ball is thrown in.

10 ... Pachinko machine as a game machine, 41 ... Game ball launch handle, 60 ... Game board, 62 ... First operating ball entry section, 62a ... First operating port, 63 ... Second operating ball entry section, 63a ... Second Operating port, 64 ... upper variable winning device, 65 ... lower variable winning device, 75 ... symbol display device, 75a ... display screen, 81 ... main display unit, 143 ... notification / effect control device, 162 ... main control device, 602 ... MPU, 604 ... RAM, 652 ... MPU, 653 ... ROM, 654 ... RAM, 710 ... Display control device, D ... Main display unit, D1 ... First operating port display unit, D2 ... Second operating port display unit , PE ... Game area.

Claims (5)

The game board where the game area is formed and
Special information acquisition means for acquiring special information when a ball enters the starting ball entry portion provided in the game area, and
An acquisition information storage means capable of storing special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and an acquisition information storage means.
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the predetermined determination information, and
The game rotation operation is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the game rotation operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination. With this as one game time, a game time control means that controls a predetermined notification means so that a game time operation of each game time is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined gaming state. Special game state transition means to shift to a special game state,
A variable mechanism that can switch between a receiving state in which a game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the receiving state.
A switching control means for controlling the variable mechanism is provided.
As the switching control mode of the variable mechanism by the switching control means, a first switching mode and a second switching mode in which the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode are provided.
As the determination mode in which the determination is performed by the determination means, the low probability mode in which the probability of the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively low and the probability of the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information are relative. Has a high probability mode and
As the predetermined gaming state, a first predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode and the high probability mode and a second predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode and the low probability mode are provided. ,
When the number of consecutive times in which the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information reaches a predetermined number in the first predetermined gaming state, A first transition means for transitioning to the second predetermined gaming state after the end of the special gaming state, and
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information in the second predetermined gaming state shifted from the first predetermined gaming state by the first transition means, the special gaming state A gaming machine comprising a second transition means for transitioning to another predetermined gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first predetermined gaming state. In the second predetermined gaming state, the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the predetermined determination information in the second predetermined gaming state shifted from the first predetermined gaming state by the first transition means. In that case, after the end of the special gaming state, the transition to the second switching mode and the third predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode, which is another predetermined gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first predetermined gaming state. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is configured to be used. The game board where the game area is formed and
A game ball launching means capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on the operation of the player,
A gaming machine provided with a payout means for paying out a game ball based on the ball entering the ball entry portion provided in the game area.
Special information acquisition means for acquiring special information when a ball enters the starting ball entry section as the ball entry section, and
An acquisition information storage means capable of storing special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and an acquisition information storage means.
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the predetermined determination information, and
The game rotation operation is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the game rotation operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination. With this as one game time, a game time control means that controls a predetermined notification means so that a game time operation of each game time is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined gaming state. Special game state transition means to shift to a special game state,
A variable ball entry section as the ball entry section, which can be switched between a receiving state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepting state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the receiving state.
A control means for the variable ball entry section that switches the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the special gaming state is entered
A variable mechanism that can switch between a receiving state in which a game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the receiving state.
A control means for a variable mechanism for controlling the variable mechanism is provided.
As the special gaming state, a first special gaming state and a second special gaming state in which the variable input portion is in the receiving state for a shorter period than the first special gaming state are provided.
The first judgment information and the second judgment information are provided as the predetermined judgment information.
The special game state transition means
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the first determination result corresponding to the first determination information, the means for shifting to the first special gaming state and the means.
It has a means for shifting to the second special gaming state when the determination result by the determination means becomes the second determination result corresponding to the second determination information.
As the switching control mode of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, a first switching mode and a second switching mode in which the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode are provided. Ori
As a determination mode in which the determination is performed by the determination means, a low probability mode in which the probability of the first determination result corresponding to the first determination information is relatively low and the first determination result corresponding to the first determination information are performed. There is a high probability mode with a relatively high probability of becoming
As the predetermined gaming state, the first gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode and the low probability mode, and the second determination result corresponding to the first switching mode and the high probability mode and being more than the first gaming state. A second gaming state set to increase the frequency of the occurrence and a third gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode and the low probability mode are provided.
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first determination information in the second gaming state, the first transition to shift to the third gaming state after the end of the first special gaming state. Means and
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first determination information in the third gaming state shifted from the second gaming state by the first transition means, the first special gaming state The gaming machine is characterized by comprising a second transition means for transitioning to another predetermined gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the two gaming states. As the first determination result, a high probability mode correspondence result corresponding to the transition to the high probability mode and a low probability mode correspondence result corresponding to the transition to the low probability mode are provided.
The first transition means shifts to the second gaming state after the end of the first special gaming state when the determination result by the determination means becomes the result corresponding to the low probability mode in the second gaming state. It is composed and
The second transition means is said to be special when the determination result by the determination means becomes the high probability mode correspondence result in the third gaming state in which the first transition means has transitioned from the second gaming state. The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein the gaming machine is configured to shift to the other predetermined gaming state after the end of the gaming state. When the determination result by the determination means becomes the first determination result, the ratio of the first determination result being the high probability mode correspondence result is higher than the ratio of the low probability mode correspondence result. Ori,
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the high probability mode correspondence result in the second gaming state, the third transition means for shifting to the second gaming state after the end of the first special gaming state, and
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the result corresponding to the low probability mode in the third gaming state shifted from the second gaming state by the first transition means, the third after the end of the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to claim 4, further comprising a fourth transition means for transitioning to the gaming state.

Images